Osn 1500 2500 3500

1 Equipment Architecture ............................................................................... 1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 ...................................................... 1.
2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500 ...................................................... 1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A .................................................... 1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B .................................................... 2 Cabinet ........................................................................................................... 2.1 Types...................................................................................................... 2.2 Cabinet Configuration ............................................................................. 2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators .......................................................................... 2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit .................................................................. 2.2.3 Other Configuration........................................................................ 2.3 Technical Parameters ............................................................................ 3 Subrack .......................................................................................................... 3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500 ........................................................... 3.1.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3.1.2 Slot Distribution .............................................................................. 3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots ............................................. 3.1.4 Board and the Corresponding Slots for the External Subrack ....... 3.1.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 ........................................................... 3.2.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3.2.2 Slot Distribution .............................................................................. 3.2.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots ............................................. 3.2.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG .................................................. 3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A ......................................................... 3.4.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3.4.2 Slot Distribution .............................................................................. 3.4.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots ............................................. 3.4.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B ......................................................... 3.5.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3.5.2 Slot Distribution .............................................................................. 3.5.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots ............................................. 3.5.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 4 Board Classification and List ...................................................................... 4.1 Board Classification ................................................................................ 4.1.1 SDH Boards ...................................................................................
1-1 1-1 1-4 1-6 1-6 2-1 2-1 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-5 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-3 3-4 3-9 3-10 3-10 3-10 3-11 3-14 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-22 3-24 3-25 3-25 3-26 3-28 3-32 4-1 4-1 4-1
4.1.2 PDH Boards ................................................................................... 4.1.3 Data Processing Boards ................................................................ 4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards ................................................... 4.1.5 Other Boards .................................................................................. 4.2 Board Appearance ................................................................................. 5 SDH Boards ................................................................................................... 5.1 SL64 ....................................................................................................... 5.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.1.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.1.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.1.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.1.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 5.2 SF16/SL16 ............................................................................................. 5.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.2.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.2.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.2.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 ..................................................................................... 5.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.3.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.3.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.3.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1 ..................................................................................... 5.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.4.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.4.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.4.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1 ........................................................... 5.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.5.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.5.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.5.5 Version Description ........................................................................
4-4 4-5 4-7 4-9 4-11 5-1 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-10 5-11 5-13 5-14 5-14 5-17 5-17 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-22 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-29 5-31 5-32 5-32 5-33 5-34 5-35
5.5.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 5.6 SEP/SEP1/EU08/EU04/OU08/TSB8/TSB4 ............................................ 5.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.6.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.6.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 5.6.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.6.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.6.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 6 PDH Boards ................................................................................................... 6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8 ................................................................................. 6.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.1.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 6.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.1.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 6.1.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 6.1.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 6.1.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S ................................................................... 6.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 6.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.2.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 6.2.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 6.2.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 6.2.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B ................................................................. 6.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 6.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.3.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 6.3.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 6.3.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 6.3.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S .............................................................................. 6.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 6.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.4.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 6.4.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................
5-35 5-36 5-37 5-39 5-40 5-42 5-46 5-47 5-47 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-13 6-15 6-16 6-22 6-22 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-28 6-31 6-31 6-31 6-33 6-34 6-34 6-34 6-36 6-38
6.4.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 6.4.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 7 Data Processing Boards .............................................................................. 7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 ............................................................... 7.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.1.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.1.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.1.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.1.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 ........................................................................ 7.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.2.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 7.2.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.2.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.2.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 7.3 EMR0/EGR2 ........................................................................................... 7.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.3.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.3.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.3.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 7.4 ADL4/ADQ1 ............................................................................................ 7.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.4.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.4.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.4.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 7.5 IDL4/IDQ1 .............................................................................................. 7.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.5.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.5.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 7.5.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.5.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.5.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................
6-39 6-39 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-6 7-8 7-9 7-9 7-11 7-12 7-14 7-15 7-18 7-20 7-22 7-22 7-23 7-24 7-27 7-28 7-30 7-32 7-33 7-34 7-34 7-35 7-37 7-38 7-39 7-39 7-40 7-41 7-42 7-42 7-44 7-44 7-45 7-45
7.6 MST4 ...................................................................................................... 7.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.6.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.6.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.6.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.6.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards .............................................. 8.1 GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA/UXCSB/XCE .................................................. 8.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.1.1 Principle ......................................................................................... 8.1.2 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.1.3 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 8.1.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 8.1.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 8.1.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 ................................................................................ 8.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.2.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 8.2.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 8.2.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 8.2.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 8.3 GSCC/SCC ............................................................................................ 8.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.3.4 Version Description ........................................................................ 8.3.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 8.4 CRG ....................................................................................................... 8.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.4.4 Version Description ........................................................................ 8.4.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9 Other Boards ................................................................................................. 9.1 LWX ........................................................................................................ 9.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
7-47 7-47 7-48 7-50 7-51 7-51 7-52 8-1 8-2 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-7 8-7 8-7 8-7 8-9 8-9 8-11 8-11 8-14 8-14 8-15 8-15 8-17 8-17 8-17 8-19 8-22 8-22 8-23 8-23 8-24 8-25 8-27 8-28 9-1 9-1 9-2
9.1.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.1.4 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.1.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C ............................................................................... 9.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.2.4 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.2.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.3 BA2/BPA ................................................................................................ 9.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.3.2 Application ..................................................................................... 9.3.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.3.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.3.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.3.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.4 COA ........................................................................................................ 9.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.4.2 Application ..................................................................................... 9.4.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.4.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.4.5 Installation ...................................................................................... 9.4.6 Version Description. ....................................................................... 9.4.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.5 DCU ........................................................................................................ 9.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.5.2 Application ..................................................................................... 9.5.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.5.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.5.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.5.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI ............................................................................... 9.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.6.2 Principle Of AUX ............................................................................ 9.6.3 Principle of EOW ............................................................................ 9.6.4 Principle of SAP ............................................................................. 9.6.5 Principle of SEI .............................................................................. 9.6.6 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation ..................................................................... 9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper .................................................................
9-2 9-4 9-5 9-5 9-8 9-8 9-9 9-10 9-11 9-11 9-12 9-12 9-13 9-13 9-14 9-16 9-16 9-17 9-18 9-18 9-19 9-20 9-23 9-24 9-24 9-26 9-26 9-26 9-27 9-27 9-29 9-29 9-30 9-31 9-33 9-34 9-35 9-36 9-36 9-47 9-49
9.6.9 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.6.10 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 9.7 PIU ......................................................................................................... 9.7.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU ....................................................... 9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU .......................................................................... 9.7.4 Principle of R1PIUA ....................................................................... 9.7.5 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.7.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.7.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.8 UPM ....................................................................................................... 9.8.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.8.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.8.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.8.4 Precautions .................................................................................... 9.8.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.9 FAN/FANA .............................................................................................. 9.9.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN and N1FANA .................................................. 9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN ........................................................................ 9.9.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.9.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.9.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 10 Cables .......................................................................................................... 10.1 Fiber Jumper ........................................................................................ 10.1.1 Classification ................................................................................ 10.1.2 Connector .................................................................................... 10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable...................................................... 10.2.1 Cabinet C48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable ................................ 10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable .................................................... 10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable .................................................................. 10.2.4 Equipment -48 V/-60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cables ..................................................................................................... 10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable ............................................................... 10.2.6 UPM Power Cable ....................................................................... 10.3 Alarm Cable.......................................................................................... 10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable ............................................................... 10.3.2 Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks ................................................................................................. 10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack .........................................................................................
9-50 9-50 9-51 9-51 9-51 9-52 9-53 9-54 9-57 9-58 9-58 9-59 9-60 9-60 9-63 9-63 9-64 9-64 9-65 9-65 9-66 9-67 9-68 10-1 10-1 10-1 10-3 10-5 10-5 10-7 10-8 10-9 10-11 10-13 10-14 10-14 10-16 10-17
10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output Cable .................................... 10.4 Management Cable .............................................................................. 10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable ................................................................. 10.4.2 Serial 1C4/F&f Cable ................................................................. 10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable...................................................... 10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire ........................................................... 10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable ........................................................... 10.4.6 Straight Through Cable ................................................................ 10.4.7 Crossover Cable .......................................................................... 10.5 Signal Cable ......................................................................................... 10.5.1 75 ohm 8xE1 Cable ..................................................................... 10.5.2 75 ohm 16xE1 Cable ................................................................... 10.5.3 120 ohm 8xE1 Cable ................................................................... 10.5.4 120 ohm 16xE1 Cable ................................................................. 10.5.5 E3/T3/STM-1 Cable ..................................................................... 10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable ............................. 10.6 Clock Cable .......................................................................................... 10.6.1 Clock Cable .................................................................................. 10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable ............................................... A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board ....................................... A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description ................................................................. A.2 Board Indicator Description .................................................................... B Board Version Description .......................................................................... B.1 Board Version List .................................................................................. B.2 Version Description ................................................................................ B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board .......................................................... B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board............................................................ B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards ................................................... B.2.4 Other Boards ................................................................................. C Power Consumption and Weight ................................................................ D Glossary ........................................................................................................ E Acronyms and Abbreviations ..................................................................... Index .................................................................................................................
10-18 10-21 10-21 10-23 10-24 10-25 10-26 10-27 10-29 10-31 10-31 10-33 10-35 10-37 10-40 10-41 10-43 10-43 10-45 A-1 A-1 A-2 B-1 B-1 B-5 B-5 B-5 B-7 B-9 C-1 D-1 E-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description Manual
V100R003
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
BOM Date Document Version 31250390 May 20, 2006 T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd., Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China Postal Code: 518129 Website: http://www.huawei.com Email: support@huawei.com
Copyright 2006 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC, TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800, TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, HUAWEIOptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Contents
Contents
About This Manual...........................................................................................................................i 1 Equipment Architecture............................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 .......................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500 .......................................................................................... 1-4 1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A ....................................................................................... 1-6 1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B........................................................................................ 1-6
2 Cabinet .........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Types............................................................................................................................................ 2-1 2.2 Cabinet Configuration ................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators .............................................................................................................. 2-3 2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit..................................................................................................... 2-4 2.2.3 Other Configuration ........................................................................................................... 2-4 2.3 Technical Parameters................................................................................................................... 2-5
3 Subrack.........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500 ............................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.1 Structure............................................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1.2 Slot Distribution................................................................................................................. 3-3 3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots.................................................................................. 3-4 3.1.4 Board and the Corresponding Slots for the External Subrack ........................................... 3-9 3.1.5 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 3-10 3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 ............................................................................................. 3-10 3.2.1 Structure........................................................................................................................... 3-10 3.2.2 Slot Distribution............................................................................................................... 3-11 3.2.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots................................................................................ 3-14 3.2.4 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 3-18 3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG..................................................................................... 3-19 3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A........................................................................................... 3-20 3.4.1 Structure........................................................................................................................... 3-20 3.4.2 Slot Distribution............................................................................................................... 3-20 3.4.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots................................................................................ 3-22
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Contents
3.4.4 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 3-24 3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B........................................................................................... 3-25 3.5.1 Structure........................................................................................................................... 3-25 3.5.2 Slot Distribution............................................................................................................... 3-26 3.5.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots................................................................................ 3-28 3.5.4 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 3-32
4 Board Classification and List...................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Board Classification .................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.1 SDH Boards ....................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.2 PDH Boards ....................................................................................................................... 4-4 4.1.3 Data Processing Boards ..................................................................................................... 4-5 4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards ........................................................................................ 4-7 4.1.5 Other Boards ...................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.2 Board Appearance ..................................................................................................................... 4-11
5 SDH Boards.................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 SL64 ............................................................................................................................................ 5-1 5.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 5-2 5.1.2 Principle ............................................................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 5-4 5.1.4 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................... 5-5 5.1.5 Version Description............................................................................................................ 5-6 5.1.6 Technical Parameters ......................................................................................................... 5-6 5.2 SF16/SL16................................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.2.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 5-8 5.2.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 5-10 5.2.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 5-11 5.2.4 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................. 5-13 5.2.5 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 5-14 5.2.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 5-14 5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 ....................................................................................................................... 5-17 5.3.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 5-17 5.3.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 5-19 5.3.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 5-20 5.3.4 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................. 5-21 5.3.5 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 5-22 5.3.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 5-22 5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1........................................................................................................................ 5-24 5.4.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 5-25 5.4.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 5-26
ii
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Contents
5.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 5-27 5.4.4 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................. 5-28 5.4.5 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 5-29 5.4.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 5-29 5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1............................................................................................. 5-31 5.5.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 5-32 5.5.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 5-32 5.5.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 5-33 5.5.4 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................. 5-34 5.5.5 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 5-35 5.5.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 5-35 5.6 SEP/SEP1/EU08/EU04/OU08/TSB8/TSB4.............................................................................. 5-36 5.6.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 5-37 5.6.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 5-39 5.6.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 5-40 5.6.4 Protection Configuration.................................................................................................. 5-42 5.6.5 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................. 5-46 5.6.6 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 5-47 5.6.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 5-47
6 PDH Boards.................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8...................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 6-2 6.1.2 Principle ............................................................................................................................. 6-3 6.1.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.1.4 Protection Configuration.................................................................................................... 6-5 6.1.5 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................... 6-9 6.1.6 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 6-10 6.1.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S ..................................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-13 6.2.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 6-13 6.2.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-15 6.2.4 Protection Configuration.................................................................................................. 6-16 6.2.5 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................. 6-22 6.2.6 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 6-22 6.2.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 6-22 6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B ................................................................................................... 6-23 6.3.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-24 6.3.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 6-25 6.3.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-26
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
iii
Contents
6.3.4 Protection Configuration.................................................................................................. 6-28 6.3.5 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................. 6-31 6.3.6 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 6-31 6.3.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 6-31 6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S................................................................................................................. 6-33 6.4.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-34 6.4.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 6-34 6.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-34 6.4.4 Protection Configuration.................................................................................................. 6-36 6.4.5 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................. 6-38 6.4.6 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 6-39 6.4.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 6-39
7 Data Processing Boards.............................................................................................................7-1

7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8................................................................................................... 7-2 7.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Principle ............................................................................................................................. 7-4 7.1.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.1.4 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................... 7-8 7.1.5 Version Description............................................................................................................ 7-9 7.1.6 Technical Parameters ......................................................................................................... 7-9 7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 ........................................................................................................... 7-11 7.2.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 7-12 7.2.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 7-14 7.2.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 7-15 7.2.4 Protection Configuration.................................................................................................. 7-18 7.2.5 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................. 7-20 7.2.6 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 7-22 7.2.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 7-22 7.3 EMR0/EGR2 ............................................................................................................................. 7-23 7.3.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 7-24 7.3.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 7-27 7.3.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 7-28 7.3.4 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................. 7-30 7.3.5 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 7-32 7.3.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 7-33 7.4 ADL4/ADQ1 ............................................................................................................................. 7-34 7.4.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 7-34 7.4.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 7-35 7.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 7-37 7.4.4 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................. 7-38
iv
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Contents
7.4.5 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 7-39 7.4.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 7-39 7.5 IDL4/IDQ1 ................................................................................................................................ 7-40 7.5.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.5.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 7-42 7.5.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 7-42 7.5.4 Protection Configuration.................................................................................................. 7-44 7.5.5 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................. 7-44 7.5.6 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 7-45 7.5.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 7-45 7.6 MST4......................................................................................................................................... 7-47 7.6.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 7-47 7.6.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 7-48 7.6.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 7-50 7.6.4 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................. 7-51 7.6.5 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 7-51 7.6.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 7-52
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards ..........................................................................8-1

8.1 GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA/UXCSB/XCE ................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.1 Principle ............................................................................................................................. 8-3 8.1.2 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 8-4 8.1.3 Protection Configuration.................................................................................................... 8-7 8.1.4 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................... 8-7 8.1.5 Version Description............................................................................................................ 8-7 8.1.6 Technical Parameters ......................................................................................................... 8-7 8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16................................................................................................................... 8-9 8.2.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 8-9 8.2.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 8-11 8.2.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 8-11 8.2.4 Protection Configuration.................................................................................................. 8-14 8.2.5 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................. 8-14 8.2.6 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 8-15 8.2.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 8-15 8.3 GSCC/SCC................................................................................................................................ 8-17 8.3.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 8-17 8.3.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 8-17 8.3.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 8-19 8.3.4 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 8-22 8.3.5 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 8-22
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Contents
8.4 CRG........................................................................................................................................... 8-23 8.4.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 8-23 8.4.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 8-24 8.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 8-25 8.4.4 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 8-27 8.4.5 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 8-28
9 Other Boards ...............................................................................................................................9-1

9.1 LWX ............................................................................................................................................ 9-1 9.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 9-2 9.1.2 Principle ............................................................................................................................. 9-2 9.1.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.1.4 Version Description............................................................................................................ 9-5 9.1.5 Technical Parameters ......................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C .................................................................................................................. 9-8 9.2.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 9-8 9.2.2 Principle ............................................................................................................................. 9-9 9.2.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 9-10 9.2.4 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 9-11 9.2.5 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 9-11 9.3 BA2/BPA ................................................................................................................................... 9-12 9.3.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 9-12 9.3.2 Application....................................................................................................................... 9-13 9.3.3 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 9-13 9.3.4 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 9-14 9.3.5 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 9-16 9.3.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 9-16 9.4 COA........................................................................................................................................... 9-17 9.4.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.2 Application....................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.3 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.4.4 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 9-20 9.4.5 Installation........................................................................................................................ 9-23 9.4.6 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 9-24 9.4.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 9-24 9.5 DCU........................................................................................................................................... 9-26 9.5.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 9-26 9.5.2 Application....................................................................................................................... 9-26 9.5.3 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 9-27 9.5.4 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 9-27 9.5.5 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 9-29
vi
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Contents
9.5.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 9-29 9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI................................................................................................................. 9-30 9.6.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 9-31 9.6.2 Principle Of AUX ............................................................................................................ 9-33 9.6.3 Principle of EOW............................................................................................................. 9-34 9.6.4 Principle of SAP .............................................................................................................. 9-35 9.6.5 Principle of SEI................................................................................................................ 9-36 9.6.6 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 9-36 9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation ....................................................................................................... 9-47 9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper.................................................................................................... 9-49 9.6.9 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 9-50 9.6.10 Technical Parameters ..................................................................................................... 9-50 9.7 PIU............................................................................................................................................. 9-51 9.7.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 9-51 9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU ....................................................................................... 9-51 9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU........................................................................................................... 9-52 9.7.4 Principle of R1PIUA........................................................................................................ 9-53 9.7.5 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 9-54 9.7.6 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 9-57 9.7.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 9-58 9.8 UPM .......................................................................................................................................... 9-58 9.8.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 9-59 9.8.2 Principle ........................................................................................................................... 9-60 9.8.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 9-60 9.8.4 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 9-63 9.8.5 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 9-63 9.9 FAN/FANA................................................................................................................................ 9-64 9.9.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 9-64 9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN and N1FANA .................................................................................. 9-65 9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN ......................................................................................................... 9-65 9.9.4 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 9-66 9.9.5 Version Description.......................................................................................................... 9-67 9.9.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................................................... 9-68
10 Cables .......................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Fiber Jumper............................................................................................................................ 10-1 10.1.1 Classification.................................................................................................................. 10-1 10.1.2 Connector....................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable ......................................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Cabinet 48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable ................................................................... 10-5 10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable ..................................................................................... 10-7
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
vii
Contents
10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable ..................................................................................................... 10-8 10.2.4 Equipment 48 V/60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable .................................. 10-9 10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable .............................................................................................. 10-11 10.2.6 UPM Power Cable ....................................................................................................... 10-13 10.3 Alarm Cable........................................................................................................................... 10-14 10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable ............................................................................................... 10-14 10.3.2 Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks ................................. 10-16 10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack ..................... 10-17 10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output Cable.................................................................... 10-18 10.4 Management Cable................................................................................................................ 10-21 10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable ................................................................................................ 10-21 10.4.2 Serial 14/F&f Cable ................................................................................................... 10-23 10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable ...................................................................................... 10-24 10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire........................................................................................... 10-25 10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable ........................................................................................... 10-26 10.4.6 Straight Through Cable ................................................................................................ 10-27 10.4.7 Crossover Cable ........................................................................................................... 10-29 10.5 Signal Cable .......................................................................................................................... 10-31 10.5.1 75 ohm 8xE1 Cable...................................................................................................... 10-31 10.5.2 75 ohm 16xE1 Cable.................................................................................................... 10-33 10.5.3 120 ohm 8xE1 Cable.................................................................................................... 10-35 10.5.4 120 ohm 16xE1 Cable.................................................................................................. 10-37 10.5.5 E3/T3/STM-1 Cable..................................................................................................... 10-40 10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable.............................................................. 10-41 10.6 Clock Cable ........................................................................................................................... 10-43 10.6.1 Clock Cable.................................................................................................................. 10-43 10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable............................................................................... 10-45
A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board.............................................................. A-1

A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description.................................................................................................... A-1 A.2 Board Indicator Description ...................................................................................................... A-2
B Board Version Description .....................................................................................................B-1

B.1 Board Version List ......................................................................................................................B-1 B.2 Version Description.....................................................................................................................B-5 B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board............................................................................................ B-5 B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board ............................................................................................... B-5 B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards ....................................................................................... B-7 B.2.4 Other Boards .................................................................................................................... B-9
C Power Consumption and Weight..........................................................................................C-1 D Glossary .................................................................................................................................... D-1
viii
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Contents
E Acronyms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................ E-4 Index ................................................................................................................................................ i-1
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
ix
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 The OptiX OSN 3500 ..................................................................................................... 1-2 Figure 1-2 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500................................................... 1-3 Figure 1-3 The OptiX OSN 2500 ..................................................................................................... 1-4 Figure 1-4 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500................................................... 1-5 Figure 1-5 The OptiX OSN 1500A................................................................................................... 1-6 Figure 1-6 The OptiX OSN 1500B................................................................................................... 1-6 Figure 2-1 The 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet ..................................................................................... 2-2 Figure 2-2 The ETSI cabinet configuration...................................................................................... 2-3 Figure 2-3 The power distribution unit............................................................................................. 2-4 Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack ..................................................................... 3-2 Figure 3-2 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 3500........................................................................ 3-3 Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack ................................................................... 3-10 Figure 3-4 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)........................... 3-11 Figure 3-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation) ........................... 3-12 Figure 3-6 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation).............................. 3-12 Figure 3-7 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation) .............................. 3-13 Figure 3-8 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A.............................................................................. 3-20 Figure 3-9 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (before slot segmentation) ........................ 3-21 Figure 3-10 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (after slot segmentation) ......................... 3-21 Figure 3-11 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A ................................................................. 3-21 Figure 3-12 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B ............................................................................ 3-25 Figure 3-13 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation) ...................... 3-26 Figure 3-14 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)....................... 3-26 Figure 3-15 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation) ......................... 3-27 Figure 3-16 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation) ......................... 3-27 Figure 4-1 Board appearance.......................................................................................................... 4-11
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
xi
Figures
Figure 5-1 Principle block diagram of the SL64 .............................................................................. 5-3 Figure 5-2 The front panel of the SL64 ............................................................................................ 5-4 Figure 5-3 The principle block diagram of the SF16...................................................................... 5-10 Figure 5-4 The front panel of the SL16, SF16 and SL16A ............................................................ 5-12 Figure 5-5 The principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 .................................................. 5-19 Figure 5-6 The front panel of the SL4, SLD4, and SLQ4 .............................................................. 5-20 Figure 5-7 The principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1 ................................................... 5-26 Figure 5-8 The front panel of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1........................................................................ 5-27 Figure 5-9 The front panel of the R1SL4 and R1SLD4.................................................................. 5-33 Figure 5-10 The front panel of the R1SL1 and R1SLQ1................................................................ 5-33 Figure 5-11 Principle block diagram of the SEP1 .......................................................................... 5-39 Figure 5-12 The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, EU04, OU08, TSB8 and TSB4 ......................... 5-41 Figure 5-13 1:3 TPS protection of the SEP in the OptiX OSN 3500.............................................. 5-43 Figure 5-14 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SEP in the OptiX OSN 3500..... 5-44 Figure 5-15 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SEP in the OptiX OSN 2500..... 5-45 Figure 5-16 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SEP in the OptiX OSN 1500B.................... 5-46 Figure 6-1 Functional block diagram of the SPQ4 ........................................................................... 6-3 Figure 6-2 The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04 ......................................................................... 6-4 Figure 6-3 The 1:3 TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500........................................ 6-6 Figure 6-4 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500 ...... 6-7 Figure 6-5 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 2500 ...... 6-8 Figure 6-6 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 1500B ..................... 6-9 Figure 6-7 The functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A .......................................... 6-14 Figure 6-8 The front panel of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S............................................ 6-15 Figure 6-9 The 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500 ........................................ 6-17 Figure 6-10 Board layout upon 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500 ..... 6-19 Figure 6-11 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 n the OptiX OSN 2500....... 6-20 Figure 6-12 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B... 6-21 Figure 6-13 The functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM ......................................................... 6-25 Figure 6-14 The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B....................................... 6-27 Figure 6-15 The 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 ...................................... 6-29 Figure 6-16 Slot assignment upon 1:8 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 3500....... 6-30
xii
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Figures
Figure 6-17 Slot assignment upon 1:1 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 2500....... 6-31 Figure 6-18 The front panel of the PD1, PL1, L12S and L75S ...................................................... 6-35 Figure 6-19 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500 ...... 6-37 Figure 6-20 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 ............................................. 6-38 Figure 7-1 Functional block diagram of the EGT2........................................................................... 7-5 Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT8/EFF8/ETF4......................................................... 7-6 Figure 7-3 Functional block diagram of the EGS2......................................................................... 7-14 Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 ................................................................. 7-16 Figure 7-5 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 3500 .......................... 7-19 Figure 7-6 Board configuration upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 2500 ....................... 7-20 Figure 7-7 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OSN 1500B................................... 7-20 Figure 7-8 Functional block diagram of the EMR0........................................................................ 7-27 Figure 7-9 Front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2............................................................................. 7-28 Figure 7-10 Functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1 .................................................... 7-36 Figure 7-11 Front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1 ........................................................................... 7-37 Figure 7-12 Front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1 ............................................................................. 7-43 Figure 7-13 The functional block diagram of the MST4................................................................ 7-49 Figure 7-14 The front panel of the MST4....................................................................................... 7-50 Figure 8-1 Functional block diagram of the GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA/UXCSB............................ 8-3 Figure 8-2 Front panel of the GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCSA, UXCSB and XCE ................................ 8-4 Figure 8-3 Configuration of extended subracks ............................................................................... 8-6 Figure 8-4 Functional block diagram of the CXL16 ...................................................................... 8-11 Figure 8-5 Front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 ............................................................... 8-12 Figure 8-6 Functional block diagram of the GSCC........................................................................ 8-18 Figure 8-7 Position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame............................................. 8-19 Figure 8-8 The front panel of the GSCC and the SCC ................................................................... 8-20 Figure 8-9 Functional block diagram of the CRG .......................................................................... 8-24 Figure 8-10 Front panel of the CRG............................................................................................... 8-26 Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the LWX............................................................................ 9-3 Figure 9-2 Front panel of the LWX .................................................................................................. 9-4 Figure 9-3 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C serves as OTM station................................................................. 9-9 Figure 9-4 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C and LWX form OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals................................................................................................................................................ 9-9
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
xiii
Figures
Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C ................................................. 9-9 Figure 9-6 Front panel of the MR2A.............................................................................................. 9-10 Figure 9-7 Position of BA and PA in the network .......................................................................... 9-13 Figure 9-8 Functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA .................................................................. 9-14 Figure 9-9 Front panel of the BA2 and BPA .................................................................................. 9-15 Figure 9-10 Appearance of the 61COA or N1COA (PA) ............................................................... 9-17 Figure 9-11 Appearance of the 62COA .......................................................................................... 9-18 Figure 9-12 Application of Raman amplifier (62COA).................................................................. 9-19 Figure 9-13 Functional block diagram of 61COA and N1COA ..................................................... 9-19 Figure 9-14 Front panel of the COA or N1COA ............................................................................ 9-20 Figure 9-15 Front panel of the 62COA........................................................................................... 9-21 Figure 9-16 E2000 flange and fiber connector ............................................................................... 9-22 Figure 9-17 The position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet ......................................................... 9-24 Figure 9-18 The position of DCU in the optical transmission system............................................ 9-26 Figure 9-19 Functional block diagram of the DCU........................................................................ 9-27 Figure 9-20 Front panel of the DCU............................................................................................... 9-28 Figure 9-21 Functional block diagram of the AUX........................................................................ 9-33 Figure 9-22 Functional block diagram of the EOW ....................................................................... 9-34 Figure 9-23 Position of orderwire bytes in the SDH frame ............................................................ 9-35 Figure 9-24 Functional block diagram of the SAP ......................................................................... 9-35 Figure 9-25 Functional block diagram of the SEI .......................................................................... 9-36 Figure 9-26 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 3500)............................... 9-48 Figure 9-27 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 2500)............................... 9-48 Figure 9-28 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 3500)....................................... 9-49 Figure 9-29 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 2500)....................................... 9-49 Figure 9-30 The principle block diagram of the PIU...................................................................... 9-51 Figure 9-31 Functional block diagram of the R1PIU ..................................................................... 9-52 Figure 9-32 Functional block diagram of the R1PIUA .................................................................. 9-53 Figure 9-33 Front panel of the N1PIU............................................................................................ 9-54 Figure 9-34 Front panel of the Q1PIU............................................................................................ 9-55 Figure 9-35 Front panel of the R1PIU............................................................................................ 9-56 Figure 9-36 Front panel of the R1PIUA ......................................................................................... 9-57
xiv
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Figures
Figure 9-37 Appearance of the power box ..................................................................................... 9-59 Figure 9-38 Rear view of the power box ........................................................................................ 9-61 Figure 9-39 Rear view of the power box ........................................................................................ 9-61 Figure 9-40 Appearance of the FAN (OptiX OSN 3500) ............................................................... 9-64 Figure 9-41 Functional block diagram of the N1FAN and N1FANA............................................. 9-65 Figure 9-42 Functional block diagram of the R1FAN .................................................................... 9-66 Figure 9-43 Front panel of the R1FAN........................................................................................... 9-67 Figure 10-1 LC/PC optical interface............................................................................................... 10-3 Figure 10-2 SC/PC Optical interface.............................................................................................. 10-4 Figure 10-3 FC/PC optical interface............................................................................................... 10-4 Figure 10-4 E2000/APC optical interface ...................................................................................... 10-5 Figure 10-5 48 V cabinet power cable/cabinet BGND power cable............................................. 10-6 Figure 10-6 Cabinet PGND power cable........................................................................................ 10-6 Figure 10-7 Cabinet PGND power cable........................................................................................ 10-6 Figure 10-8 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable ............................................................ 10-8 Figure 10-9 Structure of the subrack power cable .......................................................................... 10-8 Figure 10-10 Structure of the 48 V/60 V power cable.............................................................. 10-10 Figure 10-11 Structure of the PGND power cable........................................................................ 10-10 Figure 10-12 Structure of the HUB/COA power cable................................................................. 10-12 Figure 10-13 Structure of the subrack power cable ...................................................................... 10-13 Figure 10-14 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable................................................................... 10-14 Figure 10-15 Structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks........ 10-16 Figure 10-16 Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack .................... 10-17 Figure 10-17 Structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable......................................... 10-19 Figure 10-18 Structure of the OAM serial port cable ................................................................... 10-22 Figure 10-19 Structure of the serial 14/F&f cable ...................................................................... 10-23 Figure 10-20 Structure of the RS-232/422 serial port cable ......................................................... 10-24 Figure 10-21 Structure of ordinary telephone wire....................................................................... 10-26 Figure 10-22 Structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable ............................................. 10-27 Figure 10-23 Structure of straight through cable.......................................................................... 10-28 Figure 10-24 Structure of the crossover cable .............................................................................. 10-29 Figure 10-25 Structure of the 75 ohm 8xE1 cable........................................................................ 10-31
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
xv
Figures
Figure 10-26 Structure of the 75 ohm 16xE1 cable...................................................................... 10-33 Figure 10-27 Structure of the 120 ohm 8 x E1 cable.................................................................... 10-36 Figure 10-28 Structure of the 120 ohm 16xE1 cable.................................................................... 10-38 Figure 10-29 Structure of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable....................................................................... 10-40 Figure 10-30 Structure of the extended subrack service connection cable................................... 10-41 Figure 10-31 Structure of the 75 ohm clock cable........................................................................ 10-44 Figure 10-32 Structure of the 120 ohm clock cable...................................................................... 10-44 Figure 10-33 Structure of the 1-channel 120 ohm/75 ohm clock transfer cable........................... 10-45 Figure 10-34 Structure of the 2-channel 120 ohm/75 ohm clock transfer cable........................... 10-46
xvi
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 Types of the cabinets for OptiX OSN products ................................................................ 2-1 Table 2-2 Description of ETSI cabinet indicators............................................................................. 2-3 Table 2-3 Mapping relation between terminals and PIU boards....................................................... 2-4 Table 2-4 Technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet ........................................................................ 2-5 Table 3-1 Slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500.......................................................................... 3-4 Table 3-2 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity) ..................................................................................................................... 3-4 Table 3-3 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity) ..................................................................................................................... 3-6 Table 3-4 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500....................... 3-7 Table 3-5 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 ............................ 3-8 Table 3-6 The relation between boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 external subrack .......... 3-9 Table 3-7 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack .................................................. 3-10 Table 3-8 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 2500.................................................................. 3-14 Table 3-9 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500.................. 3-14 Table 3-10 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500................... 3-16 Table 3-11 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500......................... 3-17 Table 3-12 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack ................................................ 3-18 Table 3-13 The relation between boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG......................... 3-19 Table 3-14 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A............. 3-22 Table 3-15 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A...................... 3-24 Table 3-16 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A .......................................................... 3-24 Table 3-17 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 1500B ............................................................. 3-28 Table 3-18 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B............. 3-29 Table 3-19 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B ................ 3-31 Table 3-20 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B...................... 3-32
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
xvii
Tables
Table 3-21 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B........................................................... 3-32 Table 4-1 SDH boards....................................................................................................................... 4-2 Table 4-2 PDH boards....................................................................................................................... 4-4 Table 4-3 Data processing boards ..................................................................................................... 4-5 Table 4-4 Cross-Connect and SCC boards........................................................................................ 4-7 Table 4-5 Other boards...................................................................................................................... 4-9 Table 5-1 Slots for the SL64 ............................................................................................................. 5-1 Table 5-2 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL64....................................... 5-6 Table 5-3 Technical parameters of the SL64..................................................................................... 5-6 Table 5-4 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with ITU-T G.692 ................. 5-7 Table 5-5 Slots for the SL16 and SF16 ............................................................................................. 5-7 Table 5-6 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SF16/SL16 ........................... 5-13 Table 5-7 Technical parameters of the SL16 and SL16A ............................................................... 5-14 Table 5-8 Technical parameters of the SF16................................................................................... 5-15 Table 5-9 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with G.692........................... 5-16 Table 5-10 Slots for the SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4 .............................................................................. 5-17 Table 5-11 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 ............... 5-22 Table 5-12 Technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4...................................................... 5-22 Table 5-13 Slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1 .............................................................................. 5-24 Table 5-14 The available optical interface of the SLT1 .................................................................. 5-24 Table 5-15 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1 ................ 5-29 Table 5-16 Technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1...................................................... 5-29 Table 5-17 Slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1............................................................ 5-31 Table 5-18 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for half-slot optical processing boards ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-35 Table 5-19 Technical parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1.......................... 5-35 Table 5-20 Slot for the SEP1,SEP, EU04, EU08, OU08, TSB8 and TSB4..................................... 5-36 Table 5-21 Different access abilities of the SEP1/SEP................................................................... 5-37 Table 5-22 Interfaces of the EU08, EU04 and OU08 ..................................................................... 5-42 Table 5-23 TPS protection of the SEP ............................................................................................ 5-42 Table 5-24 Slot assignment of the SEP, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500 ....................... 5-44 Table 5-25 Slot assignment of the SEP, EU08, EU04 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500............. 5-45 Table 5-26 Slot assignment of the SEP, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B..................... 5-46
xviii
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Tables
Table 5-27 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SEP1 .................................. 5-47 Table 5-28 Technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, EU04, OU08, TSB8 and TSB4.................. 5-47 Table 6-1 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 .............................................................................. 6-1 Table 6-2 Interfaces on the MU04 .................................................................................................... 6-5 Table 6-3 The TPS protection of the SPQ4....................................................................................... 6-5 Table 6-4 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500 ....................... 6-8 Table 6-5 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500 ....................... 6-8 Table 6-6 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B..................... 6-9 Table 6-7 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SPQ4.................................... 6-10 Table 6-8 Technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04................................................................ 6-11 Table 6-9 Slots for the PL3/PD3, PL3A, C34S, D34S, and TSB8.................................................. 6-12 Table 6-10 Interfaces on the C34S and D34S ................................................................................. 6-16 Table 6-11 The TPS protection of the PL3/PD3 ............................................................................. 6-17 Table 6-12 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:3 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500 ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-18 Table 6-13 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, C34S, TSB4 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500 ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-19 Table 6-14 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 2500 ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-20 Table 6-15 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, C34S, TSB4 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500 ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-20 Table 6-16 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 1500B ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-21 Table 6-17 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, C34S, TSB4 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B in the OptiX OSN 1500B ................................................................................................................ 6-21 Table 6-18 Technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S .................................. 6-22 Table 6-19 Slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B........................................................ 6-24 Table 6-20 Comparison between the PQ1A, PQ1B and PQM........................................................ 6-24 Table 6-21 Comparison between the D75S, D12S, and D12B ....................................................... 6-28 Table 6-22 The TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM..................................................................... 6-28 Table 6-23 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:8 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500 ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-29 Table 6-24 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:4 TPS in the OptiX OSN 2500 ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-30 Table 6-25 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B ....... 6-31 Table 6-26 Technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B ............................... 6-32
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
xix
Tables
Table 6-27 Slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S ...................................................................... 6-33 Table 6-28 Comparison between the PL1, L75S, and L12S ........................................................... 6-36 Table 6-29 The TPS protection of the PD1 ..................................................................................... 6-36 Table 6-30 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:2 TPS of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500 ........................................................................................................................................ 6-37 Table 6-31 Slot assignment upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B ......... 6-38 Table 6-32 Technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S ............................................. 6-39 Table 7-1 Slots for the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 ................................................................... 7-2 Table 7-2 Indicators of the EGT2 ..................................................................................................... 7-7 Table 7-3 Indicators of the EFF8 ...................................................................................................... 7-7 Table 7-4 Interfaces of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 ............................................................. 7-8 Table 7-5 Parameters for the Ethernet interface of EGT2/EFT8/EFT4 ............................................ 7-9 Table 7-6 Technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 ........................................... 7-9 Table 7-7 Parameters of the Ethernet optical interface types.......................................................... 7-11 Table 7-8 Slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 ............................................................................ 7-11 Table 7-9 Indicators of the EGS2.................................................................................................... 7-17 Table 7-10 Interfaces of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8.......................................................................... 7-17 Table 7-11 TPS protection of the EFS0 .......................................................................................... 7-18 Table 7-12 Slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500 ...................... 7-19 Table 7-13 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 .................................. 7-21 Table 7-14 Technical parameters of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 ....................................................... 7-22 Table 7-15 Slots for the EMR0 and EGR2 ..................................................................................... 7-23 Table 7-16 the layout of EMR0 and EGR2 uplink bandwidth........................................................ 7-24 Table 7-17 Indicators of the EGR2 ................................................................................................. 7-29 Table 7-18 Interfaces of EMR0 and EGR2..................................................................................... 7-30 Table 7-19 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2 ................................... 7-31 Table 7-20 Version description of the EMR0.................................................................................. 7-32 Table 7-21 Technical Parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2............................................................. 7-33 Table 7-22 Slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1...................................................................................... 7-34 Table 7-23 Parameters for the ADL4/ADQ1 .................................................................................. 7-38 Table 7-24 Technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1 ............................................................. 7-39 Table 7-25 Parameters of the ATM optical interface types ............................................................. 7-40 Table 7-26 Slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1 ........................................................................................ 7-40
xx
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Tables
Table 7-27 Paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1 ........................................................................ 7-44 Table 7-28 Parameters for the IDL4/IDQ1 ..................................................................................... 7-45 Table 7-29 Technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1................................................................ 7-45 Table 7-30 Slots for the MST4........................................................................................................ 7-47 Table 7-31 The service types and rates provided by the MST4 ...................................................... 7-48 Table 7-32 Technical parameters of the MST4 ............................................................................... 7-52 Table 8-1 Comparison among GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCSA, UXCSB and XCE............................... 8-2 Table 8-2 Indicators of the GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCS and XCE ...................................................... 8-5 Table 8-3 External clock interface of the GXCSA, EXCSA and UXCS .......................................... 8-7 Table 8-4 Technical parameters of the GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCSA, UXCSB and XCE .................. 8-8 Table 8-5 Comparison among CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 ................................................................ 8-9 Table 8-6 Indicators of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16.................................................................... 8-12 Table 8-7 Interfaces of CXL ........................................................................................................... 8-14 Table 8-8 Correspondence between C2 byte setting and service type ............................................ 8-15 Table 8-9 Technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16.................................................. 8-15 Table 8-10 Optical module types supported by CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16.................................... 8-16 Table 8-11 Button description of the GSCC ................................................................................... 8-20 Table 8-12 Indicator description of the GSCC................................................................................ 8-21 Table 8-13 Technical parameters of the GSCC............................................................................... 8-22 Table 8-14 Button description of the CRG ..................................................................................... 8-26 Table 8-15 Indicator description of the CRG.................................................................................. 8-27 Table 8-16 Technical parameters of the CRG ................................................................................. 8-28 Table 9-1 Slots for the LWX ............................................................................................................. 9-1 Table 9-2 Interfaces of the LWX....................................................................................................... 9-5 Table 9-3 Client-side optical interface parameters of the LWX........................................................ 9-5 Table 9-4 DWDM-side optical interface parameters of the LWX .................................................... 9-6 Table 9-5 Technical parameters of the LWX .................................................................................... 9-7 Table 9-6 Slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C ........................................................................... 9-8 Table 9-7 Interfaces of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C .......................................................................... 9-11 Table 9-8 Technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C ........................................................ 9-11 Table 9-9 Slots for the BA2 and BPA ............................................................................................. 9-12 Table 9-10 Technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA................................................................... 9-16
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
xxi
Tables
Table 9-11 Indicators of the 61COA, N1COA or 62COA .............................................................. 9-21 Table 9-12 Relation between output alarm and interface pin ......................................................... 9-23 Table 9-13 Technical parameters of the 61COA, N1COA and 62COA.......................................... 9-25 Table 9-14 Technical parameters of the DCU................................................................................. 9-29 Table 9-15 Slots for the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI........................................................................ 9-30 Table 9-16 Indicator of the AUX .................................................................................................... 9-37 Table 9-17 Interfaces of the N1AUX.............................................................................................. 9-38 Table 9-18 Pin assignment of CLK1 and CLK2 interface .............................................................. 9-39 Table 9-19 Pin assignment of ETH, COM, EXT and F1 interface ................................................. 9-39 Table 9-20 Pin assignment of F&f interface ................................................................................... 9-40 Table 9-21 Pin assignment of PHONE, V1 and V2 interface ......................................................... 9-40 Table 9-22 Pin assignment of LAMP1 and LAMP2 interface........................................................ 9-40 Table 9-23 Pin assignment of ALMO1 and ALMO2 interface ....................................................... 9-41 Table 9-24 Pin assignment of OAM interface ................................................................................ 9-41 Table 9-25 Pin assignment of S1, S2, S3 and S4 interface ............................................................. 9-42 Table 9-26 Pin assignment of ALMI1 interface.............................................................................. 9-42 Table 9-27 Pin assignment of ALMI2 interface.............................................................................. 9-43 Table 9-28 Pin assignment of ALMI3 interface.............................................................................. 9-43 Table 9-29 Pin assignment of ALMI4 interface.............................................................................. 9-44 Table 9-30 Interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel ..................................................................... 9-44 Table 9-31 Pin assignment of CLK interface.................................................................................. 9-45 Table 9-32 Indicators of the EOW .................................................................................................. 9-45 Table 9-33 Interfaces of the EOW .................................................................................................. 9-46 Table 9-34 Interfaces of the SAP .................................................................................................... 9-46 Table 9-35 Interfaces of the SEI ..................................................................................................... 9-46 Table 9-36 Jumper J9 setting .......................................................................................................... 9-49 Table 9-37 Technical parameters of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI ............................................... 9-50 Table 9-38 Interfaces on the N1PIU front panel ............................................................................. 9-54 Table 9-39 Interfaces of the Q1PIU ................................................................................................ 9-55 Table 9-40 Indicator of the R1PIU.................................................................................................. 9-56 Table 9-41 Interfaces of the R1PIU ................................................................................................ 9-56 Table 9-42 Indicators and the switch on the R1PIUA front panel .................................................. 9-57
xxii
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Tables
Table 9-43 Technical parameters of the PIU................................................................................... 9-58 Table 9-44 Indicators of the power box .......................................................................................... 9-61 Table 9-45 Interfaces on the power box front panel ....................................................................... 9-62 Table 9-46 Definition of the other pins........................................................................................... 9-62 Table 9-47 Technical parameters of the UPM................................................................................. 9-63 Table 9-48 Indicator of the N1FAN ................................................................................................ 9-66 Table 9-49 Indicators of the R1FAN............................................................................................... 9-67 Table 9-50 Technical parameters of the FAN.................................................................................. 9-68 Table 10-1 Classification of fiber jumper ....................................................................................... 10-2 Table 10-2 Classification of fiber connector................................................................................... 10-3 Table 10-3 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables ............................... 10-5 Table 10-4 Pin assignment of subrack power cable ........................................................................ 10-9 Table 10-5 Pin assignment of the 48 V/60 V power cable........................................................ 10-10 Table 10-6 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable .................................................................... 10-12 Table 10-7 Pin assignment of the UPM power cable.................................................................... 10-13 Table 10-8 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cable................................................................... 10-14 Table 10-9 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable............................................................. 10-15 Table 10-10 Pin assignment of indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks .... 10-16 Table 10-11 Pin assignment of alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-18 Table 10-12 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 3500/2500 ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-19 Table 10-13 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 1500 .... 10-20 Table 10-14 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables .................................................... 10-21 Table 10-15 Pin assignment of OAM serial port cable ................................................................. 10-22 Table 10-16 Pin assignment of the serial 14/F&f cable .............................................................. 10-23 Table 10-17 Pin assignment of the RS-232/422 serial port cable ................................................. 10-25 Table 10-18 Pin assignment of ordinary telephone wire............................................................... 10-26 Table 10-19 pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable ..................................... 10-27 Table 10-20 Pin assignment of the straight through cable ............................................................ 10-28 Table 10-21 Pin assignment of crossover cable ............................................................................ 10-30 Table 10-22 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables............................................................... 10-31 Table 10-23 Pin assignment of the 75 ohm 8xE1 cable ................................................................ 10-32
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
xxiii
Tables
Table 10-24 Pin assignment of the 75 ohm 16xE1 cable .............................................................. 10-34 Table 10-25 Pin assignment of the 120 ohm 8 x E1 cable ............................................................ 10-36 Table 10-26 Pin assignment of the 120 ohm 16xE1 cable ............................................................ 10-38 Table 10-27 Pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable........................... 10-42 Table 10-28 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables................................................................ 10-43 Table 10-29 Pin assignment of the 120 ohm clock cable.............................................................. 10-44 Table 10-30 Pin assignment of the 75 ohm/120 ohm clock transfer cable ................................... 10-46 Table B-1 N1 and N2 optical line interface boards...........................................................................B-5 Table B-2 Ethernet processing board version ...................................................................................B-6 Table B-3 N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards ............................................................................B-6 Table B-4 N1SCC and N1GSCC ......................................................................................................B-7 Table B-5 Q1 and Q2 CXL1/4/16 boards .........................................................................................B-8 Table B-6 Version description of PIU, AUX and FAN .....................................................................B-9
xxiv
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
About This Manual
About This Manual

Release Notes
This manual covers: The OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003 The OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003 The OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003
Related Manuals
The following table shows the manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OSN 2500, and OSN 1500.
OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Documentation Guide OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual System Description OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Manual OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Electronic Documentation OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual Networking and Application OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual System Description OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Manual OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Electronic Documentation OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual Networking and Application OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual System Description OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Manual OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Electronic Documentation OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual Networking and Application
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
About This Manual OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Routine Maintenance OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Alarm and Performance Event OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Commissioning Guide OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Configuration Guide
Note: The manual name with OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 indicates that the manual is shared by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.
Main points of the manuals for the OptiX OSN series products are as follows. Documentation Guide Introduces the contents and usage of the manuals. Technical Manual System Description Introduces the functionality, structure, performance, specifications, and theory of the product. Technical Manual Networking and Application Introduces the networking, protection, and application of the product. Hardware Description Manual Introduces the hardware of the product, including the cabinet, subrack, power, fan, board, and a variety of interfaces. Maintenance Manual Routine Maintenance Introduces the main items and precautions involved in routing maintenance. Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting Guides the analysis and troubleshooting of common faults. Maintenance Manual Alarm and Performance Event Guides the way of processing alarms and performance events. Installation Manual Guides the on-site installation of the product, covering the installation of cabinet, subrack and components, and grounding specifications. Commissioning Guide Introduces the equipment commissioning process, including indices of hardware, software, and service operation. Configuration Guide Introduces the way and procedures of configuring SDH services, Ethernet private line services, Ethernet LAN services, RPR services, and ATM services on the T2000.
ii
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
About This Manual
Electronic Documentation (CD-ROM) Covers all the preceding manuals. Acrobat Reader is attached.
Organization
The manual is organized as follows.
Chapter Description
Chapter 1 Equipment Architecture Chapter 2 Cabinet
Introduces the architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. Describes the dimensions, appearance, and technical specifications of the cabinets used by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500, and the configuration in the cabinets. Introduces the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 subracks. Lists the board types that can seat in the slots of the subracks. Classifies the boards into SDH boards, PDH boards, data processing boards, cross-connect and SCC boards, and other boards, and gives a detailed list of all available boards. Introduces SDH boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters. Introduces PDH boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters. Introduces data processing boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters. Introduces cross-connect and SCC boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters. Introduces other boards (for example, the system auxiliary interface board) in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters. Introduces the external and the internal cables of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500, and gives detailed description in terms of the structure, appearance, pin assignment, and technical parameters.
Chapter 3 Subrack
Chapter 4 Board Classification and List
Chapter 5 SDH Boards
Chapter 6 PDH Boards
Chapter 7 Data Processing Boards
Chapter 8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards Chapter 9 Other Boards
Chapter 10 Cables
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
iii
About This Manual Chapter Description
Appendix AAppendix E
Includes five appendices: Appendix A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board Appendix B Board Version Description Appendix C Power Consumption and Weight Appendix D Glossary Appendix E Acronyms and Abbreviations The appendices give a quick searching to equipment-related information during routine maintenance. Readers can locate the chapter where required information is covered through appendices quickly.
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for: Network administrator Maintenance engineer Provisioning engineer
Conventions
The manual uses the following conventions.
Symbol Conventions
Symbol Description
Warning Warning Warning Caution Caution
A warning notice with this symbol indicates high voltage could result in harm to person. A warning notice with this symbol indicates strong laser beam could result in personal injury. A warning notice with this symbol indicates a risk of personal injury. A caution notice with this symbol indicates a risk to equipment damage or loss of data. A caution notice with this symbol indicates the equipment is static-sensitive.
iv
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Symbol Description
About This Manual
Important Note Note
An important note notice with this symbol helps you avoid an undesirable situation or indicates important supplementary information. A note notice with this symbol indicates additional, helpful, non-critical information.
General Conventions
Convention Description
Boldface Italic Courier New
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Terminal display is in Courier New.
GUI Conventions
Convention Description
Boldface >
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the > signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Manual Version 1.34

Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version.

This release of the document is changed with style template. Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version. Add Appendix D Glossary.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
About This Manual

Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version.

Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version. Delete the description of the N1SL64 and N1SF64 board.

The hardware description manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 are combined into one. The manual is reorganized. Chapter 4 of the original manual is divided into 6 chapters (chapter 4 to chapter 9). Chapter 1 Equipment Architecture Introduces the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A and OptiX OSN 1500B respectively. Chapter 2 Cabinet Introduces the cabinet used by OptiX OSN series products. Chapter 3 Subrack Introduces the subrack structure and board configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500REG, OptiX OSN 1500A and OptiX OSN 1500B. Chapter 4 Board Classification and List This is a new chapter, which introduces board classification and gives a list of boards. The subsequent chapters (chapter 5chapter 9) give detailed descriptions. Chapter 5 SDH Boards The descriptions of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SL1 and R1SLQ1 are added. Chapter 6 PDH Boards The descriptions of the PL3A is added. Chapter 7 Data Processing Boards The descriptions of the N3EFS0, N3EGS2 and N3EFS4 are added. Chapter 8 Cross-connect and SCC Boards The descriptions of the CRG is added. Chapter 9 Other Boards The descriptions of the PIU and FANA are added. Appendix B Board Version Description
vi
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
About This Manual
It is newly added, introducing version characteristics of all boards of the OptiX OSN series products and their differences.

Chapter 3 Subrack The boards ETS8, SF64 and COA are added in the table 3-2. Chapter 4 Boards The detailed descriptions of following boards are added: ETS8, SF64 and COA. The detailed descriptions of following boards are modified and improved: EGS2/EFS0/EFS4. Chapter 5 Cables Classification and descriptions of cables are improved.

Chapter 3 Subrack The boards EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1, MR2A, LWX, EGT2, XCE and UXCS are added in the table 3-2. Chapter 4 Boards The detailed descriptions of following boards are added: EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1, MR2A, LWX, EGT2, XCE and UXCS.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
vii
1 Equipment Architecture
Equipment Architecture
This chapter introduces the architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B.
1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500

Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
1-1
Figure 1-1 The OptiX OSN 3500
The OptiX OSN 3500 can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet. Figure 1-2 shows the components when the equipment seating in a 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet. The OptiX OSN 3500 is composed of cabinet, side panel, power distribution unit, subrack, fixing frame for order wire, boards, and cables.
1-2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34

1
H W D
1. Cabinet 4. Fixing frame for order wire
2. Power distribution unit 5. Lower subrack
3. Upper subrack 6. Side panel
Figure 1-2 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
1-3
1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500

Figure 1-3 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 2500.
Figure 1-3 The OptiX OSN 2500
The OptiX OSN 2500 can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, or in a standard 19-inch cabinet. Figure 1-4 shows the components when the equipment seating in a 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet. The OptiX OSN 2500 is composed of cabinet, side panel, power distribution unit, subrack, fixing frame for order wire, boards, and cables.
1-4
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34

1
7 3
H W D
1. Cabinet 5. Middle subrack
2. Power distribution unit 6. Lower subrack
3. Upper subrack 7. Side panel
4. Fixing frame for order wire
Figure 1-4 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
1-5
1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A

The OptiX OSN 1500A is a case-shape equipment. It can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, a standard 19-inch cabinet, or be hanged on the wall and desktop mounting. Figure 1-5 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Figure 1-5 The OptiX OSN 1500A
1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B

The OptiX OSN 1500B is a case-shape equipment. It can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, a standard 19-inch cabinet, or be hanged on the wall. Figure 1-6 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Figure 1-6 The OptiX OSN 1500B
1-6
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
2 Cabinet
2
2.1 Types
Table 2-1 Types of the cabinets for OptiX OSN products
Cabinet Product ETSI 300-mm deep ETSI 600-mm deep 19-inch cabinet
Cabinet
This chapter introduces the dimensions, technical specifications, and the configuration of the cabinet equipped by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, or OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 2-1 shows the cabinets that can house the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B.
Access network cabinet
Hanging
OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
Notes: These cabinets should be provided by Huawei.
Figure 2-1 shows the appearance of the ETSI cabinet.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
2-1
2 Cabinet
H W D
Figure 2-1 The 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet
2-2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
2 Cabinet
2.2 Cabinet Configuration

There are indicators and a power distribution unit on the top of ETSI cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-2.
1 2
PowerCritical MajorMinor
Power distribution unit
H W D
1. Cabinet indicators
2. Power distribution unit
Figure 2-2 The ETSI cabinet configuration
2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators

Table 2-2 shows the description of cabinet indicators.
Table 2-2 Description of ETSI cabinet indicators
Indicator Status Description
Power indicator - Power (green)
On Off
The equipment is powered on. The equipment is not powered on. There are critical alarms. There are no critical alarms. There are major alarms. There are no major alarms. There are minor alarms. There are no minor alarms.
Critical alarm indicator - Critical (red)
On Off
Major alarm indicator - Major (orange)
On Off
Minor alarm indicator - Minor (yellow) On Off
Note: The cabinet indicators are driven by subrack, so you should connect the cable properly and power on the subrack first.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
2-3
2 Cabinet
2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit

Figure 2-3 shows the power distribution unit.
1 2 3 4 5 6
3 2 OUTPUT
A
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
B
ON OFF
32A
3 2 OUTPUT
ON OFF
32A 32A 20A 20A
INPUT
32A
20A
20A
1. Power socket (left) 4. Power cable NEG1()
2. Power cable RTN1(+) 5. Power cable NEG2()
3. Power cable RTN2(+) 6. Power socket (right)
Figure 2-3 The power distribution unit
To the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500A, the left output cable terminal feeds power to the PIU board on the left side of the subrack, and the right output cable terminal to that on the right side of the subrack. Table 2-3 reflects the mapping relation between the terminals and PIU boards.
Table 2-3 Mapping relation between terminals and PIU boards
Left terminal Connected to Right terminal Connected to
1 2 3 4
The PIU board on the left of the first subrack The PIU board on the left of the second subrack The PIU board on the left of the third subrack The PIU board on the left of the fourth subrack
1 2 3 4
The PIU board on the right of the first subrack The PIU board on the right of the second subrack The PIU board on the right of the third subrack The PIU board on the right of the fourth subrack
Note: To the OptiX OSN 3500, only terminal 1 and terminal 2 are in use normally. Terminals 3 and 4 can feed power to other equipment, such as COA. The subracks in the table are numbered from bottom to top.
To the OptiX OSN 1500B, the left output cable terminal feeds power to the upper PIU board of the subrack, and the right output cable terminal to the lower PIU board of the subrack.
2.2.3 Other Configuration

2-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
2 Cabinet
The cabinet can also house other external case-shape devices. Uninterruptible power modules (UPM) The UPM numbered GIE4805S can feed power to the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500 directly. The UPM converts the 220 V AC into 48 V DC, thus providing power for equipment without 48 V DC feeding and for storage battery when required. Case-shape optical amplifier (COA) The OptiX OSN 3500 and the OptiX OSN 2500 can be configured with two COA at most. The OptiX OSN 1500 can be configured with one COA. Fiber spooling frame: spooling redundancy fibers inside the cabinet
2.3 Technical Parameters

Table 2-4 shows the technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet.
Table 2-4 Technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) OSN 3500 subracks housed OSN 2500 subracks housed OSN 1500 subracks housed
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H)
55 79 60 84 70 94
1 1 2 2 2 2
2 2 3 3 4 4
Up to the cabinet capacity and the number of available power supplies
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
2-5
3 Subrack
3
The OptiX OSN 3500 The OptiX OSN 2500 The OptiX OSN 2500 REG The OptiX OSN 1500A The OptiX OSN 1500B
Subrack
This chapter introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the subrack of:
3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500

This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
3.1.1 Structure
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 adopts two-layer structure. It is divided into board area, fan area, and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-1.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3-1
3 Subrack
H W D
1. Interface board area
2. Fan area
3. Processing board area
4. Fibre routing area
Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
Interface board area: housing all interface boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 Fan area: housing three fan modules, enabling heat dissipation function Processing board area: housing all processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 Fiber routing area: for fiber routing
3-2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3 Subrack
3.1.2 Slot Distribution

The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 has two layers. The upper layer gives 16 slots for interface boards. The lower layer gives 18 slots, 15 slots of them for processing boards. Figure 3-2 shows the slot distribution.
S L O T 1 9 S L O T 2 0 S L O T 2 1 S L O T 2 2 S L O T 2 3 S L O T 2 4 S L O T 2 5 S L O T 2 6 S L O T 2 7 S L O T 2 8 S L O T 2 9 S L O T 3 0 S L O T 3 1 S L O T 3 2 S L O T 3 3 S L O T 3 4 S L O T 3 5 S L O T 3 6 S L O T 3 7
P I U FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5
P I U FAN
A U X
38
S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9
39
S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4
FAN S L O T 1 5 S L O T 1 6
40
S L O T 1 7 G S C C S L O T 1 8 G S C C
S L O T 1 0
X C S
X C S
Fiber Routing
Figure 3-2 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 3500
Slots for Interface Boards

Service interface boards: slots 1926, slots 2936
Slots for Processing Boards

Service processing boards: slots 18 and slots 1117
Slots for Other Boards

XCS boards: slots 910 GSCC boards: slots 1718 (Slot 17 can also hold a service processing board) Power interface boards: slot 27 and slot 28 Auxiliary interface boards: slot 37
Slot Mapping Table

Table 3-1 shows the slot mapping table which associates slots for processing boards to the slots for its corresponding interface boards.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3-3
3 Subrack
Table 3-1 Slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500

Slot for processing boards Slots for corresponding interface boards Slot for processing boards Slots for corresponding interface boards
Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot 13 Slot 15
Slots 19, 20 Slots 23, 24 Slots 29, 30 Slots 33, 34
Slots 21, 22 Slots 25, 26 Slots 31, 32 Slots 35, 36
3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots

Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 offers an 80 Gbit/s or 40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity depending on the type of cross-connect boards. Table 3-2 and Table 3-3 associate processing boards to the corresponding slots under the two cross-connect configurations.
Table 3-2 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity)
Slot 13slot 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slot 11slot 12 (10 Gbit/s) Slot 2slot 4 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 5slot 6 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slot 7slot 8 (10 Gbit/s) Slot 15slot 16 (1.25 Gbit/s ) (1.25 Gbit/s ) (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slots and capacity Slot 1 Slot 2slot 5, slot 13slot 16
Boards
N2SL64 N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A) N1/N2SLQ4 N1/N2SLD4, N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1 N1SLT1 (Note 1) N1SEP (Note 2) N1SEP1 (Note 2) N1/N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3 N1PL3A
Slot 17
3-4
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Slot 13slot 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slot 11slot 12 (10 Gbit/s) Slot 2slot 4 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 5slot 6 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slot 7slot 8 (10 Gbit/s) Slot 15slot 16 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slots and capacity Slot 1
3 Subrack Slot 2slot 5, slot 13slot 16
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Boards
N1PQ1, N1PQM N1EFS4 N1/N2EFS0 N1EGS2 N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGR2 N1EFT8(work with interface boards) N1EFT8 (led out from front panel) N1/N2EMR0 (work with interface boards) N1/N2EMR0 (led out from front panel) N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDQ1, N1IDL4 (Note 3) N1MST4 N1MR2A N1MR2C (Note 4) N1LWX N1/N2DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA -
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 17
Note 1: The SLT1 provides 18 optical interfaces when in slots 14 or slots 1516. The SLT1 provides 112 optical interfaces when in slots 58 or slot 1114. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 1926 or slots 2936.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3-5
3 Subrack
Table 3-3 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity)
Slot 14slot 16 (622 Mbit/s ) Slot 12slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slot 2slot 5, slot 13slot6 Slot 2slot 5 (622 Mbit/s ) Slot 6slot 7 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slot 1 (622 Mbit/s ) Slot 17 (622 Mbit/s ) Slots and capacity
Slot 8 (10 Gbit/s)
Boards
N2SL64 N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A) N1/N2SLQ4, N1/N2SLD4 N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1) N1SEP (Note 2) N1SEP1 (Note 2) N1/N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3 N1PL3A N1PQ1, N1PQM N1EFS4 N2EFS0 N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGR2 N1EFT8 (work with interface boards) N1EFT8 (led out from front panel) N1/N2EMR0 (work with interface boards) N1/N2EMR0 (led out from front panel)
Slot 11 (10 Gbit/s)
only slot 6
only slot 13 -
only slot 13 -
only slot 6 -
only slot 13 -
only slot 6
only slot 13
3-6
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Slot 14slot 16 (622 Mbit/s ) Slot 12slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slots and capacity
3 Subrack Slot 2slot 5, slot 13slot6
Slot 2slot 5 (622 Mbit/s )
Slot 6slot 7 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 1 (622 Mbit/s )
Boards
N1ADL4, N1ADQ1 (Note 3) N1IDQ1, N1IDL4 (Note 3) N1MST4 N1MR2A N1MR2C (Note 4) N1LWX N1/N2DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA
Slot 8 (10 Gbit/s)
Slot 11 (10 Gbit/s)
Note 1: The SLT1 provides 14 optical interfaces when in slots 15 or slots 1416. The SLT1 provides 112 optical interfaces when in slots 68 or slot 1113. Note 2: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are the same physically. They are used with the interface board when they are configured as "N1SEP" on the T2000, or the signal is directly led out from the front panel when they are configured as "N1SEP1". Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 is 622Mbit/s when in slots 1~5 or slots 14~16. The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s when in slots 6~8 or slots 11~13. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 1926 or slots 2936.
Interface Boards
Table 3-4 associates interface boards to the corresponding slots.
Table 3-4 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500
Slot 19 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22 Slot 23 Slot 24 Slot 25 Slot 26 Slot 29 Slot 30 Slot 31 Slot 32 Slot 33 Slot 34 Slot 35 Slot 36 Slots Boards
N1EU08 (Note) N1OU08 (LC interface) (Note) N2OU08 (SC interface) (Note)
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3-7
3 Subrack Slots Boards
Slot 19
Slot 20
Slot 21
Slot 22
Slot 23
Slot 24
Slot 25
Slot 26
Slot 29
Slot 30
Slot 31
Slot 32
Slot 33
Slot 34
Slot 35
N1EU04 N1MU04 N1C34S N1D34S N1D75S N1D12S N1D12B N1ETF8 N1EFF8 N1ETS8 N1TSB8 N1TSB4
Note 1: The OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the N1EU08, N1OU08, and N2OU08 board when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s.
Other Boards
Table 3-5 associates cross-connect boards, SCC boards, and auxiliary interface boards to the corresponding slots.
Table 3-5 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500
Slot 101slot 102 Slot 17slot 18 Slot 27slot 28 Slot 38slot 40 Slot 59slot 60 Slot 9slot 10 Slots
Boards
N1GXCSA N1EXCSA N1UXCSA N1UXCSB N1XCE (Note 1) -
Slot 37
3-8
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Slot 36
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Slot 17slot 18 Slot 27slot 28 Slot 38slot 40 Slot 59slot 60 Slots
3 Subrack Slot 101slot 102
Slot 9slot 10
Boards
N1GSCC N1PIU N1AUX N1FAN N1FANA N1COA, 61COA, 62COA (Note 2)
Slot 37
Note 1: The N1XCE can only seat in the extended subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500. Slots for the N1XCE are slot 59 and slot 60. Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1COA, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots, not physical slots.
3.1.4 Board and the Corresponding Slots for the External Subrack
Table 3-6associates boards supported by the external subrack to the corresponding slots.
Table 3-6 The relation between boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 external subrack
Slots Board slot 51~slot 55 slot 63~slot 66 slot 69~slot 76 slot 79~slot 86
N1PQ1, N1PQM N1MR2A N1D75S N1D12S N1D12B N1MR2C -
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3-9
3 Subrack
3.1.5 Technical Parameters

Table 3-7 lists the technical parameters of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 3-7 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
Dimensions Weight
722 mm (H) x 497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) 23 kg (net weight of the subrack, not including boards and fans)
3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500

This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack.
3.2.1 Structure
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500 adopts one-layer structure. It is divided into processing board area, interface board area, auxiliary interface area, fan area, and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-1.
2 1
H W D
1. Auxiliary interface area 4. PIU area
2. Interface board area 5. Fan area
3. Processing board area
Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack
3-10
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3 Subrack
Auxiliary interface area: including alarm interfaces, orderwire interface, clock interfaces, operation and maintenance interfaces, F1 port, serial ports and so on Interface board area: housing the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 Processing board area: housing the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and cross-connect and timing board. PIU area: housing two PIU modules, providing power for the OptiX OSN 2500 Fan area: housing two fan modules, enabling heat dissipation function

The subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500 has eight slots for interface boards and ten slots for processing boards. Figure 3-4 shows the slot distribution. Figure 3-5 shows the access capacity for the subrack. The OptiX OSN 2500 subrack supports slot segmentation. Slots 5, 6, and 7 can be segmented into two half-height slots respectively.
S S S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L L L O O O O O O O O O O T T T T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Processing board Processing board Processing board Processing board Interface board Interface board Interface board Interface board S L O T 11 Processing board S L O T 12 Processing board S L O T 13 Processing board S L O T 14 S L O T 15 Interface board S L O T 16 Interface board S L O T 17 Interface board S L O T 18 Interface board
CXL16/4/1
CXL16/4/1
Fiber routing PIU (Slot 22) FAN (Slot 24) FAN (Slot 25) PIU (Slot 23)
Figure 3-4 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
SAP
3-11
3 Subrack
CXL16/4/1
CXL16/4/1
PIU SLOT22
Fiber Routing FAN FAN SLOT24 SLOT25
1.25Gbit/s
622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
S L O T 1
S L S S S O L L L T O O O 5 T T T 2 3 4
S L O T 6
S L O T 7
S L O T 8
S S L L O O T T 9 10
S L O T 11
S L O T 12
S L O T 13
S L S S S O L L L T O O O 14 T T T 1 1 1 S 5 6 7 A P
S L O T 1 8
PIU SLOT23
Figure 3-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)
After segmentation, the slot distribution is shown in Figure 3-6, and the access capacity is shown in Figure 3-7.
S S S S S L L L L L O O O O O T T T T T 1 2 3 4 19 Interface board Interface board Interface board Interface board
S L O T 20
S L O T 21
S S S L L L O O O T T T 8 9 10
S L O T 11
S L O T 12
S L O T 13
S L O T 14
S L O T 15 Interface board
CXL16/4/1
CXL16/4/1
Figure 3-6 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)
3-12
SAP
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3 Subrack
S L O T 1
S L O T 2
S L O T 3
1.25 Gbit/s
622 Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
Figure 3-7 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)

Service interface boards: slots 1-4, slots 15-18

Service processing boards: slots 5-8 and slots 11-13 (before slot segmentation) Service processing boards: slots 5-8, slots 11-13, and slots 19-21 (after slot segmentation) CXL boards: slots 9-10 SAP boards: slot 14

SEI auxiliary interface boards: auxiliary interface area Power interface boards: slots 22-23 Fan units: slots 24-25
Slot Mapping Table

T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
1.25 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
S L O T S 4 L O T 5
1.25 Gbit/s
622 Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
S L O T 19
S S L L O O S S T T S L L S 20 21 L O O L O O T T T T 9 10 8 11 S S C C L L X X O O L L T T 16 16 6 7 /4 /4 /1 /1
S L O T 12
S L O T 13
S L S S S O L L L T O O O 14 T T T 1 1 1 S 5 6 7 A P
S L O T 1 8
3-13
3 Subrack
Table 3-8 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 2500
Slot for processing boards Slots for corresponding interface boards Slot for processing boards Slots for corresponding interface boards
Slot 6 Slot 12 Slot 6 (Note) Slot 7 (Note)
Slots 1, 2 Slots 15, 16 Slots 2 Slots 4
Slot 7 Slot 13 Slot 20 (Note) Slot 21 (Note)
Slots 3, 4 Slots 17, 18 Slots 1 Slots 3
Note: The slot is half-height slot after slot segmentation.

Processing Boards
Table 3-9 associates processing boards to the corresponding slots.
Table 3-9 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
Slots and capacity (622 Mbit/s ) (622 Mbit/s ) Before slot segmentation After slot segmentation Slot 7, Slot 21 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 5Slot 6 , Slot 19Slot 20 (1.25 Gbit/s ) (622 Mbit/s )
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
Slot 12
Boards
N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A), N1/N2SLQ4 N1/N2SLD4 N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1) R1SLD4 R1SL4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1 N1SEP (work with interface boards) (Note 2)
Slot 13
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
3-14
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Slots and capacity (622 Mbit/s ) (622 Mbit/s ) Before slot segmentation
3 Subrack After slot segmentation Slot 7, Slot 21 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 5Slot 6 , Slot 19Slot 20 (1.25 Gbit/s ) (622 Mbit/s )
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
Slot 12
Boards
N1SEP1 (led out from front panel) (Note 2) N1/N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3 N1PL3A N1PQ1, N1PQM R1PD1 R1EFT4 N1EFS4 N1/N2EFS0 N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGR2 N1EGS2 N1EFT8 (work with interface boards) N1EFT8 (led out from front panel) N1/N2EMR0 (work with interface boards) N1/N2EMR0 (led out from front panel) N1ADL4, N1ADQ1 N1IDQ1, N1IDL4 (Note 3) N1MST4 -
Slot 13
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3-15
3 Subrack Slots and capacity (622 Mbit/s ) (622 Mbit/s ) Before slot segmentation
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual After slot segmentation Slot 7, Slot 21 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 5Slot 6 , Slot 19Slot 20 (1.25 Gbit/s ) (622 Mbit/s )
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
Slot 12
Boards
N1MR2A N1MR2B N1MR2C (Note 4) N1LWX N1BA2, N1BPA -
Slot 13
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Note 1: The SLT1 provides 14 optical interfaces when in slots 56. The SLT1 provides 112 optical interfaces when in slots 78 or slots 1112. The SLT1 provides 18 optical interfaces when in slot 13. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4 and N1ADQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 is 622Mbit/s when in slots 5~6. The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s when in slots 7~8 or slots 11~13. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 14 or slots 1518.
Interface Boards
Table 3-10 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 18 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slots Boards
N1EU08 N1OU08 (LC type) N2OU08 (SC type) N1EU04 N1MU04 N1C34S
3-16
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Slots Boards
3 Subrack
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
N1D34S N1D75S N1D12S N1D12B N1ETF8 N1EFF8 N1ETS8 N1TSB8 N1TSB4
Other Boards
Table 3-11 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
Slot 101slot 102 Slot 22slot 23 Slot 24slot 25 Slot 9slot 10 Slots
Boards
Q1CXL1/4/16, Q2CXL1/4/16 (physical board) GSCC, SCC (logical board) CXL, ECXL (logical board) (Note 1) Q1SL1/4/16 (logical board) Q1SAP Q1PIU slot 82slot 83 slot 80slot 81
SEI area
Slot 14
Slot 50
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Slot 18 3-17
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
3 Subrack Slots
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Slot 101slot 102
Slot 22slot 23
Slot 24slot 25
Slot 9slot 10
Boards
Q1SEI N1FAN N1COA, 61COA, 62COA (Note 2) CAU (Note 2)
SEI area
Slot 14
Slot 50
Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 2500. It seats in slot 9 and slot 10. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL, SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 8081, 8283 and 910. Note 2: The corresponding slots for the CAU, N1COA, 61COA and 62COA are logical slots, not physical slots.

Table 3-12 lists the technical parameters of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500.
Table 3-12 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack
Dimensions Weight
472 mm (H) x 447 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) 17 kg (net weight of the subrack, not including boards and fans)
3-18
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3 Subrack
3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG

The OptiX OSN 2500 REG is used to regenerate STM-16 and STM-64 signals. The OptiX OSN 2500 REG uses the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. The subrack structure and slot assignment are the same as those of the OptiX OSN 2500. This section mainly describes the basic configuration of the REG.. Table 3-13 associates OptiX OSN 2500 REG boards to the corresponding slots.
Table 3-13 The relation between boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Slots Slot 22 slot 23 Slot 24slot 25 SEI area Slot 10 Slot 11 Slot 12 Slot 13 Slot 14 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9
Boards
N2SL16 N2SL64 N1SF16 Q1CRG Q1SAP Q1PIU N1FAN Q1SEI N1BA2 N1BPA N1/N2DCU -
The OptiX OSN 2500 REG can also be configured with UPM and COA as required for their specific slots. The configuration boards outside are same to those of the OptiX OSN 2500.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3-19
3 Subrack
3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A

This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
3.4.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500A adopts one-layer structure. It is divided into board area, fan area, PIU area and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-8.
2 3 4 6 5
1. Fan area 4. Interface Board 2. Board area 5. Fiber routing area
H W D
3. PIU area 6. Mounting ear
Figure 3-8 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board area: for holding the boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A Fan area: housing one fan tray assembly, enabling heat dissipation function PIU area: housing two PIU boards, providing power for the OptiX OSN 1500A Fiber routing area: for fiber routing

The OptiX OSN 1500A has 12 slots before slot segmentation. Figure 3-9 shows the slot distribution.
3-20
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34

Slot 1 Slot 20 Slot 12 Slot 13 FAN Slot 4 Slot 5 CXL16/4/1 CXL16/4/1 Slot 11 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 EOW AUX
3 Subrack
Figure 3-9 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (before slot segmentation)
The OptiX OSN 1500A supports slot segmentation. Slots 12 and 13 can be segmented into two half-height slots respectively. After segmentation, the slot distribution is shown in Figure 3-10.
Slot 1 Slot 20 Slot 2 Slot 3 FAN Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 11 Slot 12 Slot 13 CXL16/4/1 CXL16/4/1 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 EOW AUX
Figure 3-10 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (after slot segmentation)
Figure 3-11 shows the access capacity for the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Slot XCS A 1 Slot 2/12 Slot20 Slot 3/13 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 11 2.5 Gbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s XCS B Slot 6 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 7 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 8 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 9 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 10
Figure 3-11 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A
The access capacity for slot 12 or slot 13 is 2.5 Gbit/s before slot segmentation. After slot segmentation, the access capacity for half-height slot 2, slot 3, slot 12 or slot 13 is 1.25 Gbit/s.

Service processing boards: slots 69 and slots 1213 (before slot segmentation) Service processing boards: slots 69, slots 1213, slots 23 (after slot segmentation) CXL boards: slots 45 EOW boards: slot 9(also for the processing boards)

Auxiliary interface boards: slot 10 Power interface boards: slot 1 and slot 11
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3-21
3 Subrack
Fan units: slot 20

Processing Boards
Table 3-14 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A
Slot 12slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slots and capacity Slot 6 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Before slot segmentation Slot 7 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 8 (1.25 Gbit/s) Slot 9 (1.25 Gbit/s) Slot 2 (1.25 Gbit/s) After slot segmentation Slot 3 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 12 (1.25 Gbit/s) Slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Boards
N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A), N1/N2SLQ4, N1/N2SLD4, N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1) N1SEP1 (led out from front panel) R1SLD4, R1SL4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1 R1PD1A, R1PD1B R1PL1A, R1PL1B N1PL3A R1L75S, R1L12S N1EFS4 R1EFT4 -
3-22
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Slots and capacity Slot 6 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Before slot segmentation Slot 12slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slot 7 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 8 (1.25 Gbit/s) Slot 9 (1.25 Gbit/s) Slot 2 (1.25 Gbit/s)
3 Subrack After slot segmentation Slot 3 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 12 (1.25 Gbit/s) Slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Boards
N1/N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGR2 N1EFT8 (led out from front panel) N1/N2EMR0 (led out from front panel) N1MST4 N1ADL4(Note 2), N1ADQ1(Note 2) N1IDQ1(Note 2), N1IDL4(Note 2) N1MR2A N1MR2B N1LWX N1BA2, N1BPA
Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 1500A provides 112 optical interfaces. Note 2: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s.
Other Boards
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3-23
3 Subrack
Table 3-15 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A
Slot 101slot 102 Slot 1, slot 11 Slot 4slot 5 Boards
Slot 10
Slot 20
Slots
Q1CXL1/4/16, Q2CXL1/4/16 (physical board) (Note 1) GSCC, SCC (logical board) CXL, ECXL (logical board) Q1SL1/4/16 (logical board) R1EOW R1AUX, R2AUX R1PIUA R1FAN N1COA, 61COA, 62COA (Note 2) CAU (Note 2) Slots 82, 83 Slots 80, 81
Slot 50
Slot 9
Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 1500. It seats in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL, SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 8081, 8283 and 45. Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1COA, 61COA, 62COA, and CAU are logical slots, not physical slots.

Table 3-16 lists the technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A equipment.
Table 3-16 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Dimensions Weight
131mm mm (H) x 444 mm (W) x 262 mm (D) 8 kg (including backboard, 2 pieces PIU and fan)
3-24
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3 Subrack
3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B

This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
3.5.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500B adopts two-layer structure. It is divided into processing board area, interface board area, auxiliary interface area, fan area, and PIU area, as shown in Figure 3-12.
4 4 H 5 6 7 W D
1. Interface board area 4. Processing board area 7. Mounting ear
2. PIU area 5. Auxiliary interface area
3. Fan area 6. Fiber routing area
Figure 3-12 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Processing board area: for holding the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B Interface board area: for holding the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B Auxiliary interface area: including alarm interfaces, orderwire interface, clock interfaces, operation and maintenance interfaces, F1 port, serial ports and so on Fan area: housing one fan module, enabling heat dissipation function
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3-25
3 Subrack
PIU area: housing PIU modules, providing power for equipment Fiber routing area: for fiber routing

The OptiX OSN 1500B has four slots for interface boards on the upper layer and ten slots (including slot 4 and slot 5) for processing boards before slot segmentation. Figure 3-13 shows the slot distribution. Figure 3-14 shows the access capacity for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 19 Slot 17 Slot 11 Slot 20 Slot 12 Slot 13 FAN Slot 4 Slot 5 CXL16/4/1 CXL16/4/1 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 EOW AUX PIU Slot 18 PIU
Figure 3-13 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)
Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 19 Slot 17 Slot 11 Slot 20 Slot 12 Slot 13 FAN Slot 4 Slot 5 2.5 Gbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 622 Mbit/s 622 Mbit/s 622 Mbit/s 622 Mbit/s AUX PIU Slot 18 PIU
Figure 3-14 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)
The OptiX OSN 1500B supports slot segmentation. Slots 11, 12, and13 can be segmented into two half-height slots respectively. After segmentation, the slot distribution is shown in Figure 3-15, and the access capacity is shown in Figure 3-16.
3-26
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34

Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 19 Slot 17 Slot 1 Slot 20 Slot 2 Slot 3 FAN Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 11 Slot 12 Slot 13 CXL16/4/1 CXL16/4/1 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 EOW AUX PIU Slot 18 PIU
3 Subrack
Figure 3-15 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)
Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 19 Slot 17 Slot 1 Slot 20 Slot 2 Slot 3 FAN 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 11 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 12 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 13 1.25 Gbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 622 Mbit/s 622 Mbit/s 622 Mbit/s 622 Mbit/s AUX PIU Slot 18 PIU
Figure 3-16 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)

Service interface boards: slots 1417

Service processing board: slots 49 and slots 1113 (before slot segmentation) Service processing board: slots 19 and slots 1113 (after slot segmentation) CXL board: slots 45

Auxiliary interface boards: slot 10 Orderwire boards: slot 9 (also for the processing boards) Fan units: slot 20 Power interface boards: slots 1819
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3-27
3 Subrack
Slot Mapping Table

Table 3-17 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Slot for processing boards Slot for corresponding interface boards
Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 12 Slot 13
Slot 14 Slot 16 Slot 15 Slot 17 Slots 14, 15 Slots 16, 17
Note: The interface boards of the PD3, PL3, SEP, and SPQ4 boards can only be inserted in corresponding slots in even number. Slot 12 and slot 7 share slot 15 for interface boards. When the R1PD1 is seated in slot12, the R1PL1 can not be seated in slot7. On the other side, when the R1PD1 is seated in slot7, the R1PL1 can not be seated in slot12. Slot 13 and slot 8 share slot 17 for interface boards. When R1PD1 is seated in slot13, R1PL1 can not seated in slot8.

Processing Boards
3-28
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3 Subrack
Table 3-18 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots and capacity Before slot segmentation After slot segmentatio n Slot 11slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 1slot 3 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s ) Slot 12 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 8 (622 Mbit/s)
Slot 9 (622 Mbit/s)
Boards
N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A), N1/N2SLQ4, N1/N2SLD4, N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1) R1SLD4 R1SL4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1 N1SEP (work with interface boards) (Note 2) N1SEP1 (led out from front panel) (Note 2) N1/N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3 N1PL3A N1PQ1, N1PQM R1PD1 R1PL1A, R1PL1B R1EFT4 N1EFS4 N1/N2EFS0
Slot 11 (2.5 Gbit/s)
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3-29
3 Subrack Slots and capacity Before slot segmentation
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual After slot segmentatio n Slot 11slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 1slot 3 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s ) Slot 12 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 8 (622 Mbit/s)
Slot 9 (622 Mbit/s)
Boards
N1/N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGR2 N1EFT8 (work with interface boards) N1EFT8 (led out from front panel)
Slot 11 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N2EMR0 (work with interface boards) N2EMR0 (led out from front panel) N1ADL4, N1ADQ1 N1IDQ1, N1IDL4 (Note 3) N1MST4 N1MR2A N1MR2B N1MR2C (Note 4) N1LWX N1BA2, N1BPA -
Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B provides 112 optical interfaces. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 1417.
3-30
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3 Subrack
Interface Boards
Table 3-19 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Slots Boards
N1EU08 N1OU08 (LC type) N2OU08 (SC type) N1EU04 N1MU04 N1C34S N1D34S N1D75S N1D12S N1D12B N1ETF8 N1EFF8 N1ETS8 N1TSB8 N1TSB4
Other Boards
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
3-31
3 Subrack
Table 3-20 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Slot 101slot 102 Slots Slot 18, slot 19 Slot 4slot 5 Slot 10 Slot 20 Slot 50 Slot 9
Boards
Q1CXL1/4/16, Q2CXL1/4/16 (physical board) (Note 1) GSCC, SCC (logical board) CXL, ECXL (Logical board) Q1SL1/4/16 (logical board) R1EOW R1AUX, R2AUX R1PIU R1FAN N1COA, 61COA, 62COA (Note 2) CAU Slot 82, 83 Slot 80, 81
Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 1500B. It seats in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL, SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 8081, 8283 and 45. Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1COA, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots, not physical slots.

Table 3-21 lists the technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-21 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Dimensions Weight
221 mm (H) x 444 mm (W) x 263 mm (D) 9 kg (including backboard, 2 pieces PIU and fan)
3-32
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
4 Board Classification and List
Board Classification and List
This chapter introduces the classification and appearance of the boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500REG, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B.
4.1 Board Classification

Most boards of the OptiX OSN products are interchangeable. The same boards can be used either in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500REG, and OptiX OSN 1500A or in the OptiX OSN 1500B equipments. This section classifies the boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500REG and OptiX OSN 1500 by function. Boards are classified into the following types. SDH boards PDH boards Data processing boards Cross-Connect and SCC boards Other boards
4.1.1 SDH Boards

Table 4-1 lists the SDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN products.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
4-1
Table 4-1 SDH boards

Product Board Description 3500 (40 Gbit/s) 3500 (80 Gbit/s) 2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B
N2SL64 N1SL16(A) N2SL16(A) N1SF16
STM-64 processing board STM-16 processing board STM-16 processing board STM-16 processing board with FEC 4 x STM-4 processing board 4 x STM-4 processing board 2 x STM-4 processing board 2 x STM-4 processing board 1 x STM-4 processing board 1 x STM-4 processing board 12 x STM-1 processing board 4 x STM-1 processing board 4 x STM-1 processing board 1 x STM-1 processing board 1 x STM-1 processing board 2 x STM-4 processing board (half-height slot)
N1SLQ4 N2SLQ4 N1SLD4 N2SLD4 N1SL4 N2SL4 N1SLT1 N1SLQ1 N2SLQ1 N1SL1 N2SL1 R1SLD4
4-2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Product Board Description 3500 (40 Gbit/s) 3500 (80 Gbit/s) 2500REG
4 Board Classification and List 2500 1500A 1500B
R1SL4
1 x STM-4 processing board (half-height slot) 4x STM-1 processing board (half-height slot) 1x STM-1 processing board (half-height slot) 2XSTM-1 processing board(led out from front panel) 8XSTM-1 processing board(work with interface boards) 8 x STM-1 interface board (e) 4 x STM-1 interface board (e) 8 x STM-1 interface board (o) 8 x STM-1 interface board (o) 8-channel switching & bridging board 4-channel switching & bridging board
R1SLQ1
R1SL1
N1SEP1
N1SEP
N1EU08 N1EU04 N1OU08 N2OU08 N1TSB8
N1TSB4
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
4-3
4.1.2 PDH Boards

Table 4-2 lists the PDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN products.
Table 4-2 PDH boards
N1PQ1A/B
63 x E1 processing board(75 ohm/120 ohm) 32 x E1 processing board(75 ohm/120 ohm) 16 x E1 processing board (75 ohm/120 ohm) 16 x E1/T1 switching interface board(75 ohm) 16 x E1/T1 switching interface board(120 ohm) 63 x T1/E1 processing board 6 x E3/T3 processing board 3 x E3/T3 processing board 3 x E3/T3 processing board 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board 32 x E1/T1 switching interface board(75 ohm) 32 x E1/T1 switching interface board(120 ohm)
R1PD1A/B
R1PL1A/B
R1L75S
R1L12S
N1PQM N1PD3 N1PL3 N1PL3A N1SPQ4 N2SPQ4 N1D75S
N1D12S
4-4
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
N1D12B N1D34S N1C34S N1MU04 N1TSB8
32 x E1/T1 interface board 6 x E3/T3 PDH interface board 3 x E3/T3 PDH interface board 4 x E4/STM-1 interface board 8-channel switching & bridging board 4-channel switching & bridging board
N1TSB4
4.1.3 Data Processing Boards

Table 4-3 lists the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN products, including ATM boards and Ethernet boards.
Table 4-3 Data processing boards
N1EFS4
4-port FE processing board with L2 switching FE processing board with L2 switching FE processing board with L2 switching 2-port Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board
N1EFS0
N2EFS0
N1EGS2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
4-5
4 Board Classification and List Product Board Description 3500 (40 Gbit/s) 3500 (80 Gbit/s) 2500REG
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual 2500 1500A 1500B
N2EGS2
2-port Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board 2-port Gigabit Ethernet transparent transmission board 16-port Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board(with interface board) 8-port Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board(without interface board)
N1EGT2
N1EFT8
R1EFT4
4-port Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board 12 FE + 1 GE Ethernet processing board with RPR function 12 FE + 1 GE Ethernet processing board with RPR function 2-port GE processing board with RPR function 8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board
N1EMR0
N2EMR0
N2EGR2
N1EFF8
4-6
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
N1ETF8
8-port 10/100M BASE-T fast Ethernet interface board 8-port 10/100M BASE-T Ethernet interface switching board 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board 4 x STM-1ATM service processing board 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board with IMA (Note 1) 4 x STM-1 ATM service processing board with IMA (Note 1) 4 x multi-service transparent transmission processing board
N1ETS8
N1ADL4
N1ADQ1
N1IDL4(Note 1)
N1IDQ1(Note 1)
N1MST4
Note 1: IMA is a kind of function named inverse multiplexing ATM.
4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards

Table 4-4 lists the cross-connect and SCC boards supported by the OptiX OSN products.
Table 4-4 Cross-Connect and SCC boards
N1GXCSA
Cross-connect and timing board (40 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
4-7
N1EXCSA
Enhanced cross-connect and timing board (80Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order) Super cross-connect and timing board (80 Gbit/s higher order, 20 Gbit/s lower order) Super cross-connect and timing board (80 higher order, 20 Gbit/s lower order, supporting extended subrack) Lower order cross-connect and timing board for extended subrack (1.25 Gbit/s) STM-1 line, system control, cross-connect and timing board (20 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order) STM-4 line, system control, cross-connect and timing board (20 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order) STM-16 line, system control, cross-connect and timing board (20 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order) STM-1 line, system control, cross-connect and timing board (20 Gbit/s higher order, 20 Gbit/s lower order)
N1UXCSA
N1UXCSB
N1XCE
Q1CXL1
Q1CXL4
Q1CXL16
Q2CXL1
4-8
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Q2CXL4
STM-4 line, system control, cross-connect and timing board (20 Gbit/s higher order, 20 Gbit/s lower order) STM-16 line, system control, cross-connect and timing board (20 Gbit/s higher order, 20 Gbit/s lower order) System control and communication board System control and communication board (supporting intelligent features) System control, communication and timing board for OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Q2CXL16
N1SCC(NOT E 1) N1GSCC(NO TE 1)
Q1CRG
NOTE 1: From versions later than V100R003, the OSN products do not support the N1SCC. The N1SCC has the same function with that of N1GSCC except extended subrack and intelligent function.
4.1.5 Other Boards

Table 4-5 lists the other boards supported by the OptiX OSN products.
Table 4-5 Other boards
N1MR2A
2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (half-height slot)
N1MR2B
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
4-9
N1MR2C
2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (interface area) Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board Booster amplifier and pre-amplifier board Booster amplifier board Dispersion compensate board Power interface board Power interface board Power interface board Power interface board Fan board Fan board Fan board (large power) Orderwire board Extended signal interface board System auxiliary processing board System auxiliary interface board System auxiliary interface board System auxiliary interface board External case-shape optical amplifier
N1LWX
N1BPA N1BA2 N1/N2DCU N1PIU Q1PIU R1PIU R1PIUA N1FAN R1FAN N1FANA R1EOW Q1SEI Q1SAP N1AUX R1AUX R2AUX N1COA, 61COA, 62COA
4-10
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
UPM
External uninterruptible power modules
4.2 Board Appearance

Figure 4-1 shows the board appearance of the OptiX OSN products.
1. Optical interface
2. Ejector lever
3. Protecting cover board
Figure 4-1 Board appearance
Caution Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD wrist strap is well grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board.
Warning It is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface board and the optical interface, lest the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
4-11
5 SDH Boards
5
Functionality Principle Front panel Parameter configuration Protection configuration Version description Technical parameters
SDH Boards
This chapter introduces the SDH boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500REG, and OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of:
The SDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 are listed in Table 4-1.
5.1 SL64
The SL64 is the 1 x STM-64 processing board. Table 5-1 lists the slots for the SL64 board.
Table 5-1 Slots for the SL64
Product SL64
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 78, 1112 Slots 8, 11 Not available Slots 58, 1113 Not available Not available
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-1
5 SDH Boards
5.1.1 Functionality
Functionality SL64
Basic function Optical interface specifications
Receive/Transmit one STM-64 optical signal. Support the I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2 and V-64.2b (used with BA, PA, and DCU) optical module, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.691 and ITU-T Recommendation G.692. Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access DWDM equipment directly.
Optical module specifications Service processing Overhead processing
Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Laser can be open and close. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled. Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the concatenated services at levels from VC-4-4c to VC-4-64c. Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-64 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte. Support tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function.
Alarms and performance events K byte processing REG specifications Protection schemes
Provide abundant alarms and performance events.
Be able to process multiple sets of K bytes. One SL64 board can support up to two multiplex section protection (MSP) rings. Support setting and querying REG working mode. Support two-fiber and four-fiber MSP, linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support shared optical path protection of MSP ring and SNCP ring, or that of two MSP rings.
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth upgrade of board software.
5-2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
5.1.2 Principle
Figure 5-1 shows the principle block diagram of the SL64.
O/E conv ersion module O/E conv ersion MUX/ DEMUX STM-64 E/O conv ersion Backplane Cross-connect unit Cross-connect unit
STM-64
SDH ov erhead processing module
Logic control module
SCC unit
Power module
-48v
+3.3v
+3.3v Backup Power
Figure 5-1 Principle block diagram of the SL64
In Receive Direction
The O/E conversion module includes E/O (O/E) conversion and MUX/DEMUX part. The O/E conversion module converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and detects R_LOS alarms. The DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into multiple parallel electrical signals, and recovery the clock signal at the same time. The multiple electrical signals demultiplexed and clock signal are transferred to the SDH overhead processing module. The SDH overhead processing module extracts overhead byte from the received multiple electrical signals, performs pointer processing, and then sends the signals to the cross-connect unit through backplane bus. R_LOF, R_OOF, AU_LOP and AU_AIS alarms are detected in this module.
In Transmit Direction
After being inserted with overhead bytes in the SDH overhead processing module, the parallel electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are then sent to the O/E conversion module. The O/E conversion module multiplexes the received parallel electrical signals into high rate electrical signals through the MUX part, converts the electrical signals into optical signals. Signals are then sent to fibers for transmission.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-3
5 SDH Boards
Auxiliary Units
Logic control module This unit: Traces the clock and frame header signal from the active and the standby cross-connect boards. Implements laser controlling function. Realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the two optical processing boards constituting the ADM when the GSCC is not online. Selects the clock frame header from the active or the standby cross-connect board. Power module
Provide the board with required DC voltages.
5.1.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-2 shows the front panels of the SL64 (please refer to the board in the fieldwork).
SL 64
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SL 64
Figure 5-2 The front panel of the SL64
5-4
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
Indicators
There are four indicators on the SL64 board. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A.
Interfaces
Quantity: single optical interface (one pair) Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces incline down.
5.1.4 Parameter Configuration

The major parameters required by the SL64 are as follows. J1 J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of J1 is "0" by default.
Note Value of J1 had ever been set as " HuaWei SBS
" by default.
C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm. Table 5-2 associates the C2 setting to the service type.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-5
5 SDH Boards
Table 5-2 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL64
Service type Parameter setting of C2 (in Hex)
TUG structure 34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3 140 Mbit/s into C-4 Unequipped
02 04 12 00
5.1.5 Version Description

The version of the SL64 is N2 in OSN 3500. The N2 version supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function.

Table 5-3 lists the technical parameters of the SL64. Table 5-4 lists the supported optical interface parameters with fixed wavelength output, complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.692.
Table 5-3 Technical parameters of the SL64
Parameter Description
Bit rate Processing capability Line code pattern Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Type of optical interfaces
9953280kbit/s 1 x STM-64 standard service or concatenated service Non return to zero (NRZ) 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 1.12 32 I-64.2 S-64.2 b 1530~ 1565 1 to 2 L-64.2b (BA) 1530~1565 -4 to 2 14 1 13 to 15 (BA) Le-64. 2 1530~ 1565 2 to 4 Ls-64. 2 1530~ 1565 3 to 7 V-64.2b (BA+PA+DCU ) (Note1) 1550.12 -4 to -1 14 1 13 to 15 (BA) 27(P A) 10 (PA)
Wavelength (nm) Launched power (dBm)
1530~ 1565 5 to 1 14 1
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Receiver overload (dBm)
14 1
21 8
21 8
5-6
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Parameter Description
5 SDH Boards
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Maximum dispersion tolerance (ps/nm) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
8.2 500
8.2 800
8.2 1600
8.2 1200
8.2 1600
8.2 2400 (Note2)
Temperature: 0C to 45C Humidity: 10% to 90% Temperature: 5C to 55C Humidity: 5% to 95% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10% to 100% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10% to 100%
Note1: The bracketed part indicates that V-64.2b optical interface specification consists of booster amplifier (BA), preamplifier (PA) and the dispersion compensation unit (DCU). Note2: The dispersion coefficient is 17 ps/nm when the signal is transmitted by the G.692 fiber at the wavelength of 1550.12 nm. So, the dispersion tolerance is 2040 ps/nm at 120 km.
Table 5-4 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with ITU-T G.692
Bit rate Mean launched power (dBm) Minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload point (dBm) Maximum path allowable dispersion (ps/nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
9953280kbit/s 4 to 1 14 1 800 10
5.2 SF16/SL16
The SL16 is an STM-16 processing board. The SF16 is an STM-16 processing board with FEC function. The two boards are responsible for STM-16 optical signal processing. Table 5-5 lists the slots for the SL16 and SF16.
Table 5-5 Slots for the SL16 and SF16
Product SL16 SF16
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 58, 1114
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-7
5 SDH Boards
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 68, 1113 Slots 78, 1112 Slots 58, 1113 Slots 1213 Slots 1113
5.2.1 Functionality
Functionality SL16 SF16
Basic function
Receive/Transmit one STM-16 optical signal
Receive/Transmit one OTU1 FEC optical signal. Support enabling or disabling FEC function.
Optical interface specifications
Support the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je (used with BA), and U-16.2Je (used with BA and PA) optical interface, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.692 and G.957. Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access DWDM equipment directly.
Support the Ve-16.2c, Ve-16.2d, and Ve-16.2f optical interface. Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access DWDM equipment directly.
Optical module specifications
Support detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Laser can be open and close. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled.
Support detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Laser can be open and close. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled. Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the concatenated services at levels from VC-4-4C to VC-4-16C. The SF16 process overheads and the encapsulation code of FEC in a way complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.709.
Service processing
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the concatenated services at levels from VC-4-4C to VC-4-16C.
5-8
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Functionality SL16 SF16
5 SDH Boards
Overhead processing
Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-16 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Support the overhead processing, performance monitoring, and alarm detecting of the OTU, ODU, and OPU, complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.709. Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-16 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Alarms and performance events K byte processing REG specifications Protection schemes
Provide abundant alarms and performance events. The SF16 provides the alarms and performance events related to OUT, ODU, OPU, and FEC. Be able to process multiple sets of K byte. One SL16/SF16 board can support up to two MSP rings. Support setting and querying REG working mode. Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support shared optical path protection of MSP ring and SNCP ring, or that of two MSP rings.
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth upgrade of board software.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-9
5 SDH Boards
5.2.2 Principle
Figure 5-3 shows the principle block diagram of the SF16. The block diagram of the SL16 is the same as that of the SF16 after removing the part surrounded by broken line and replacing the bit rate with 2488320 Kbit/s.
O/E conversion module O/E conversion Backplane Digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module Cross-connect unit Cross-connect unit
2.666Gbit/s
2.666Gbit/s
E/O conversion
MUX / DEMU X
SDH overhead processing module
SCC unit
Powe r module
-48v
+3.3v
+3.3v Backup Power
Figure 5-3 The principle block diagram of the SF16
The O/E conversion module includes E/O (O/E) conversion and MUX/DEMUX part. The O/E conversion converts the received 2.666 Gbit/s FEC optical signals into electrical signals and detects R_LOS alarms. The DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into multiple parallel electrical signals, and recovery the clock signal at the same time. The multiple electrical signals demultiplexed are transferred to the digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module to have FEC packets decapsulated and SDH overheads processed. The SDH overhead processing module extracts overhead byte from the received multiple electrical signals, performs pointer processing, and then sends the signals to the cross-connect unit through backplane bus. R_LOF, R_OOF, AU_LOP and AU_AIS alarms are detected in this module.
After being inserted with overhead bytes in the SDH overhead processing module, the parallel electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are then sent to the digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module.
5-10
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
The digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module performs FEC coding and SDH overhead inserting to the multiple signals, and then sends it to the O/E conversion module. The O/E conversion module multiplexes the received parallel electrical signals into high rate electrical signals through the MUX part, converts the signals into SDH optical signals. Signals are then sent to fibers for transmission.
Auxiliary Units
5.2.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-4 shows the front panels of the SL16, SF16 and SL16A (please refer to the board in the fieldwork).
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-11
5 SDH Boards
SL1 6
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SF 16
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SL16A
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
IN
SL1 6
SF16
SL16A
SL16
SF16
SL16A
Figure 5-4 The front panel of the SL16, SF16 and SL16A
Indicators
There are four indicators on the SL16/SL16A/SF16. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A.
Interfaces
Quantity: single optical interface (one pair) Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The optical interfaces of the SF16 and SL16 are not swappable. The SL16A can use swappable optical modules for easy maintenance.
5-12
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards

The major parameters required by the SL16/SF16 are as follows. J1 J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of J1 is "0" by default.
" by default.
Table 5-6 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SF16/SL16
Service type Parameter setting of C2(in Hex)
02 04 12 00
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-13
5 SDH Boards

The version of the SF16 is N1, which is the only version existed. The board can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500 REG, and OptiX OSN 1500. The board can be set to be under ADM mode or REG mode. The versions of the SL16 and SL16A are N1 and N2. The two versions realize board functions in the same way. The N2SL16 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command must be delivered in NM after hardware replacing is fulfilled.
Note If the TCM function is enabled on version N2, the command of replacing the version N2 with version N1 will fail.

Table 5-7 and Table 5-8 list the technical parameters of the SL16, SL16A and the SF16 respectively. Table 5-9 lists the supported optical interface parameters with fixed wavelength output, complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.692.
Table 5-7 Technical parameters of the SL16 and SL16A
Bit rate Processing capability Line code pattern Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Type of optical modules Wavelength (nm)
2488320 kbit/s or 2666057.143 kbit/s 1 x STM-16 standard service or concatenated service Non return to zero (NRZ) 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 1.10 20 I-16 1266 to 1360 10 to 3 S-16.1 1260 to 1360 5 to 0 L-16.1 1280 to 1335 2 to 3 L-16.2 1550 to 1580 2 to 3 L-16. 2Je 1530 to 1560 5 to 7 V-16.2Je (BA+DCU) 1530 to 1565 2 to 3 13 to 15(B A) U-16.2Je(BA +PA+DCU) 1550.12
Launched power (dBm)
2 to 3
15 to 18 (BA)
5-14
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Receiver overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Maximum dispersion tolerance (ps/nm) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
18 3 8.2 12
18 0 8.2 NA
27 9 8.2 NA
28 9 8.2 1200~ 1600
28 9 8.2 2000
28 9 8.2 2800
28 9 8.2 3400
34 (PA) 10 (PA)
Table 5-8 Technical parameters of the SF16

Bit rate Processing capability Line code pattern Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Specification of optical interfaces (Note 1)
2666057.143 kbit/s 1 x STM-16 standard service or concatenated service Non return to zero (NRZ) 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 1.09 26 Ve-16.2c FEC+BA(14)+P A 1550.12 5 to 1 13 to 15 5 to 1 13 to 15 5 to 1 15 to 18 Ve-16.2d FEC+BA(17)+PA Ve-16.2f FEC+BA(17)+R A+PA
Wavelength (nm) Launched power (dBm) (Note 2) Launched power (dBm) (Note 3)
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-15
5 SDH Boards Parameter Description
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) (Note 2) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) (Note 4) Receiver overload (dBm) (Note 2) Maximum dispersion tolerance (ps/nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) (Note 2) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
27.5 37 9 12800 10
27.5 37 9 12800 10
27.5 42 9 12800 10
Note 1: The bracketed numbers indicate corresponding parameters. For example, "BA(14)" indicates the optical power is 14 dBm after signals are amplified by BA. "FEC+BA+PA" indicates that the specifications of optical interfaces consist of FEC, BA, and PA. Note 2: Parameters listed in the above table are of the optical module only, but not of amplifiers. Note 3: Parameters listed in the above table are of the BA. Note 4: Parameters listed in the above table are of the PA.
Table 5-9 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with G.692
Bit rate 2488320 kbit/s 2666057.143 kbit/s
Dispersion limit (km) Mean launched power (dBm) Minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload point (dBm) Maximum path allowable dispersion (ps/nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
170 2 to 3 28 9 3400 8.2
640 5 to 1 28 9 10880 10
640 5 to 1 28 9 10880 8.2
5-16
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
The SL4 is the 1 x STM-4 processing board. The SLD4 is the 2 x STM-4 processing board. The SLQ4 is the 4 x STM-4 processing board. The three boards are responsible for: the receiving/transmitting of STM-4 optical signals the O/E conversion of STM-4 optical signals the extracting/inserting of overhead byte the detecting of alarms in the line Table 5-10 lists the slots for the SL4, SLD4, and SLQ4.
Table 5-10 Slots for the SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4
Product SL4 SLD4 SLQ4
Slots 18, 1117 Slots 18, 1116 Slots 58, 1113 Not available Slots 1213 Slots 1113
5.3.1 Functionality
Functionality SL4 SLD4 SLQ4
Basic function
Receive/Transmit one STM-4 optical signal.
Receive/Transmit two STM-4 optical signals.
Receive/Transmit four STM-4 optical signals.
Optical interface specifications Optical module specifications
Support the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2 optical interface, which comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957. Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Laser can be open and close. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled. Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-17
5 SDH Boards Functionality SL4 SLD4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual SLQ4
Service processing Overhead processing
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the VC-4-4C concatenated services. Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-4 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Alarms and performance events Protection schemes Maintenance
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration. Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
5-18
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
5.3.2 Principle
Figure 5-5 shows the principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 (1 x STM-4 optical signal is processed).
Backplane
STM-4
O/E conversion module E/O conversion module
Data and clock recovery module
Cross-connect unit Overhead processing module Cross-connect unit
STM-4
SCC unit
Power module +3.3 V
-48 V +3.3 VBackup Power
Figure 5-5 The principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-4 optical signal into electrical signal and detects R_LOS alarms. The electrical signal is sent SDH overhead processing module where R_LOF and R_OOF are detected. The SDH overhead processing module extracts overhead byte from the received multiple electrical signals, performs pointer processing, and then sends the signals to the cross-connect unit through backplane bus.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-19
5 SDH Boards
Auxiliary Units
5.3.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-6 shows the front panels of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 (please refer to the board in the fieldwork).
SL4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SLD 4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS1
SLQ 4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
SL4
OUT IN
OUT1 IN1
SLD 4
OUT2 IN2
SLQ 4
OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
SL4
SLD4
SLQ4
Figure 5-6 The front panel of the SL4, SLD4, and SLQ4
5-20
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
Indicators
There are four indicators on the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A.
Interfaces
Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the SL4, two pairs for the SLD4, and four pairs for the SLQ4 Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies maintenance.

The major parameters required by the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 are as follows. J1 J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of J1 is "0" by default.
" by default.
C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm. Set C2 according to the actual service type. Table 5-11 associates the C2 setting to the service type.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-21
5 SDH Boards
Table 5-11 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
02 04 12 00

The versions of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 are N1 and N2. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B). The two versions realize board functions in the same way. N2 series board supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command must be delivered in NM after hardware replacing is fulfilled.

Table 5-12 lists the technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4.
Table 5-12 Technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4
Parameter Description SL4 SLD4 SLQ4
Bit rate Processing capability
622080 kbit/s 1 x STM-4 standard or concatenated service 2 x STM-4 standard or concatenated service 4 x STM-4 standard or concatenated service
Line code pattern Connector Dimensions (mm)
Non return to zero (NRZ) LC 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
5-22
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Parameter Description SL4 SLD4
5 SDH Boards
SLQ4
Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Optical module type Wavelength (nm) Launched power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Receiver overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ration (dB) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
1.00 15 I-4 1261 to 1360 15 to 8 23 8 8.2
1.01 15 S-4.1 1274 to 1356 15 to 8 28 8 8.2 L-4.1 1280 to 1335 3 to 2 28 8 10
1.04 15 L-4.2 1480 to 1580 3 to 2 28 8 10 Ve-4.2 1480 to 1580 3 to 2 33 13 10
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-23
5 SDH Boards
5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1
The SLT1 is a 12 x STM-1 optical processing board. The SLQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 optical processing board. The SL1 is a 1 x STM-1 optical processing board. The three boards are responsible for: the receiving/transmitting of STM-1 optical signals the O/E conversion of STM-1 optical signals the extracting/inserting of overhead byte the detecting of alarms in the line Table 5-13 shows the slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1.
Table 5-13 Slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1
Product SLT1 SLQ1 SL1
Table 5-14 shows the optical interface available when the SLT1 is installed in the different equipment.
Table 5-14 The available optical interface of the SLT1
Product Slots Available optical interface
OptiX OSN 3500 (40Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 3500 (80Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 15, 1416 Slots 68, 1113 Slots 14, 1516 Slots 58, 1114 Slots 56 Slot 13 Slots 78,1112
14 112 18 112 14 18 112
5-24
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Product Slots
5 SDH Boards Available optical interface
OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1213 Slots 1113
112 112
5.4.1 Functionality
Functionality SLT1 SLQ1 SL1
Basic function Optical interface specifications Optical module specifications
Receive/Transmit twelve STM-1 optical signals.
Receive/Transmit four STM-1 optical signals.
Receive/Transmit one STM-1 optical signal.
Support the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2 optical interface, which comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957. Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Laser can be open and close. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled. Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.
Service processing Overhead processing
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services. Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte. Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration. Support two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-25
5 SDH Boards
5.4.2 Principle
Figure 5-7 shows the principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1 (1 x STM-1 signal is processed).
Backplane
STM-1
O/E conversion module E/O conversion module
Data and clock revocery module
Cross-connect unit Overhead processing module Cross-connect unit
STM-1
GSCC
Pow er module +3.3 V
-48 V
+3.3 V Backup Pow er
Figure 5-7 The principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-1 optical signal into electrical signal and detects R_LOS alarms. The electrical signal is sent SDH overhead processing module where R_LOF and R_OOF are detected. The SDH overhead processing module extracts overhead byte from the received multiple electrical signals, performs pointer processing, and then sends the signals to the cross-connect unit through backplane bus.
5-26
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
Auxiliary Units
5.4.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-8 shows the front panels of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1 (please refer to the board in the fieldwork).
SL T 1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SLQ1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SL1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SLT 1
SLT1
Figure 5-8 The front panel of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8 OUT9 IN9 OUT10 IN10 OUT11 IN11 OUT12 IN12
OUT
SLQ1
SLQ1
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
IN
SL1
SL1
5-27
5 SDH Boards
Indicators
There are four indicators on the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A.
Interfaces
Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the SL1, four pairs for the SLQ1, and twelve pairs for the SLT1 Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces of the SLQ1 and the SL1 incline down. The optical interfaces of the SLT1 are vertical to the front panel, indenting by 20 mm. The SL1, SLQ1, and SLT1 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies maintenance.

The major parameters required by the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1 are as follows. J1 J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of J1 is "0" by default.
" by default.
5-28
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
Table 5-15 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
02 04 12 00

The versions of the SLQ1 and SL1 are N1 and N2, which can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B). The two versions realize board functions in the same way. N2SLQ1 and N2SL1 support tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command must be delivered in NM after hardware replacing is fulfilled. The version of the SLT1 is N1, which is the only version existed. The board can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B).

Table 5-16 lists the technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1.
Table 5-16 Technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1
Parameter Description SLT1 SLQ1 SL1
Bit rate Processing capability Line code pattern Dimensions (mm)
155.52 Mbit/s 12 x STM-1 4 x STM-1 1 x STM-1
Non return to zero (NRZ) 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-29
5 SDH Boards Parameter Description SLT1 SLQ1
SL1
Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Optical interface type Wavelength (nm) Launched power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Receiver overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ration (dB) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
1.22 15 I-1 1260 to 1360 15 to 8 23 8 8.2 S-1.1 1261 to 1360
1.04 15 L-1.1 1280 to 1335 5 to 0 34 10 10
1.00 14 L-1.2 1480 to 1580 5 to 0 34 10 10 Ve-1.2 1480 to 1580 3 to 0 34 10 10
15 to 8 28 8 8.2
5-30
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1
The R1SLD4 is a 2 x STM-4 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SL4 is a 1 x STM-4 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SLQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SL1 is a 1 x STM-1 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SLD4 and the R1SL4 are responsible for: The receiving or transmitting of STM-4 optical signals The O/E conversion of STM-4 optical signals The extracting or inserting of overhead byte The detecting of alarms in the line The R1SLQ1 and the R1SL1 are responsible for: The receiving or transmitting of STM-1 optical signals The O/E conversion of STM-1 optical signals The extracting/inserting of overhead byte The detecting of alarms in the line Table 5-17 lists the slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1 in OSN products.
Table 5-17 Slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1
Product R1SLQ1 R1SL1 R1SLD4 R1SL4
Not available Not available Slots 57, 1921 Not available Slots 2-3, 69, 1213 Slots 13, 69, 1113
Not available Not available Slots 7, 21 Not available Slots 2-3, 69, 1213 Slots 13, 1113
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-31
5 SDH Boards
5.5.1 Functionality
Functionality R1SL4 R1SLD4 R1SLQ1 R1SL1
Basic function
Receive/Transmit 1 x STM-4 optical signal.
Receive/Transmit 2 x STM-4 optical signals.
Receive/Transmit 4 x STM-1 optical signals.
Receive/Transmit 1 x STM-1 optical signal.
Optical interface specifications Service processing Overhead processing
Support the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2 optical interface, which comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957. Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and VC-4-4C concatenated services. Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-4 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Support the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2 optical interface, which comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957. Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services. Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte. Support linear MSP and SNCP.
Protection schemes Optical module specifications
Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and SNCP. Laser can be open and close.
Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled. Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.
Alarms and performance events Maintenance
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration. Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
5.5.2 Principle
The principle of the R1SLD4/R1SL4 is the same as that of the SL4. Refer to Figure 5-5 for details. The principle of the R1SLQ1/R1SL1 is the same as that of the SL1. Refer to Figure 5-7 for details.
5-32
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
5.5.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-9 shows the front panels of the R1SLD4 and R1SL4. Figure 5-10 shows the front panels of the R1SLQ1 and R1SL1. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
SL4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SLD4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2
OUT IN
SL4 SLD4
R1SL4
R1SLD4
Figure 5-9 The front panel of the R1SL4 and R1SLD4
SLQ1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SL1
STAT ACT PROG SRV

SLQ1
OUT IN
SL1
R1SLQ1
R1SL1
Figure 5-10 The front panel of the R1SL1 and R1SLQ1
The R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 are half-slot optical processing boards whose height is half of the SL4s. They are used when the slots of the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 are segmented.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-33
5 SDH Boards
Indicators
There are four indicators on the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A.
Interfaces
Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the R1SL4, two pairs for the R1SLD4, four pairs for the R1SLQ1, and one pair for the R1SL1. Type: LC connector. Security: The optical interfaces are vertical to the front panel, indenting by 20 mm. The R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies maintenance.

The major parameters required by the half-slot optical processing boards are as follows. J1 J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of J1 is "0" by default.
" by default.
C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm. Set C2 according to the actual service type. Table 5-18 associates the C2 setting to the service type.
5-34
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
Table 5-18 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for half-slot optical processing boards
02 04 12 00

The version of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 is N1, which is the only version existed. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B after slot segmentation.

The optical interface parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL are the same as that of the SL4 and SL1. Refer to Table 5-12 and Table 5-16 for details. Table 5-19 lists other technical parameters.
Table 5-19 Technical parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1
Parameter Description R1SL4 R1SLD4 R1SLQ1 R1SL1
622.080 Mbit/s 1 x STM-4 standard or concatenated services 2 x STM-4 standard or concatenated services
155.520 Mbit/s 4 x STM-1 standard services 1 x STM-1 standard services
Line code pattern Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition
Non return to zero (NRZ) 111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.34 10 0.36 11 0.4 12 0.34 10
Temperature: 0C to 45C Humidity: 10% to 90% Temperature: 5C to 55C Humidity: 5% to 95%
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-35
5 SDH Boards Parameter Description R1SL4 R1SLD4 R1SLQ1
R1SL1
Environment for storage Environment for transportation
Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10% to 100% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10% to 100%
5.6 SEP/SEP1/EU08/EU04/OU08/TSB8/TSB4
The SEP1 is a 2 x STM-1 electrical signal processing board, with two STM-1 electrical interfaces on the front panel. The SEP is an 8 x STM-1 electrical signal processing board with interface board, in this case, the SEP1 is named SEP. The EU08 and OU08are interface boards of the SEP. The TSB8 is an electrical interface switching & bridging board. Table 5-20 lists the slots for the SEP1, SEP, EU04, EU08, OU08, and TSB8 and TSB4 in OSN products.
Table 5-20 Slot for the SEP1,SEP, EU04, EU08, OU08, TSB8 and TSB4
Product SEP1 (Led out from front panel)(Note) SEP (Work with interface boards)(Note) EU08/OU08 EU04 TSB8 TSB4
Slots 16, 1316
Slots 25, 1316
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 Not available Slots 3, 15, 17 Not available Not available Slots 14, 16
slot 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
Slots 19, 35
slot 19, 35
Slots 16, 1316 Slots 58, 1113 Not available Slots 1213 Slots 1113
Slots 25, 1316 Slots 67, 1213 Not available Not available Slots 1213
slot 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 slot 1, 3, 15, 17 Not available Not available slot 14, 16
Slots 19, 35 Slots 1, 17 Not available Not available Slots 14
slot 19, 35 slot 1, 17 Not available Not available slot 14
Note: When used with interface boards, SEP1 is named SEP.
5-36
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
When used with different interface boards and electrical interface switching & bridging boards, the SEP1 has different access ability, as listed in Table 5-21.
Table 5-21 Different access abilities of the SEP1/SEP
Board Access ability
SEP1 SEP + EU08 SEP + OU08 SEP + (EU08 + TSB8) SEP + (EU04 + TSB4)
Access and process 2 x STM-1 electrical signals. Access and process 8 x STM-1 electrical signals. Access and process 8 x STM-1 optical signals. Access and process 8 x STM-1 electrical signals, and achieve 1:N (N3) TPS protection. Access and process 4 x STM-1 electrical signals, and achieve 1:N (N3) TPS protection.
Caution The two interfaces on the front panel of the SEP1 are unavailable when used with interface boards.
Caution The EU08 and OU08 can only be used when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s in OptiX OSN 3500. When the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, the EU04 can be used to work with the SEP.
5.6.1 Functionality
Functionality SEP EU08/OU08 TSB8
Basic function
8 x STM-1 processing board
EU08: 8 x STM-1 electrical interface board OU08: 8 x STM-1 optical interface board The OU08 supports the I-1 and S-1.1 optical interface, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.957.
8-channel electrical interface switching & bridging board -
Optical interface specifications
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-37
5 SDH Boards Functionality SEP EU08/OU08
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual TSB8
Optical module Support the detecting and query of the information on optical specifications(Note) modules. Laser can be open and close. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled. Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module. Service processing Overhead processing Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services. Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte. Alarms and performance events Protection scheme Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration. Realize TPS protection when the SEP works with interface boards and switching & bridging boards. Support two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and SNCP. Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
Note: N2OU08 does not support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.
5-38
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
5.6.2 Principle
Figure 5-11 shows the principle block diagram of the SEP1 (1 x STM-1 signal is processed).
Backplane
STM-1 O/E signal Interf ace module STM-1 O/E signal
Data and clock recov ery module
SDH ov erhead processing module
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
SCC
Power module
-48 V
+3.3V
+3.3V Backup power
Figure 5-11 Principle block diagram of the SEP1
The interface module accesses STM-1 electrical signals (for optical signals, O/E conversion is needed), and the data and clock recovery module recovers clock signals. Then, the clock signal and electrical signals are sent to the overhead processing module. The SDH overhead processing module extracts overhead byte from the received multiple electrical signals, performs pointer processing, and then sends the signals to the cross-connect unit through backplane bus. R_LOF, R_OOF, AU_LOP and AU_AIS alarms are detected in this module.
After being inserted with overhead bytes in the SDH overhead processing module, the parallel electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are then sent to the data and clock recovery module. The data and clock recovery module implements parallel/serial conversion for the received STM-1 electrical signal, and then sends it to the E/O conversion module after descrambling.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-39
5 SDH Boards
The interface module sends the STM-1 electrical signals to the cable for transmission. When optical signals are required, the interface module adopts the OU08, where the signals are sent to fiber after E/O conversion.
Auxiliary Units
5.6.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-12 shows the front panels of the SEP1, EU08, EU04, OU08, TSB8 and TSB4. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
5-40
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
SEP1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
EU08
EU04
OU08
OU08 OUT1 IN1
TSB8
TSB4
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8
OUT2 IN2
OUT1IN1 OUT2IN2 OUT3IN3 OUT4 IN4OUT5IN5 OUT6IN6OUT7IN7OUT8 IN8
OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6
SEP1
SEP1
Indicators
There are four indicators on the SEP1. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the EU08, EU04, OU08, TSB8 or TSB4.
Interfaces
Quantity: The SEP1 has two pair of 75-ohm SMB interface, with which the SEP1 can access two channels of STM-1 electrical signal by itself. Type: SMB connector
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
AOUT AIN BOUT BIN
OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8 OU08
EU08
EU04
OU08
TSB8
TSB4
EU08
EU04
OU08 (LC)
OU08 (SC)
TSB8
TSB4
Figure 5-12 The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, EU04, OU08, TSB8 and TSB4
5-41
5 SDH Boards
Table 5-22 lists the quantity and type of the interfaces of the EU08, EU04 and OU08.
Table 5-22 Interfaces of the EU08, EU04 and OU08
Interface EU08 EU04 N1OU08 N2OU08
Quantity Access ability Type
8 8 x STM-1(e) 8-pair SMB electrical interface -
4 84x STM-1(e) 8-pair SMB electrical interface -
8 8 x STM-1(o) 8-pair LC optical interface Supported
8 8 x STM-1(o) 8-pair SC optical interface Not supported
Swappable optical module
N2OU08 works with multi-mode fiber. There is no service interfaces on the TSB8 or TSB4.
5.6.4 Protection Configuration

When used with the EU08 and TSB8, the SEP can achieve 1:N TPS protection for 8 x STM-1 electrical signals. Table 5-23 lists the TPS protection of the SEP in OSN products.
Table 5-23 TPS protection of the SEP
Product TPS protection TPS configuration
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500
Support two groups of 1:N (N3) TPS protection
The board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5. The board in slot 16 protects the boards in slots 13, 14, and 15. The board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7. The board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12.
Support two groups of 1:1 TPS protection
OptiX OSN 2500 REG OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
Not supported Not supported Support one group of 1:1 TPS protection
The board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.
5-42
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
As an equipment level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment.
Protection Principle
Figure 5-13 shows the 1:3 TPS protection when the SEP is used with the EU08 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500.
8 x STM-1(e) 8 x STM-1(e) 8 x STM-1(e) Sw itch control signal EU08
TSB8
EU08
EU08
Cross connect board SLOT 9/10 Protection SEP Working SEP Working SEP Fail SLOT2 SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT5 Working SEP
Figure 5-13 1:3 TPS protection of the SEP in the OptiX OSN 3500
Normal status When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to the SEP directly through position 1 of the control switch on the EU08. Switching status When a working SEP fails, the working board in each slot is protected in the following manners. When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3. When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4. When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-43
5 SDH Boards
switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.
Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500

When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:3 TPS protection for the SEP, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-14.
S S S S SS S S L L L L LL L L O O O O OO O O T T T T TT T T 1920212223242526 TSB8 S L O T 1 EU08 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 EU08 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 EU08 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S S L L O O T T 27 28 PIU PIU S S S SS SS S L L L LL LL L O O O OO OO O T T T TT TT T 2930313233343536 EU08 EU08 EU08 TSB8 S L O T 37 AUX
FAN
FAN
FAN
S L O T 8
S L O T 9 XCS
S L O T 10 XCS
S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OOOOO OO T T T T T T T T 11 1213141516 1718 Protection 2 Working 2 Working 2 Working 2 GSCC
Figure 5-14 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SEP in the OptiX OSN 3500
In the Figure 5-14, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5, and the board in slot 16 protects the ones in slots 13, 14, and 15. The slot assignment of the SEP, EU08, and TSB8 are shown in Table 5-24.
Table 5-24 Slot assignment of the SEP, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Board Protection group 1 Protection group 2
Protection SEP TSB8 Working SEP EU08
Working 1 Working 1 Working 1 Protection 1
Fiber routing
Slot 2 Slot 19 Slots 3, 4, 5 Slots 21, 23, 25
5-44
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards

When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-15.
S S S S S S S L L L L L L L O O O O O O O T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Protection 1 S S S L L L O O O T T T 8 9 10 S L O T 11 S L O T 12 S L O T 13 Protection 2 S L O T 14 S L O T 15 S L O T 16 S L O T 17 S L O T 18
Working 1
Working 2
TSB8
EU08
PIU (SLOT22)
Fiber Routing FAN FAN (SLOT24) (SLOT25)
PIU (SLOT23)
Figure 5-15 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SEP in the OptiX OSN 2500
In the above figure, the board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7, and the board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12. The slot assignment of the SEP, EU08, EU04 and TSB8 is shown in Table 5-25.
Table 5-25 Slot assignment of the SEP, EU08, EU04 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500
Protection SEP TSB8 Working SEP EU08 EU04
TSB8
EU04
SAP
CXL
CXL
Slot 13 Slot 17 Slot 12 Slot 15 Slot 15
Note: EU08 and EU04, each one can be available for the slot 15 when TPS in OSN 2500.
Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500B

When the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-16.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-45
5 SDH Boards
Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 11 Slot 20 FAN Slot 12 Slot 13 Slot 4 Slot 5 Protection Working CXL16/4/1 CXL16/4/1 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 EOW AUX EU08 Slot 19 PIU TSB8
Slot 18
PIU
Figure 5-16 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SEP in the OptiX OSN 1500B
In the above figure, the board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13. The slot assignment of the SEP, EU08 and TSB8 is shown in Table 5-26.
Table 5-26 Slot assignment of the SEP, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Protection group
Protection SEP TSB8 Working SEP EU08

The following parameters should be set through the NM for the SEP1. J1 J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of J1 is "0" by default.
" by default.
5-46
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5 SDH Boards
Table 5-27 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SEP1
02 04 12 00

The version of the SEP1, EU08, EU04, TSB4 and TSB8 is N1, which is the only version existed. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B. The OU08 has version N1 and version N2. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B. The optical interface of version N1 is of LC connector, and that of version N2 is of SC connector.

Table 5-28 lists the technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, EU04, OU08, and TSB8.
Table 5-28 Technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, EU04, OU08, TSB8 and TSB4
Parameter Description SEP1 EU08 EU04 OU08 TSB4 TSB8
Bit rate Access capability
155520 kbit/s 2 channels of electrical signals 8 x STM-1 CMI 8 channels of electrical signals CMI 4 channels of electrical signals 8 channels of optical signals NRZ -
Processing capability Line code pattern
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
5-47
5 SDH Boards Parameter Description SEP1 EU08 EU04 OU08
TSB4
TSB8
Connector Dimensions (mm)
SMB 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.95 17 -
SMB 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.41 11 0.40 6
LC or SC
262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Optical interface type Wavelength (nm) Launched power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
0.41 6 I-1 12601360 -15 to -8 -23 S-1.1 12611360 -15 to -8 -28
0.28 2.5 -
0.28 5
Temperature: 0C to 45C Humidity: 10%90% Temperature: 5C to 55C Humidity: 5%95% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100%
5-48
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards
6
Functionality Principle Front panel Protection configuration Parameter configuration Version description Technical parameters
PDH Boards
This chapter introduces the PDH boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of:
The PDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 are listed in Table 4-2.
6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8
The SPQ4 is a 4 x E4/STM-1(e) processing board. The MU04 is a 4 x E4/STM-1 interface board. The SPQ4 works with the MU04 to access and process 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical signals. The SPQ4 and MU04 work with the TSB8 to provide 1:N TPS protection. Table 6-1 lists the slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8.
Table 6-1 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8
Product SPQ4 MU04 TSB8
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Slots 25, 1316 Slots 25, 1316 Slots 67, 1213 Not available
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 Slots 1, 3, 15, 17 Not available
Slots 19, 35 Slots 19, 35 Slots 1, 17 Not available
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-1
6 PDH Boards Product SPQ4 MU04
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual TSB8
OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
Not available Slots 1213
Not available Slots 14, 16
Not available Slot 14
6.1.1 Functionality
Functionality SPQ4 MU04 TSB8
Basic function Service processing Overhead processing
4 x E4/STM-1(e) processing board
4 x E4/STM-1(e) interface board
8-channel electrical interface switching & bridging board
Access and process 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals. Each path can carry both E4 and STM-1 electrical signals. Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals, including B1, B2, K1, K2, M1, F1, and D1D12. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination), including J1, B3, C2, G1, and H4. Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Alarms and performance events Protection schemes
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration. The SPQ4 supports TPS protection when working with interface boards and switching & bridging boards. Supports two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP, and SNCP.
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
6-2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards
6.1.2 Principle
Figure 6-1 shows the functional block diagram of the SPQ4.
module E4/STM-1 electrical signal Interface module (MU04) E4/STM-1 electrical signal Code/ decode module Backplane E4 mapping/ demapping Frame synchronous scramble module Overhead processing module Cross-connect unit
(MU04)
STM-1
Cross-connect unit
GSCC
Power module
+3.3 V
-48 V
+3.3 V Backup power
Figure 6-1 Functional block diagram of the SPQ4
For E4 signals, the interface unit accesses E4 signals. After processed by the decode module, the recovered clock signal and data signal are sent to the demapping module. Then, the signals are mapped into VC-4s before they are sent to the cross-connect unit. For STM-1 electrical signals, the interface unit accesses STM-1 electrical signals. After processed by the decode module, the recovered clock signal and data signal are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module where the STM-1 electrical signals are descrambled. Then, the signals are sent to the overhead processing module and then the cross-connect unit.
For E4 signals, after being processed by the demapping unit, the electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are sent to the decode unit where the signals are decoded. Then, the signals are sent to the interface unit. For STM-1 signals, after being inserted with overhead bytes in the overhead processing unit, the electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module. Then the signals are sent to the decode unit for decoding before they go to the interface unit.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-3
6 PDH Boards
After being inserted with overhead bytes, the frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals, and then sends them to the interface unit after scrambling. The interface unit sends the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals into the cable for transmission.
Auxiliary Units
Logic control module This unit: Communicates with the SCC and other boards through Ethernet ports. Collects and reports alarms and performance events. Process the configuration command from NM. Power module
6.1.3 Front Panel

Figure 6-2 shows the front panel of the SPQ4 and the MU04. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
SPQ 4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
MU04
SP Q4
MU04
SPQ4
MU04
Figure 6-2 The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04
6-4
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards
Indicators
There are four indicators on the SPQ4. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the MU04 or TSB8.
Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the SPQ4, the SPQ4 should work with the MU04 to input/output E4/STM-1 signals. Table 6-2 describes interfaces on the MU04 or TSB8.
Table 6-2 Interfaces on the MU04
Interface MU04
Access service Interface Interface type
4 x E4/STM-1 75 ohm unbalanced interface SMB

When used with the MU04 and TSB8, the SPQ4 can achieve 1:N TPS protection for 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical signals. Table 6-3 lists the TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN products.
Table 6-3 The TPS protection of the SPQ4
Support two groups of 1:N (N3) TPS protection
Support two groups of 1:1 TPS protection
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-5
6 PDH Boards Product TPS protection
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual TPS configuration
Not supported Not supported Support one group of 1:1 TPS protection
As an equipment level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment.
Figure 6-3 shows the 1:3 TPS protection when the SPQ4 is used with the MU04 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500.
4E4/STM-1 4E4/STM-1 4E4/STM-1 Sw itch control signal
TSB8
MU04
MU04
MU04
Cross connect board SLOT 9/10 Protection SPQ4 Working SPQ4 Working SPQ4 Fail SLOT2 SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT5 Working SPQ4
Figure 6-3 The 1:3 TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Normal status When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to the SPQ4 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the MU04. Switching status When a working SPQ4 fails, the working board in each slot is protected in the following manners.
6-6
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards
When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8 does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3. When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4. When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.

When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:3 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 6-4.
S S S S SS S S L L L L L L L L O O O O OO O O T T T T TT T T 19 2021 222324 2526 TSB8 S L O T 1 MU04 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 MU04 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 MU04 S L O T 6 S L O T 7
S L O T 27 PIU
S L O T 28 PIU
S S S SS SS S L L L LL L L L O O O OO O O O T T T T T TT T 29 303132 33343536 TSB8 MU04 MU04 MU04
S L O T 37 AUX
FAN
FAN
FAN
S L O T 8
S L O T 9 XCS
S L O T 10 XCS
S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OO O OO OO T T T T T T T T 11 12 1314 15 16 17 18 Protection 2 Working 2 Working 2 Working 2 GSCC
Figure 6-4 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500
In Figure 6-4, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5, and the board in slot 16 protects the ones in slots 13, 14, and 15. The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 is shown in Table 6-4.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Fiber routing
6-7
6 PDH Boards
Table 6-4 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Protection SPQ4 TSB8 Working SPQ4 MU04

When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:1 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 6-5.
S S S S S L L L L L O O O O O T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 S L O T 6 Protection 1 S S S S L L L L O O O O T T T T 7 8 9 10 S L O T 11 S L O T 12 S L O T 13 Protection 2 S L O T 14 S L O T 15 S L O T 16 S L O T 17 S L O T 18
T S B 8
M U 0 4
Working 1
Working 2
M U 0 4
T S B 8
PIU (SLOT23)
CXL16
CXL16
Fiber Routing PIU (SLOT22) FAN (SLOT24) FAN (SLOT25)
Figure 6-5 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 2500
In Figure 6-5, the board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7, and the board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12. The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 is shown in Table 6-5.
Table 6-5 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500
SAP
6-8
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards

When the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 6-6.
Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 11 Slot 20 FAN Slot 12 Slot 13 Slot 4 Slot 5 Protection Working CXL16/4/1 CXL16/4/1 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 EOW AUX MU04 Slot 19 PIU TSB8 Slot 18 PIU
Figure 6-6 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
In the above figure, the board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13. The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 is shown in Table 6-6.
Table 6-6 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

The following parameters should be set through the NM for the SPQ4. J1 J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of J1 is "0" by default.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-9
6 PDH Boards
" by default.
C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frames and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm. Table 6-7 associates the C2 setting to the service type.
Table 6-7 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SPQ4
02 04 12 00

The SPQ4 has version N1 and version N2. The two versions are different in the internal modules used, but realize functions in the same way. N1SPQ4 is not produced now. The board can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B. The two versions can be replaced by each other in products of version V100R003. The version of the MU04 and TSB8 is N1, which is the only version existed. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B.
6-10
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards

Table 6-8 lists the technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04.
Table 6-8 Technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04
Parameter Description SPQ4 MU04
Bit rate Process capability Line code pattern Connector Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s Process 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals CMI None 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.91 24 Temperature: 0C to 45C Humidity: 10%90% Temperature: 5C to 55C Humidity: 5%95% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100% SMB 262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W) 0.41 2 Access 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-11
6 PDH Boards
6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S
The PL3 is a 3 x E3/T3 processing board. The PD3 is a 6 x E3/T3 processing board. The PL3A is a 3 x E3/T3 processing board with cables led out from the front panel. The C34S is a 3 x E3/T3 PDH interface switching board. The D34S is a 6 x E3/T3 PDH interface switching board. The PD3 works with the D34S to access and process 6 x E3 electrical signals. The PL3 works with the C34S to access and process 3 x E3 electrical signals .The PL3/PD3 and C34S/D34S work with the TSB8 to provide 1:N TPS protection. Table 6-9 lists the slots for the PL3/PD3, PL3A, C34S, D34S, and TSB8 on the OptiX OSN products.
Table 6-9 Slots for the PL3/PD3, PL3A, C34S, D34S, and TSB8
Product PL3/PD3 PL3A C34S D34S TSB8
Slots 25, 1316 Slots 25, 1316 Slots 67, 1213 Not available Not available Slots 1213
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 Slots 1, 3, 15, 17 Not available Not available Slots 14, 16
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 Slots 1, 3, 15, 17 Not available Not available Slots 14, 16
Slots 19, 35 Slots 19, 35 Slots 1, 17 Not available Not available Slot 14
6-12
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards
6.2.1 Functionality
Functionality PL3 PD3 PL3A C34S D34S TSB8
Basic function
3 x E3 processing board
3 x E3 processing board (led out from front panel)
3x E3/T3 PDH interface switching board
6 x E3/T3 PDH interface switching board
8-channel electrical interface switching & bridging board
Service processing Overhead processing Alarms and performance events Protection schemes Maintenance
Access and process E3/T3 signals. Support the setting and querying of all path overheads at VC-3 level. Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration. The PL3/PD3 supports TPS protection when working with interface boards and switching & bridging boards. Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset does not affect services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
6.2.2 Principle
Figure 6-7 shows the functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A (one channel of E3/T3 signal is processed).
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-13
6 PDH Boards

Backplane E3/T3
D34S/C34S E3/T3 D34S/C34S
Interface module
Decoder
Mapping
Cross-connect unit
Encoder
Demapping
Cross-connect unit
Logic control module Pow er module
GSCC
-48 V
+3.3V
+3.3v backup pow er
Figure 6-7 The functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A
The E3/T3 signal is accessed through the interface module. The electrical signals are sent into the decoder where data signal and clock signal are recovered after decoding. Then, the signal is sent to the mapping module. In the mapping module, the E3/T3 signal is mapped asynchronously to C-3, and formed as VC-3 after path overhead processing, as TU-3 after pointer processing, and finally as VC-4 after multiplexing. Then, the signal is sent to the cross-connect unit.
The demapping module extracts binary data and clock signals from the VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit, and then sends them to the encoder, where E3 or T3 signals are output.
Auxiliary Units
Logic control module This unit: Enables the communication between the boards and the SCC. Collects and reports alarms and performance events to the SCC. Processes the configuration command from the SCC. Power module
6-14
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards
6.2.3 Front Panel

Figure 6-8 shows the front panel of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
PL3
STAT ACT PROG SRV
PD3
STAT ACT PROG SRV
PL3A
STAT ACT PROG SRV
C34S
D34S
OUT1
OUT4
PL3
PD3
PL 3A
IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3
IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6
C34S
D 34 S
PL3
PD3
PL3A
C34S
D34S
Figure 6-8 The front panel of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-15
6 PDH Boards
Indicators
There are four indicators on the PL3, PD3, and PL3A. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colours (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colours (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) triple colours (red, green, and yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the C34S, D34S or TSB8.
Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the PD3. The board should work with the D34S to input or output E3/T3 signals. There are no interfaces on the PL3. The board should work with the C34S to input or output E3/T3 signals. There are three pairs of 75-ohm SMB unbalanced interfaces on the front panel of the PL3A. Table 6-10 describes interfaces on the C34S and D34S.
Table 6-10 Interfaces on the C34S and D34S
Interface C34S D34S
Access service Interface Interface type Corresponding processing board
3 x E3/T3
6 x E3/T3
75 ohm unbalanced interface SMB PL3 PD3

The PL3/PD3 works with the C34S/D34S and TSB8 to achieve 1:N protection for 3/6 x E3/T3 signals. Table 6-11 lists the TPS protection of the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN products.
6-16
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards
Table 6-11 The TPS protection of the PL3/PD3

Support two groups of 1:N (N3) TPS protection.
Support two groups of 1:1 TPS protection.
Not supported. Not supported. Support one group of 1:1 TPS protection.
As equipment-level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment.
The protection principle of the PL3 is the same as that of the PD3. Figure 6-9 shows the principle of 1:3 TPS for the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500.
6 xE3/T3 6 xE3/T3 6 xE3/T3 Sw itch control signal TSB8 D34S D34S D34S
Cross connect board SLOT 9/10 Protection PD3 Working PD3 Working PD3 Fail SLOT2 SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT5 Working PD3
Figure 6-9 The 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-17
6 PDH Boards
Normal status When each working board works normally, the service signal is accessed to the corresponding PD3 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the D34S. Switching status When a working PD3 failure is detected, the working board in each slot is protected in the following manners. When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding D34S switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8 does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3. When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding D34S switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4. When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding D34S switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.

Table 6-12 shows the relation between the working board and protection board when the equipment is configured as 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3 or PD3.
Table 6-12 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:3 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500
Working board Protection board Slot configuration
PL3 (E3) PL3 (T3) PD3 (E3) PD3 (T3)
PL3 (E3)/ PD3 (E3) PL3 (T3)/PD3 (T3) PD3 (E3) PD3 (T3)
When the working board is PL3, the protection board can be PD3. As shown in Figure 6-10.
6-18
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards
S S S S SS S S L L L L L L L L O O O O OO O O T T T T TT T T 19 2021 222324 2526 D34S S L O T 2 S L O T 3 D34S D34S TSB8 S L O T 1
S L O T 27 PIU
S L O T 28 PIU
S S S SS SS S L L L LL L L L O O O OO O O O T T T T T TT T 29 3031 3233343536 D34S D34S D34S TSB8
S L O T 37 AUX
FAN
FAN
FAN
S L O T 4
S L O T 5
S L O T 6
S L O T 7
S L O T 8
S L O T 9 XCS
S L O T 10 XCS
S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OO O OO OO T T T T T T T T 11 12 1314 15 16 17 18 Protection 2 Working 2 Working 2 Working 2 GSCC
Figure 6-10 Board layout upon 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500
In the figure, slot 2 protects slots 3, 4, and 5, and slot 16 protects slots 13, 14, and 15. Table 6-13 shows the slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, C34S, TSB4 and TSB8.
Table 6-13 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, C34S, TSB4 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
PL3/PD3 (protection board) PL3/PD3 (working board) TSB8/TSB4 (Note) D34S C34S
Note: we recommend the TSB8, TSB4 is no longer produced.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Fiber routing
Slot 2 Slots 3, 4, 5 Slot 19 Slots 21, 23, 25 Slots 21, 23, 25
Slot 16 Slots 13, 14, 15 Slot 35 Slots 29, 31, 33 Slots 29, 31, 33
6-19
6 PDH Boards

PL3 (E3) PL3 (T3) PD3 (E3) PD3 (T3)
PL3 (E3)/ PD3 (E3) PL3 (T3)/ PD3 (T3) PD3 (E3) PD3 (T3)
S S S S S L L L L L O O O O O T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 c 3 4 T s/ S d B 3 4 8 s PIU (SLOT22)
S L O T 6 Protection 1
S S S S L L L L O O O O T T T T 7 8 9 10
S L O T 11
S L O T 12
S L O T 14
S L O T 15
S L O T 16
M U 0 4
S L O T 17 c 3 4 s/ d 3 4 s
S L O T 18
Working 1
Working 2
CXL16
CXL16
Fiber Routing FAN (SLOT24) FAN (SLOT25) PIU (SLOT23)
Figure 6-11 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 n the OptiX OSN 2500
In the figure, slot 6 protects slot7, and slot 13 protects slots 12. Table 6-15 shows the slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, C34S, TSB4 and TSB8.
Table 6-15 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, C34S, TSB4 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500
PL3/PD3 (protection board) PL3/PD3 (working board) TSB8/TSB4 (Note) D34S
SAP
6-20
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Board Protection group 1
6 PDH Boards Protection group 2
C34S
Slot 3
Slot 15

Table 6-16 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 1500B
PL3 (E3) PL3 (T3) PD3 (E3) PD3 (T3)
PL3 (E3)/ PD3 (E3) PL3 (T3)/ PD3 (T3) PD3 (E3) PD3 (T3)
Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 11 Slot 20 FAN Slot 12 Slot 13 Slot 4 Slot 5
TSB8
Slot 18
PIU
D34S
Slot 19 Slot 6
PIU
Protection Working CXL16/4/1 CXL16/4/1
Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 EOW AUX
Figure 6-12 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
In the figure, slot 12 protects slot 13. Table 6-17 shows the slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, C34S, TSB4 and TSB8.
Table 6-17 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, C34S, TSB4 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B in the OptiX OSN 1500B
PL3/PD3 (protection board) PL3/PD3 (working board)
Slot 12 Slot 13
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-21
6 PDH Boards Board Protection group
TSB8/TSB4 (Note) D34S/C34S
Slot 14 Slot 16

The following parameters should be set on the T2000 for the PL3/PD3. Load indication When the service channel does not process the services it carries, select "Do not load". Otherwise, select "Load". Tributary loopback The tributary loopback function is generally used to locate faults for each service channel. The tributary loopback is a diagnosis function, which may interrupt services on relevant channels. Channel service type E3 or T3 can be selected on the T2000 according to the input service type.

Version N1 is the only version for the PL3, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B. Version N1 is the only version for the PL3A. The board can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 6-18 lists the technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S.
Table 6-18 Technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S
Parameter Description PL3 PD3 PL3A C34S D34S
34368 kbit/s or 44736 kbit/s 3x E3/T3 6x E3/T3 3x E3/T3 -
6-22
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Parameter Description PL3 PD3 PL3A C34S
6 PDH Boards
D34S
Access capability Line code pattern Connector Dimensions (mm)
3x E3/T3
3 x E3/T3 6 x E3/T3
E3:HDB3, T3:B3ZS None None SMB SMB 262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W) 0.31 2 SMB 262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W) 0.38 2
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
1.00 15
1.12 19
1.00 15
6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B
The PQ1 is a 63 x E1 processing board. The PQM is a 63 x E1/T1 processing board. The D75S is a 32 x 75 ohm E1 PDH interface switching board. The D12S is a 32 x 120 ohm E1/T1 PDH interface switching board. The D12B is a 32 x E1/T1 PDH interface board.
Note When the impedance of interfaces is ignored, the PQ1A and PQ1B are called PQ1 hereinafter.
Table 6-19 lists slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B in the OptiX OSN products.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-23
6 PDH Boards
The PQ1/PQM works with the D12S/D75S/D12B to provide 1:N TPS protection.
Table 6-19 Slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
Product PQ1/PQM D75S/D12S/D12B
Slots 15, 1316 Slots 15, 1316 Slots 57,1213 Not available Not available Slots 1113
Slots 1926, 2936 Slots 1926, 2936 Slots 14,1518 Not available Not available Slots 1417
Table 6-20 shows the difference between the PQ1A, PQ1B and PQM.
Table 6-20 Comparison between the PQ1A, PQ1B and PQM
Board Comparison PQ1A PQ1B PQM
Processing capability Interface board (providing TPS) Interface board (NOT providing TPS)
63 x E1 2 x D75S 2 x D12B, or 2 x D75S
63 x E1 2 x D12S 2 x D12B, or 2 x D12S
63 x E1/T1 2 x D12S 2 x D12B or 2 x D12S
6.3.1 Functionality
Functionality PQ1 PQM D75S/D12S/D12B
Basic function Service processing
63 x E1/T1 processing board
E1/T1 interface board Refer to Table 6-21 for details.
When working with interface boards, the PQ1 can access and process 63 x E1 signals. When working with interface boards, the PQM can access and process 63 x E1/T1 signals.
Overhead processing
Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination) at VC-12 level, such as J2.
6-24
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Functionality PQ1 PQM
6 PDH Boards D75S/D12S/D12B
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration. The PQ1/PQM supports TPS protection when working with interface boards. When the working board is PQ1, the protecting board can be PQM. Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
6.3.2 Principle
Figure 6-13 shows the functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM (one channel of E1/T1 signal is processed).
Backplane
D75S/D12S/ E1/T1 D12B Interface module D75S/D12S/ D12B E1/T1
Decoder
Mapping
Cross-connect unit
Encoder
Demapping
Cross-connect unit
Logic control module Pow er module +3.3V
SCC
-48 V
+3.3V Backup pow er
Figure 6-13 The functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-25
6 PDH Boards
The E1/T1 signal is accessed through the interface module. The electrical signals are sent into the decoder where data signal and clock signal are recovered after decoding. Then, the signal is sent to the mapping module. In the mapping module, the E1/T1 signal is mapped asynchronously to C-12, and formed as VC-12 after channel overhead processing, as TU-12 after pointer processing, and finally as VC-4 through multiplexing. Then, the signal is sent to the cross-connect unit.
The demapping module extracts binary data and clock signal from the VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit, and sends the signal to the encoder, where E1 or T1 signals are output.
Auxiliary Units
Logic control module This unit: Communicates the board with the SCC. Collects and reports alarms and performance events to the SCC. Process the configuration command from the SCC. Power module
6.3.3 Front Panel

Figure 6-14 shows the front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
6-26
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards
PQ1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
PQM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
D7 5S
D12S
D12 B
18 916 1724 2532
18 916 1724 2532
18 916 1724 2532
PQ1
PQM
D7 5S
D12S
D12 B
PQ1
PQM
D75S
D12S
D12B
Figure 6-14 The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
Indicators
There are four indicators on the PQ1 and PQM. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the D75S, D12S, or D12B.
Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the PQ1 or PQM. The board should work with the D75S, D12S, or D12B to input/output E1/T1 signals. Table 6-21 shows the difference between the D75S, D12S, and D12B.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-27
6 PDH Boards
Table 6-21 Comparison between the D75S, D12S, and D12B

Board Comparison D75S D12S D12B
Access capability Interface
32 x E1 75 ohm unbalanced interface DB44
32 x E1/T1 120 ohm balanced interface DB44
32 x E1/T1 -
Interface type
DB44

The PQ1 and PQM work with the D75S or D12S to achieve 1:N TPS protection for 63 x E1/T1 signals. Table 6-22 shows the TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM in the OptiX OSN products.
Table 6-22 The TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM
Support one group of 1:N (N8) TPS protection
The board in slot 1 protects the ones in slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, and 16.
Support one group of 1:N (N4) TPS protection Not supported Not supported Support one group of 1:N (N2) TPS protection
The board in slot 5 protects the ones in slots 6, 7, 12, and 13. The board in slot 11 protects the ones in slots 12 and 13.
The protection principle of the PQ1 is the same with that of the PQM. Figure 6-15 shows the protection principle of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500.
6-28
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards
S L O E1 protection bus T 1 9
S L O T 2 0
S L O T 2 1
S L O T 2 2
S L O T 2 3
S L O T 2 4
S L O T 2 5
S L O T 2 6
S L O T 2 9
S L O T 3 0
S L O T 3 1
S L O T 3 2
S L O T 3 3
S L O T 3 4
S L O T 3 5
S L O T 3 6
D75S D75S S L O T 1 S L O T 2
Protection Working
D75S D75S S L O T 3
Working
D75S D75S S L O T 4
Working
D75S D75S S L O T 5
Working
D75S D75S S L O T 1 3
Working
D75S D75S S L O T 1 4
Fail Working
D75S D75S S L O T 1 5
Working
D75S D75S E1 service bus S L O T 1 6

Working
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
Detect
board
fault
Cross-connect and timing board
TPS switching control bus
Figure 6-15 The 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
When detecting a working PQ1 is faulty, the cross-connect board delivers the service switching command to control the interface board to switch the faulty board to protection board, thus achieving the protection of services.

When the equipment is configured as with 1:8 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Table 6-23.
PQ1A (75 ohm) PQ1B (120 ohm) PQM
PQ1A (75 ohm) PQ1B (120 ohm) or PQM PQM
The board in slot 1 is a protection board, protecting the boards in slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, and 16. Figure 6-16 shows the slots for the working and the protection boards.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-29
6 PDH Boards
S S S S SS S S L L L L LL L L O O O O OO O O T T T T TT T T 1920212223242526 D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7
S S L L O O T T 27 28 PIU PIU FAN S L O T 9 XCS
S S S SS SS S L L L LL LL L O O O OO OO O T T T TT TT T 2930313233343536
S L O T 37
AUX D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S FAN
S L O T 8
S L O T 10 XCS
S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OOOOO OO T T T T T T T T 11 1213141516 1718 Working Working Working Working GSCC
Figure 6-16 Slot assignment upon 1:8 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 3500

When the equipment is configured as with 1:4 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM, the relation between the working and the protection board is shown in Table 6-24.
Working board Protection board Slot
Working Working Working Working Protection
Fiber routing
The board in slot 5 is a protection board, protecting the boards in slots 6, 7, 12, and 13. Figure 6-17 shows the slots for the working and the protection boards.
6-30
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards
S S S S S L L L L L O O O O O T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5
S S S S L L L L O O O O T T T T 7 8 9 10
S L O T 11
S L O T 12
S L O T 14
S L O T 15
S L O T 16
S L O T 17
S L O T 18
Working 1
Working 2
D 7 5 S
D 7 5 S
D 7 5 S
D 7 5 S
D 7 5 S
D 7 5 S
D 7 5 S
D 7 5 S
CXL16
CXL16
Fiber Routing PIU (SLOT22) FAN (SLOT24) FAN (SLOT25) PIU (SLOT23)
Figure 6-17 Slot assignment upon 1:1 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 2500

When the equipment is configured as with 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Table 6-25.
Table 6-25 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Working board Protection board Slot
SAP
The board in slot 11 is a protection board, protecting the boards in slots 12 and 13.

The following parameter should be set through the T2000 for the PQ1 or PQM. J2 It is the VC-12 path trace byte. Successive transmission of the lower order access point identifier through J2 helps the receive end learn that its connection with the transmit end in this path is in continuous connection status.

Version N1 is the only version of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 6-26 lists the technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S and D12B.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-31
6 PDH Boards
Table 6-26 Technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
Parameter Description PQ1 PQM D75S D12S D12B
Bit rate Processing capability Accessing capability Line code pattern Connector Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
2048 kbit/s 63 x E1 0
1544 kbit/s or 2048 kbit/s 63 x E1/T1 0 Support TPS 32 x E1 Support TPS 32 x E1/T1 Not support TPS 32 x E1/T1
E1: HDB3, T1: B8ZS, AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) DB44 DB44 DB44
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W) 25.4 (W) 1.01 19 1.01 22 0.35 5.5 0.35 9 0.31 1
6-32
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards
6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S
The PD1A is a 32 x E1(75-ohm) half-slot processing board. The PD1B is a 32 x E1(120-ohm) half-slot processing board. The PL1A is a 16 x E1(75-ohm) half-slot processing board, with signals led out from the front panel. The PL1B is a 16 x E1 (120-ohm) half-slot processing board, with signals led out from the front panel. The L75S is a 16 x E1 interface switching board (75-ohm). It is only used in the OptiX OSN 1500A. The L12S is a 16 x E1/T1 interface switching board (120-ohm). It is only used in the OptiX OSN 1500A. PD1 is used with the L75S or L12S in the OptiX OSN 1500A and used with D75S or D12S in the OptiX OSN 2500 and 1500B
Note When the impedance of interfaces is ignored, the PL1A and PL1B are called PL1 hereinafter. The PD1A and PD1B are called PD1 hereinafter.
Table 6-27 lists slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S in the OptiX OSN products.
Table 6-27 Slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S
Product PD1 PL1 L75S/L12S
OptiX OSN 3500 (80Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 3500 (40Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
Not available Not available Slots 57, 1921 Not available Slots 2, 12 (after slot segmentation) Slots 13, 68, 1113 (after slot segmentation)
Not available Not available Not available Not available Slots 69 Slots 69
Not available Not available Not available Not available Slots 67 Not available
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-33
6 PDH Boards
6.4.1 Functionality
Functionality PD1 PL1 L75S/L12S
Basic function Service processing
E1/T1 interface board
When working with interface boards, the PD1 can access and process 32 x E1 signals. The PL1 accesses and processes 16 x E1 signals directly. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination) at VC-12 level, such as J2. Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration. The PD1 supports TPS protection when working with interface switching boards. Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
Overhead processing Alarms and performance events Protection schemes Maintenance
6.4.2 Principle
The working principle of the PD1 and PL1 is the same as that of the PQ1. Refer to section 6.3.2 "Principle" for details.
6.4.3 Front Panel

Figure 6-18 shows the front panel of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
6-34
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards
PD1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
PL1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
L12S
L75S
1-16
1-16
1-16
PD1
PL1
L12S
L75S
Figure 6-18 The front panel of the PD1, PL1, L12S and L75S
Indicators
There are four indicators on the PD1 and PL1. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the L75S and L12S.
Interfaces
In the OptiX OSN 1500A, the PD1 works with the L75S or L12S to input/output E1 signals. In the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500B, the PD1 works with the D75S or D12S to input/output E1 signals. Refer to section 6.3.3 for details on the D75S and D12S. Table 6-28 compares the PL1, L75S, and L12S.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-35
6 PDH Boards
Table 6-28 Comparison between the PL1, L75S, and L12S

Board Comparison L75S L12S PL1A PL1B
Access capability Interface
16 x E1 75 ohm unbalanced interface 2mmHM
16 x E1 120 ohm balanced interface 2mmHM
16 x E1 75 ohm unbalanced/balanced interface 2mmHM
16 x E1 120 ohm unbalanced/bal anced interface 2mmHM
Interface type

The PD1 and PL1 can only be used in the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The PD1 works with L75S/D75S or L12S/D12S to achieve 1:N protection to E1 signals. Table 6-29 shows the TPS protection of the PD1.
Table 6-29 The TPS protection of the PD1
Not supported
Support two groups of 1:N (N2) TPS protection Not supported Support one group of 1:1 TPS protection Support two groups of 1:N (N2) TPS protection at most
The board in slot 5 protects the ones in slots 6 and 7. The board in slot 19 protects the ones in slots 20 and 21. The board in slot 2 protects the one in slot 12. The board in slot 1 protects the ones in slots 2 and 3. The board in slot 11 protects the ones in slots 12 and 13. The board in slot 6 protects the ones in slots 7 and 8. The latter two groups in the above groups cannot coexist.
6-36
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards
The TPS protection principle of the PD1 is the same as that of the PQ1.

The 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 can be achieved after the OptiX OSN 2500 performs slot segmentation. Figure 6-19 shows the board distribution.
S S S S S S S L L L L L L L O O O O O O O T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 19 20 21
P2 W2 W2
S L O T 11
S L O T 12
S L O T 13
S L O T 14
S L O T 15
S L O T 16
S L O T 17
S L O T 18
S L O T 5
S L O T 6
S L O T 7
CXL16
CXL16
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
P1 W1 W1
Fiber Routing PIU (SLOT22) FAN (SLOT24) FAN (SLOT25) PIU (SLOT23)
Figure 6-19 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500
Table 6-30 lists slots for the working, protection, and interface switching board of the PD1.
Table 6-30 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:2 TPS of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500
PD1 (protection) PD1 (working) D75S/D12S
Slots 5 Slots 6, 7 Slots 2, 4
SAP
Slot 19 Slots 20, 21 Slots 1, 3
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-37
6 PDH Boards
Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500A

The 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 can be achieved after the OptiX OSN 1500A performs slot segmentation. Figure 6-20 shows the board distribution.
Slot 1 Slot 20 PD1(P) Slot 2 Slot 3 FAN Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 11 Slot 12 PD1(W) Slot 13 CXL16/4/1 CXL16/4/1 Slot 6 L75S(17~32) Slot 7 L75S(1~16) Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 EOW AUX
Figure 6-20 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1

Table 6-31 shows the slot assignment of the working and the protection board of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 6-31 Slot assignment upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Before slot segmentation After slot segmentation
PD1 (protection) PD1 (working) D75S/D12S Note:
The protection group with slot 6 and that with slot 11 cannot coexist, because the two groups share protection bus. The OptiX OSN 1500B supports one group of TPS protection to E1 signals before slot segmentation, and supports two groups after slot segmentation.

The following parameter should be set through the NM for the PD1 or PL1. J2 It is the VC-12 path trace byte. Successive transmission of the lower order access point identifier through J2 helps the receive end learn that its connection with the transmit end in this path is in continuous connection status.
6-38
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6 PDH Boards

Version N1 is the only version of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B after slot segmentation. The PL1 and PD1 have two types of A and B. A indicates the interface impedance is 75 ohm, and B indicates the interface impedance is 120 ohm.

Table 6-32 lists the technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S and L12S.
Table 6-32 Technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S
Parameter Description PD1 PL1 L75S L12S
Bit rate Processing capability Accessing capability Line code pattern Connector Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
2048 kbit/s 32 x E1 0 E1: HDB3 None
2048 kbit/s 16 x E1 0 TPS 16 x E1 (75-ohm) TPS 16 x E1 (120-ohm)
2mmHM
2mmHM
2mmHM
111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.50 15 0.45 7 0.27 5 0.24 3
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
6-39
7 Data Processing Boards
Data Processing Boards
This chapter introduces data processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500, including Ethernet data processing boards, ATM data processing boards and Ethernet data interface boards as follows. Ethernet transparent transmission board EFT4/EFT8/EGT2 Ethernet switching processing board EFS4/EFS0/EGS2 Ethernet board with RPR function EMR0/EGR2 ATM service processing board ADL4/ADQ1 ATM service processing board with IMA function IDL4/IDQ1 Multi-service transparent transmission processing board MST4 Ethernet data interface board EFF8/ETF8/ETS8 The technical details cover: Functionality Principle Front panel Parameter configuration Protection configuration Version description Technical parameters Refer to Table 4-3 for the name and descriptions of the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-1
7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
The EGT2 is a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet transparent transmission board. The EFT8 is an 8/16-port 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board. The EFT4 (seated in the half-height slot) is a 4-port 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board. The EFF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board. The ETF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board. Table 7-1 shows the slots for the EGT2, EFT8, EFT4, EFF8, and ETF8 boards.
Table 7-1 Slots for the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
Product EGT2 (Note 1) EFT8 (led out from front panel) (Note 1) EFT8 (used with interface boards) (Note 1) EFT4 EFF8/ETF8
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 18, 1116 Slots 18, 1116 Slots 58, 1113 Not supported Slots 1213
Slots 16, 1316 Slots 16, 1316 Slots 58, 1113 Not supported Slots 1213
Slots 25, 1316
Not supported
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 Slots 1, 3, 15, 17 Not supported Not supported
Slots 13
Not supported
Slots 7, 1213 Not supported Not supported
Slots 57, 1921(Note2) Not supported Slots 23, slots 1213, slots 69(Note 2) Slots 13, slots 1113, slots 69(Note 2)
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1113
Slots 1113
Slots 1213
Slots 14, 16
Note 1: The EGT2 and the EFT8 support bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically according to the capacity of the slots they are seated in. Note 2: These slots are half-height slots.
7-2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7.1.1 Functionality
Board Function EGT2 EFT8 EFT4
Basic function Used with an interface board
Transparent transmission of 2 GE signals -
Transparent transmission of 8/16 FE signals The EFT8 can access 8 electrical Ethernet signals itself. Used with the ETF8, the EFT8 can access 16 electrical Ethernet signals. Used with the EFF8, the EFT8 can access 8 optical Ethernet signals and 8 electrical Ethernet signals.
Transparent transmission of 4 FE signals -
Interface specifications
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX Ethernet optical interface, supporting auto-negotiation function and compliant with IEEE802.3z. Adopt hot-swappable SFP optical module to support a transmission distance of 550 m for multimode fiber and 10 km for single-mode fiber (or use 40 km and 70 km optical modules according to the actual condition).
Used with the ETF8, the EFT8 supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX. Used with EFF8 to support 100Base-FX, compliant with IEEE802.3u.
Support 10Base-T/100Base-TX, and comply with IEEE802.3u.
Service frame format Maximum uplink bandwidth
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAGsupporting 64-byte9600-byte frames and 9600-byte Jumbo frame. 2.5 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s; Access up to 24 VC-3s or 126 VC-12s + 18 VC-3s or 63 VC-12s + 21 VC-3s 2 16 4 622 Mbit/s
Number of VCTRUNKs Encapsulation format
High level data link control (HDLC) Link access procedure-SDH (LAPS) Generic Framing Procedure-Frame Mapped (GFP-F)
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-3
7 Data Processing Boards Board Function EGT2 EFT8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual EFT4
Mapping granule
VC-3, VC-4, VC-3-Xv(x24) , and VC-4-Xv(x8) EPL is supported Not supported Transparent transmission Not supported Not supported GE port based IEEE 802.3X complaint flow control
VC-3, VC-12, VC-12-Xv(X 63) and VC-3-Xv(X 3)
VC-3, VC-12, VC-12-Xv(X 63) and VC-3-Xv(X 3)
ATM MPLS VLAN LPT CAR Flow control
Not supported FE port based IEEE 802.3X complaint flow control
Not supported FE port based IEEE 802.3X complaint flow control
Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) Testing frame Ethernet performance monitoring Alarm and performance
ITU-T G.7042, supporting dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and bandwidth protection. Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame. Support port level Ethernet performance monitoring. Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient equipment management and maintenance.
7.1.2 Principle
The working principle of the EGT2, EFT8 and EFT4 is the same, except that GE signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-1 takes a GE signal as an example to introduce the working principle of the EGT2.
7-4
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34

Backplane
1000 M Interface module 1000 M
Service processing module
Encapsulation module
Mapping module
Crossconnect unit
Control and communication module Pow er module
SCC unit
-48 V
+3.3V
+3.3V backup pow er
Figure 7-1 Functional block diagram of the EGT2
The interface module accesses 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX signals from external Ethernet equipment (such as LAN switch and router) and performs decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signals. Then it sends signals to the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, cyclic redundancy code (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. At the encapsulation module, HDLC, LAPS or GFP-F encapsulation is done to the Ethernet frame. After that, the services are mapped into VC-3 or VC-4 at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit.
Demap the VC-3 or VC-4 signals from the cross-connect unit and send them to the encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module determines the route according to the level of the equipment; it also provides frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, and CRC calculation and performance statistics. Finally, the interface module performs parallel/serial conversion and encoding to the signals and then sends them out from the Ethernet interface.
Auxiliary Units
Control and communication module Implement communication, control and service configuration functions. Power module Provide DC power supply of various voltages for the board.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-5
7.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT8/EFF8/ETF4 is shown in Figure 7-2. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
EGT 2
STAT ACT PROG SRV LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2
EFT 8
STAT ACT PROG SRV
FE1
ET F 8
EF F8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LINK ACT
FE2
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8
FE3
EGT 2
OUT1 IN1
FE4
FE1
OUT2 IN2
FE2
FE5
FE3 FE4
EF T 4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
FE6
FE5
FE1
FE7
FE6 FE7
FE2 FE3
FE8
FE8
FE4
EFT 8
E T F8
EF F8
EGT2
EFT8
ETF8
EFF8
EFT4
Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT8/EFF8/ETF4
Indicators
There are four indicators on the EGT2, EFT8 and EFT4. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. Except the above common indicators, the EGT2 has other four indicators to show port connection status. Table 7-2 shows the indicators description.
7-6
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Table 7-2 Indicators of the EGT2

Connection indicatorLINK1 (green) Data receiving/sending indicatorACT1 (orange) Connection indicatorLINK2 (green) Data receiving/sending indicatorACT2 (orange)
On Off On Off On Off On Off
GE port 1 connects with remote equipment successfully GE port 1 fails to connects with remote equipment GE port 1 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data GE port 1 and remote equipment do not receive/send data GE port 2 connects with remote equipment successfully GE port 2 fails to connects with remote equipment GE port 2 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data GE port 2 and remote equipment do not receive/send data
Each Ethernet port of the EFT8, EFT4 and ETF8 has "LINK" and "ACT" indicators near the port. The meanings of the indicators are the same as those in Table 7-2. Each Ethernet port on the front panel of the EFF8 has "LINK" and "ACT" indicators. Table 7-3 shows the indicator description.
Table 7-3 Indicators of the EFF8
Connection indicatorLINK (green) Data receiving/sending indicatorACT (orange)
On Off Flashing Off
Fiber-port connection succeeded. Fiber-port connection failed Receiving/Sending data No data received/sent
Interfaces
Table 7-4 shows the interface description of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-7
Table 7-4 Interfaces of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

Board Item EGT2 EFT8 EFT4 EFF8 ETF8
Number of interfaces Access capacity Connector Swappable optical module
2 2 x GE LC
8 8 x FE RJ-45
4 4 x FE RJ-45 Not supported
8 Interface board LC Not supported
8 Interface board RJ-45 Not supported
Supported Not supported

The parameters required by the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4 are as follows: J1 It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-3 path will generate the LP_TIM alarm. Value of J1 is "0" by default.
" by default.
C2 It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-3 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-3 path will generate the LP_SLM alarm. Ethernet interface setting Table 7-5 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4.
7-8
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Table 7-5 Parameters for the Ethernet interface of EGT2/EFT8/EFT4

Working mode
The EGT2 can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The EFT8/EFT4 can be set to auto-negotiation or 10/100 Mbit/s full-duplex. Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work under the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be lost or the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic.
LCAS enable Maximum packet length Mapping protocol
Enable LCAS or not. Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default. Available protocols: HDLC, LAPS and GFP-F. It is preferable to select the default GFP-F.

The EGT2 and EFT8 have N1 version only. The EGT2 and EFT8 are applicable to the OptiX the OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, or OptiX OSN1500 (A and B). The EFT4, seated in the half-height slot, has R1 version only. The EFT4 is applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN1500 (A and B). The EFF8 and ETF8 interface boards have N1 version only. The EFF8 and ETF8 are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, or OptiX OSN1500 (B).

The technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 are shown in Table 7-6.
Table 7-6 Technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
Parameter Description EGT2 EFT8 EFT4 ETF8 EFF8
Bit rate Processing capacity Line code pattern Connector
1000 Mbit/s 2 x GE NRZ LC
10/100 Mbit/s 16 x FE
10/100 Mbit/s 4 x FE
10/100 Mbit/s 8 x FE E/O interface board
Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s) RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 LC
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-9
7 Data Processing Boards Parameter Description EGT2 EFT8 EFT4
ETF8
EFF8
Interface specifications Dimensions (mm)
IEEE 802.3z compliant 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.9 23
IEEE 802.3u compliant 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 1.01 26
IEEE 802.3u compliant 111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.53 14
IEEE 802.3u compliant 262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Optical interface type
0.37 2
0.44 6
1000Base-SX , 1000Base-LX , 1000Base-ZX ,
100Base-L X, 100Base-S X
Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
Note: The EFT8 has no optical interface. The 100 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EFF8. The 1000 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EGT2.
Table 7-7 shows the parameters of the Ethernet optical interface types.
7-10
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Table 7-7 Parameters of the Ethernet optical interface types

Optical interface type 1000BaseSX(0.55k m) 1000BaseLX(10km) 1000BaseZX(70 km) 1000BaseZX(40 km) 100BaseFX(15km ) 100Base-F X(2km)
Central wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Optical receiver sensitivity (dBm) Receiver overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
770~860 -10~ -2.5 -17 0 9
1270~135 5 -9~ -3 -20 3 9
1480~158 1270~135 0 5 -4 ~ 2 -22 3 9 -2 ~ 5 -23 3 9
1261~13 60 -15~-8 -28 -7 10
1270~1380 -19~-14 -30 -14 10
7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
The EGS2 is a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet processing board with L2 switching. The EFS4 is a 4-port FE processing board with L2 switching. The EFS0 is a FE processing board with L2 switching. The ETS8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair switching and bridging board. The Ethernet switching boards are responsible for transparent transmission, convergence and Layer 2 switching of GE/FE services. Table 7-8 shows the slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 in OptiX OSN products.
Table 7-8 Slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
OptiX OSN product EGS2 (Note) EFS4 (Note) EFS0 (Note) ETS8
Slots 18, 1116 Slots 18, 1116 Slots 58, 1113 Not supported Slots 1213 Slots 1113
Slots 25, 1316 Slots 25, 1316 Slots 67, 1213 Not supported Not supported Slots 1213
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 Slots 1, 3, 15, 17 Not supported Not supported Slots 14,16
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-11

Note: The EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 supports bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically according to the capacity of the slot they are seated in.
7.2.1 Functionality
Board Function N1EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N2EGS2 N1EGS2
Basic function Used with an interface board
Access and process 4 FE signals -
Process 8 FE signals Used with ETF8, the EFS0 can access 8 electrical FE signals; Used with EFF8, the EFS0 can access 8 optical FE signals; Used with ETS8 and TSB8, the EFS0 can provide TPS protection for 8 electrical FE signals
Access and process 2 GE signals -
10Base-T/100Base-T X, compliant with IEEE802.3u
Used with ETF8, the EFS0 supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX; Used with EFF8 to support 100Base-FX; compliant with IEEE802.3u
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX Ethernet optical interface; supporting auto-negotiation function and compliant with IEEE802.3z; Adopt hot-swappable SFP optical module to support a transmission distance of 550 m for multimode fiber and 10 km for single-mode fiber (or use 40 km and 70 km optical modules according to the actual condition).
Service frame format Maximum uplink bandwidth Number of VCTRUNKs Mapping granule
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1 q/p, supporting 64Byte9600Byte frame, supporting 9600Byte Jumbo frame. 622 Mbit/s 12 VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv(x63), VC-3-Xv(x12) GFP(Generic Framing Procedure) 1.25 Gbit/s 12 24 2.5 Gbit/s 48 1.25 Gbit/s 24
VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv(x63), VC-3-Xv(x12) GFP(Generic Framing Procedure)
VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv(x63), VC-3-Xv(x12) GFP(Generic Framing Procedure)
Encapsulation format
7-12
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Board Function N1EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0
7 Data Processing Boards N2EGS2 N1EGS2
Ethernet Private Line (EPL) Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) Ethernet Private LAN (EPLAN)
Support Port based transparent transmission and Port+VLAN based private line service. Support EVPL, support encapsulation frame based MartinioE and stack VLAN. Not supported
Support Layer 2 based convergence and point-to-multipoint convergence; Support Layer 2 switching, including local switching and SDH-side switching; Support self-learning of source medium access control (MAC) address. The MAC address table is 16 k and the MAC address aging time can be set and queried through T2000; support configuration of static MAC route; Support virtual bridge (VB)+VLAN based data isolation; Support creating, deleting and querying a VB. The maximum number of VBs is 16(that of the N2EGS2 is 2) and that of logic ports is 30 for each VB. The maximum number of VBs is 2 for N2EGS2.
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) MPLS Virtual local area network (VLAN) VLAN convergence Rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) IGMP Snooping CAR QoS Traffic classification
Support EVPLAN, in MPLS MartinioE, MPLS MartinioP and stack VLAN frame encapsulation format. And N2EFS0, N2EGS2 don't support MPLS MartinioP frame encapsulation format. Supported IEEE 802.1q/p 4095 VLANs Supported IEEE 802.1q/p 4095VLANs Supported IEEE 802.1q/p 4095 VLANs
Not supported
Not supported
Support broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, compliant with IEEE 802.1w. Supported Supported Supported
Not supported Not supported
Port based or port+VLAN based, with the granularity being 64 kbit/s. N1EFS4, N1EFS0 and N1EGS2 support PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT+VLAN PRI based traffic classification. N2EFS0 and N2EGS2 support PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI based traffic classification.
LCAS (Note 1) LPT Flow control Testing frame
ITU-T G.7042, achieving dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and bandwidth protection Support LPT, which can be enabled or disabled. Port based IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame.
Not supported
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-13
7 Data Processing Boards Board Function N1EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual N2EGS2 N1EGS2
Loopback Ethernet performance monitoring Alarm and performance event
Support inloop at Ethernet port (PHY layer or MAC layer). Support inloop and outloop at VC3 level. Support port level Ethernet performance monitoring. Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient equipment management and maintenance.
7.2.2 Principle
The working principle of the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 is the same, except that GE signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-3 shows the functional block diagram of the EGS2 (one GE signal is taken as an example).
Backplane
1000 M
Interface processing module
Service processing module
Cross-connect unit Encapsulation module Mapping module Cross-connect unit
1000 M
Control and communication module
SCC
Power module
-48 V
+3.3V
+3.3V backup power
Figure 7-3 Functional block diagram of the EGS2
The interface processing module accesses 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX signals from external Ethernet equipments (such as Ethernet switch and router) and performs decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signals. Then, the signals are sent to the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping,
7-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
cyclic redundancy code (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. In addition, traffic classification is performed according to the service type and configuration requirement (message formats MPLS, Layer 2 MPLS VPN and Ethernet/VLAN are supported), and Tunnel and VC double labels are added according to the service for mapping and transfer. At the encapsulation module, the GFP-F encapsulation is performed to the Ethernet frame. After that, the services are mapped into VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit.
The VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 signals from the cross-connect unit are demapped and sent to the encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module determines the route according to the level of the equipment, and performs traffic classification according to the service type and configuration requirement. Also, frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics are performed by the service processing module. Finally, the signals are sent out from the Ethernet interface after parallel/serial conversion and encoding at interface processing module.
Auxiliary Units
7.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 is shown in Figure 7-4. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-15
EG S2
EFS0
STAT ACT PROG SRV
EFS4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
ET S8
FE1
EGS2
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

EFS0
FE2
FE1
FE3 FE4
FE2
FE5 FE6
FE3
FE7 FE8
FE4
EFS4
ET S8
EGS2
EFS0
EFS4
ETS8
Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
Indicators
There are four indicators on the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. Except the above common indicators, the EGS2 has other four indicators to show port connection. Table 7-9 shows the description of the indicators on the EGS2.
7-16
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Table 7-9 Indicators of the EGS2

On Off Flashing Off On Off Flashing Off
GE port 1 connects with remote equipment successfully. GE port 1 fails to connect with remote equipment. GE port 1 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data. GE port 1 and remote equipment do not receive/send data. GE port 2 connects with remote equipment successfully. GE port 2 fails to connect with remote equipment. GE port 2 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data. GE port 2 and remote equipment do not receive/send data.
Each Ethernet port of the EFS4, EFS0 and ETS8 has "LINK" and "ACT" indicators. The meanings of the indicators are the same as those of the EGS2. For indicator description of the interface board, see section 7.1.3 Front Panel.
Interfaces
Table 7-10 shows the interface description of EGS2, EFS4, EFS0, and ETS8.
Table 7-10 Interfaces of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
Board Item EGS2 EFS4 EFS0 ETS8
Number of interfaces Processing capacity Connector Swappable optical module
2 2 x GE LC Supported
4 4 x FE RJ-45 Not supported
0 8 x FE None Not supported
8 Ethernet interface switching board RJ-45 Not supported
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-17

The EFS0 is used with the ETS8 and TSB8 to implement 1:1 TPS protection for FE electrical services. Table 7-11 shows the TPS protection of the EFS0.
Table 7-11 TPS protection of the EFS0
OptiX OSN product TPS protection Configuration
Support two groups of 1:1 TPS.
The board in slot 2 protects the board in slot 3. The board in slot 16 protects the board in slot 15. The board in slot 13 protects the board in slot 12. The board in slot 12 protects the board in slot 13.
Support one group of 1:1 TPS. Not supported Not supported Support one group of 1:1 TPS.

The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 3500 is shown in Figure 7-5.
7-18
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
S S S S SS S S L L L L LL L L O O O O OO O O T T T T TT T T 1920212223242526 TSB8 S L O T 1 ETS8 FAN S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 Working 1 Protection 1
S S L L O O T T 27 28 PIU PIU FAN S L O T 9 XCS
S S S SS SS S L L L LL LL L O O O OO OO O T T T TT TT T 2930313233343536 ETS8 TSB8 FAN
S L O T 37 AUX
S L O T 8
S L O T 10 XCS
S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OOOOO OO T T T T T T T T 11 1213141516 1718 Protection 2 Working 2 GSCC
Fiber routing
Figure 7-5 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 3500
In Figure 7-5, slot 2 protects slot 3, and slot 16 protects slot 15. The slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 is shown in Table 7-12.
Table 7-12 Slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
EFS0 (protect board) EFS0 (working board) TSB8 ETS8

The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 2500 is shown in Figure 7-6.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-19
S S S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L L L O O O O O O O O O O T T T T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
S L O T 11
S L O T 12
S L O T 13
S L O T 14
S L O T 15
S L O T 16
S L O T 17
S L O T 18
EFS0(W)
EFS0(P)
CXL16
CXL16
Figure 7-6 Board configuration upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 2500
Slot 13 protects slot 12. The ETS8 seated in slot 15 is used with the working EFS0 and the TSB8 seated in slot 17 is used with the protect EFS0.

The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 1500B is shown in Figure 7-7.
Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 11 Slot 20 FAN Slot 12 Slot 13 Slot 4 Slot 5 EFS0(P) EFS0(W) CXL16/4/1 CXL16/4/1 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 EOW AUX ETS8 Slot 19 PIU TSB8 Slot 18 PIU
Figure 7-7 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OSN 1500B
Slot 12 protects slot 13. The ETS8 seated in slot 16 is used with the working EFS0 and the TSB8 seated in slot 14 is used with the protect EFS0.

The major parameters required by the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 are as follows: J1 It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the
7-20
TSB8
ETS8
SAP
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
corresponding VC-3 path will generate the LP_TIM alarm. The J1 byte of N1EGS2, N1EFS0 and N1EFS4 are set to " HuaWei SBS " by default. And the J1 byte of N2EGS2 and N2EFS0 are set to "0" by default. C2 It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-3 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-3 path will generate the LP_SLM alarm. Ethernet interface setting Table 7-13 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0.
Table 7-13 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0
Tag flag
Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG flags are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. (1) When the port is set to be tag aware, the port transmits packets with the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag flag. (2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to the packets without Tag flag according to its default VLAN ID and discards those with the Tag flag. (3) When the port is set to be hybrid, the port can process packets regardless of the Tag flag, and attach a Tag flag to the packets without the Tag flag according to its default VLAN ID. The port transfers the packets with the flag transparently.
VLAN ID Working mode
Default VLAN ID of the port. The EGS2 can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The EFS4 and EFS0 can be set to auto-negotiation, 10 Mbit/s half-duplex, 10 Mbit/s full duplex, 100 Mbit/s half duplex or 100 Mbit/s full-duplex. The Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work under the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be lost and the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic. There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal port of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of the service provider. Port type is needed when configuring EVPL and EVPLAN services. Enable LCAS or not. Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default. It is preferable to select the default GFP-F mapping protocol.
Port type
LCAS enable Maximum packet length Mapping protocol
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-21

The EGS2 and EFS0 have two versions: N1 and N2. The N1 version is not produced now. EFS4 has only one version: N1. The ETS8 has N1 version only. The EFS4 has only one version of N1. The EGS2, EFS4and EFS0 are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B). The ETS8 has only one version. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500B.

The technical parameters of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 are shown in Table 7-14.
Table 7-14 Technical parameters of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
Parameter Description EGS2 EFS4 EFS0 ETS8
Bit rate Access capacity Processing capacity Line code pattern Connector Interface impedance Interface specifications Optical interface type Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W)
1000 Mbit/s 2 x GE
100 Mbit/s 4 x FE 0 8 x FE Ethernet interface switching board 0
2 x GE NRZ LC IEEE 802.3z compliant 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 1.04 N1EGS2: 40 N2EGS2: 43.2
4 x FE
8 x FE
Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s) RJ-45 100 ohm None RJ-45 100 ohm
IEEE 802.3u compliant 100Base-LX , 100Base-SX 262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W) 0.37 2.5
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.98 30
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.98 35
7-22
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Parameter Description EGS2 EFS4 EFS0
ETS8
Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
Note: The 1000 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EGS2.
7.3 EMR0/EGR2
The EMR0 is a 12 FE + 1 GE Ethernet board with RPR function. The EGR2 is a 2-port GE processing board with RPR function. The EMR0 and EGR2 are responsible for accessing and processing Ethernet signals, and constructing resilient packet ring (RPR). Table 7-15 shows the slots for the EMR0 and EGR2 in OptiX OSN products.
Table 7-15 Slots for the EMR0 and EGR2
Product EMR0 (led out from front panel)(Note) EMR0 (used with interface board)(Note) EGR2(Note)
Note: The EMR0 and EGR2 support bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically according to the capacity of the slot they are seated in.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-23
The Table 7-16 shows the layout of EMR0 and EGR2 uplink bandwidth.
Table 7-16 the layout of EMR0 and EGR2 uplink bandwidth
OSN 3500 (40G) OSN 3500 (80G) OSN 2500 OSN 1500B OSN 1500A
EMR0 (with interface board) EMR0 (without interface board) EGR2
slot 2~5,14~16: 622M; slot 13: 2.5G slot 1~5, 14~16: 622M; slot 6, 13: 2.5G slot 1~5, 14~16: 622M;slot 6~8, 11~13: 2.5G
slot 2~4,15~16: 1.25G; slot 5, 13~14 : 2.5G
slot 6: 622M; slot 7,12 : 2.5G; slot 13: 1.25G
slot 12~13: 2.5G slot 12~13:2. 5G slot 11~13: 2.5
slot 1~4, 15~16: 1.25G; slot 5~6, 13~14: 2.5G slot 1~4, 15~16: 1.25G;slot 5~8, 11~14: 2,5G
slot 5~6: 622M;slot 7~8, 11~12: 2.5G;slot 13: 1.25G slot 5~6: 622M;slot 7~8, 11~12: 2.5G;slot 13: 1.25G
slot 12~13 :2.5G slot 12~13 : 2.5G
Note For the OptiX OSN 3500, if SDH cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, the maximum uplink bandwidth of slots 68 and slots 1113 is 2.5 Gbit/s and that of other slots is 622 Mbit/s. If the SDH cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s, the maximum uplink bandwidth of slots 58 and slots 1114 is 2.5 Gbit/s and that of other slots is 1.25 Gbit/s. For the OptiX OSN 2500, the maximum uplink bandwidth of slots 56 is 622 Mbit/s, that of slots 7, 8, 11, 12 is 2.5 Gbit/s, and that of slot 13 is 1.25 Gbit/s.
7.3.1 Functionality
Board Function EMR0 EGR2
Basic function
Process 12 FE signals and 1 GE signals. Support RPR. Provide 4 FE ports and 1 GE port without interface board. Used with the ETF8, the EMR0 can access 12 electrical FE signals. Used with the EFF8, the EMR0 can access 8 optical FE signals.
Access and process 2 GE signals. Support RPR. -
Used with interface board
7-24
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Board Function EMR0 EGR2
Used with the ETF8, the EMR0 supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX over a transmission distance of up to 100 m. Used with the EFF8, the EMR0 supports 100Base-FX. Comply with IEEE802.3u.
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX Ethernet optical interface, supporting auto-negotiation and compliant with IEEE802.3z. Adopt hot-swappable SFP optical module to support a transmission distance of 550 m for multimode fiber and 10 km for single-mode fiber (or use 40 km and 70 km optical modules according to the actual condition).
Service frame format Maximum uplink bandwidth Mapping granule Encapsulation format Ethernet private line (EPL) Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL)
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG, supporting 64Byte9600Byte frame and 9600Byte Jumbo frame 2.5 Gbit/s VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-xv (X8) GFP-F: compliant with ITU-T G.7041 LAPS: compliant with ITU-T X.86 Support port-base transparent transmission and port+VLAN private line service. Support EVPL with service frame format being Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG or stack VLAN frame. Support port-based or port+VLAN-based MPLS encapsulation and forward; Support five types of label switch path (LSP): ingress LSP, egress LSP, transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP, and RPR transit LSP. Support 512 LSPs. VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4,VC-4-xv(X8)
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN)
Support EVPLAN service in stack VLAN encapsulation format. Support self-learning of MAC address. The MAC address table of N2 has 64k entries and the MAC address table of N1 has 16k entries MAC address aging time can be set and queried through T2000. Support configuration of up to 4000 static MAC routes. Support virtual bridge (VB) +VLAN based data isolation. Support creating, deleting and querying a VB. For N2EMR0 and N2EGR2, the maximum number of VBs is 16 and that of logic ports is 32 for each VB. For N1EMR0, the maximum number of VBs is 32 and that of logic ports is 16 for each VB.
MPLS Virtual local area network (VLAN) VLAN convergence
MartinioE is supported. IEEE 802.1q/p Support 4k VLANs. IEEE 802.1q/p Support 4k VLANs.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-25
7 Data Processing Boards Board Function EMR0 EGR2
VLAN switching Port aggregation RPR feature RPR function
Support VLAN tag switching. Support the aggregation of up to 8 FE ports. Supported and compliant with IEEE 802.17. Support weighted fair algorithm.
Support VLAN tag switching. Support the aggregation of up to 2 GE ports. Supported and compliant with IEEE 802.17.
Support up to 255 nodes and destination node stripping. Support fiver priority levels: A0, A1, B_EIR, B_CIR and C. Provide auto discovery of topology to show the network status in real time. Support protection modes of steering, wrapping and wrapping + steering. The signal fail time is less than 50ms. N2EMR0 and N2EGR2 support configuring service route on RPRs manually. Support self-learning function, that is, learning the correspondence between MAC address and node number.
Rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) IGMP snooping CAR
Support broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP and STP, compliant with IEEE 802.1w. Supported N1EMR0 supports CAR based on port or port + VLAN with the granularity of 64 kbit/s to 1000 Mbit/s. N2EMR0 and N2EGR2 support CAR based on port, port + VLAN, or port + VLAN + Priority with the granularity of 64 kbit/s to 1000 Mbit/s. Support 2k CARS.
Traffic classification
N1EMR0 supports PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT+VLAN PRI based traffic classification. N2EMR0 and N2EGR2 support PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, MPLS_lable based traffic classification.
LCAS Flow control Echo test frame Loopback Ethernet performance monitoring Alarm and performance event
ITU-T G.7042, supporting dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and bandwidth protection. Port based IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control. Support the Echo function in RPR OAM which tests the link status. Support inloop at Ethernet port (at PHY layer or MAC layer). Support port level Ethernet performance monitoring. Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient equipment management and maintenance.
7-26
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7.3.2 Principle
The working principle of the EMR0 is the same as that of the EGR2, except that GE signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-8 shows the functional block diagram (one 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s signal is taken as an example).
Backplane
10/100 Mbit/s 10/100 Mbit/s
Interface module
Ethernet processing module
RPR processing module
Encapsulation and mapping module
Cross-connect unit Cross-connect unit
Communication and control module Power module
SCC unit
-48 V
+3.3v
+3.3v backup power
Figure 7-8 Functional block diagram of the EMR0
The interface processing module accesses a 10/100Base-TX/100Base-FX signal from external Ethernet equipment (such as the Ethernet switch and router) and performs decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signal. Then, the signal is sent to the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. In addition, traffic classification, Layer 2 switching, convergence, MPLS frame processing, RPR inner ring and outer ring mapping are performed according to service type and configuration requirement. The RPR processing module performs IEEE 802.17 based ring network control function. In the encapsulation module, LAPS or GFP-F encapsulation of Ethernet frame is completed. Finally, the signal is mapped into VC-3-Xv or VC-4-Xv at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit.
The VC-3-Xv or VC-4-Xv signal from the cross-connect unit is demapped and sent to the encapsulation module for decapsulation. In the RPR processing module, IEEE 802.17 based ring network control function is performed. The service processing module determines the route according to the level of the equipment,
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-27
and performs traffic classification according to the service type and configuration requirement. Also, frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics are performed by the service processing module. Finally, the signal is sent out from the Ethernet interface after parallel/serial conversion and encoding at the interface processing module.
Auxiliary Units
7.3.3 Front Panel

Figure 7-9 shows the front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
EM R0 STAT ACT PROG SRV LINK ACT
EMR0 STAT ACT PROG SRV LINK ACT
EGR2
CLASS 1
CLASS 1
LASER
LASER PRODUCT
PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT1 IN1
OUT1 IN1
FE1
OUT2 IN2
FE1
FE2
FE2
FE3
FE3
FE4
FE4
EM R0
EMR0
EGR2
N1EMR0
N2EMR0
EGR2
Figure 7-9 Front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2
7-28
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Indicators
The EGR2 has eight board indicators and the EMR0 has six board indicators as follows: Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) Connection indicator (LINK1/2) green Data receiving/sending indicator (ACT1/2) orange For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. The four indicators of the EGR2 indicating port connection are described in Table 7-17. The LINK and ACT indicators on the EMR0 indicate GE optical interface connection status.
Table 7-17 Indicators of the EGR2
On Off Flashing Off On Off Flashing Off
GE port 1 connects with remote equipment successfully. GE port 1 fails to connect with remote equipment. GE port 1 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data. GE port 1 and remote equipment do not receive/send data. GE port 2 connects with remote equipment successfully. GE port 2 fails to connect with remote equipment. GE port 2 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data. GE port 2 and remote equipment do not receive/send data.
Each FE port on the front panel of the EMR0 also has "LINK" and "ACT" indicators. The meanings of the indicators are the same as those of the EGR2.
Interfaces
Table 7-18 shows the interface description of the EMR0 and EGR2.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-29
Table 7-18 Interfaces of EMR0 and EGR2

Board Item EMR0 EGR2
Number of interfaces Connector Swappable optical module
1 of GE optical interfaces + 4 FE electrical interfaces GE: LC FE: RJ-45 Supported
2 of GE optical interfaces GE: LC Supported

The parameters required by the EMR0 and EGR2 are as follows: J1 It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-3 path will generate the LP_TIM alarm. Value of J1 is "0" by default.
" by default.
C2 It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-3 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-3 path will generate the LP_SLM alarm. Ethernet interface setting Table 7-19 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2.
7-30
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Table 7-19 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2
Tag flag
Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG flags are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. (1) When the port is set to be tag aware, the port transmits packets with the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag flag. (2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to the packets without Tag flag according to its VLAN ID and discards those with the Tag flag. (3) When the port is set to be hybrid, the port can process packets regardless of the Tag flag, and attach a Tag flag to the packets without the Tag flag according to its default VLAN ID.
VLAN ID Working mode
Set default VLAN ID for external port only. The GE interface can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The FE interface can be set to auto-negotiation, 10 Mbit/s half-duplex, 10 Mbit/s full duplex, 100 Mbit/s half duplex or 100 Mbit/s full-duplex. The Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work in the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be lost, or the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic. There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal port of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of the service provider. Set the external port to PE and internal port to P. Multiple encapsulation formats are available: MartinioE, stack VLAN. This attribute takes effective for a P port. MartinioE is applicable for EVPL service, and stack VLAN is for the EVPLAN service. Enable LCAS or not Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default. LAPS and GFP-F are available. GFP-F is recommended.
Port type
Encapsulation format
Enable LCAS Maximum packet length Mapping protocol
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-31

The EGR2 has only one version: N2. The EMR0 board has N1 version and N2 version. N1 version is the basic version. N2 version is the enhanced version, having some new functions compared with N1 version. The N1 version of EMR0 is not produced now. The functions and parameters listed in this section are applicable to the boards of N2 version. Table 7-20 gives the version description of the two versions.
Table 7-20 Version description of the EMR0
Item Description
Similarity
The two versions are similar in the working principle and basic function. N2 version provides some new functions besides all functions of N1 version. N1 version Support EVPLAN services, using stack VLAN encapsulation format. Support the MAC address with 16k entries. Support the creating, deleting and query of VB. There can be 32 VBs and 16 logic ports for each VB at most. N2 version Support the aggregation of up to 8 FE ports. Support the switching of the VLAN tag in Ethernet data. Support the replacement of the VLAN tag in Ethernet data. Support EVPLAN services, using stack VLAN encapsulation format. Support the MAC address with 64k entries. Support the creating, deleting and query of VB. There can be 16 VBs and 32 logic ports for each VB at most.
Difference
Support configuring service routes on RPR manually. Support the Echo function in RPR OAM which tests the link status.
NM support Product support
The T2000 distinguish the boards of N1 version and that of N2 version directly. The V100R002 product supports the RPR board of N1 version. The V100R003 product supports the RPR board of N1 or N2 version.
7-32
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Item Description
Replacement
Boards of N1 version can only be used as boards of N1 version. To the V100R002 or V100R003 product, boards of N2 version can replace the ones of N1 version.
The EMR0 and the EGR2 are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).

Table 7-21 shows the technical parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2. For the parameters of GE and FE optical interface, refer to Table 7-14.
Table 7-21 Technical Parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2
Board Parameter EMR0 EGR2
Bit rate Access capacity
10/100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s 4 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s; 12 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s when used with ETF8 or EFF8
1000 Mbit/s 2 x 1000 Mbit/s
Processing capacity Line code pattern Connector Optical module type Optical interface type Interface impedance Interface specifications
12 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s), NRZ RJ-45, LC SFP
2 x 1000 Mbit/s NRZ LC SFP
1000Base-SX/LX/ZX, 100Base-FX, 10/100Base-TX 100 ohm FE interface comply with IEEE802.3u and GE interface comply with IEEE802.3z 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 1.20 50 Temperature: 0C to 45C Humidity: 10%90% Temperature: 5C to 55C Humidity: 5%95% IEEE802.3z compliant
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 1.10 54 Temperature: 0C to 45C Humidity: 10%90% Temperature: 5C to 55C Humidity: 5%95%
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-33
7 Data Processing Boards Board Parameter EMR0
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual EGR2
Environment for storage
Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100%
Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100%
Environment for transportation
7.4 ADL4/ADQ1
The ADL4 is a 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board. The ADQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 ATM service processing board. The ADL4 and ADQ1 are responsible for accessing and processing ATM service. Table 7-22 shows the slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1 in OptiX OSN products.
Table 7-22 Slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1
Product ADL4 ADQ1
7.4.1 Functionality
Board Function ADL4 ADQ1
Basic function Optical Interface specifications Connector Optical module E3 ATM interface
Access and process 1X STM-4 ATM signal. Support S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC SFP
Access and process 4X STM-1 ATM signal. Support I-1, S-1.1, and L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
12 E3, inserted through PD3/PL3/N1PL3A
7-34
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Board Function ADL4
7 Data Processing Boards ADQ1
IMA Maximum uplink bandwidth ATM switching capacity Mapping granule Service type ATM connection Statistics multiplexing Traffic type and QoS ATM multicast connection ATM protection (ITU-T I.630) OAM function (ITU-T I.610) Maintenance Alarm and performance
Not supported 8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4 1.2 Gbit/s VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv (X=14) CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or UBR 2048 Supported IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM4.0 Special multicast, logic multicast Unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1 and 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (continuity check) Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level and ATM layer level for maintenance and fault localization. Provide abundant alarms and performance events for maintenance and fault location.
7.4.2 Principle
Figure 7-10 shows the functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1 (one STM-1/STM-4 signal is taken as an example).
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-35
Backplane Cross-connect unit Mapping module Cross-connect unit
STM-1/STM-4
STM-1/STM-4
Physical layer processing module
ATM service processing module
Control and communication module Pow er module
GSCC
-48 V
+3.3v
+3.3v backup power
Figure 7-10 Functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1
The STM-1/STM-4 signal accessed from the optical interface is sent to the physical layer processing module after O/E conversion. After recovering data and clock, the physical layer processing module performs SDH functions such as framing, descrambling, overhead processing and pointer processing. In addition, it performs the functions of ATM cell delimitation, descrambling and filtering. The ATM service processing module establishes or disconnects connection for ATM service, and sends ATM service to the mapping module after parameter configuration. The mapping module maps ATM service to VC3, VC4 and VC4-Xv, and finally sends the service to the cross-connect unit.
The VC-3 (E3), VC-4 or VC4-Xv signal from the cross-connect unit is sent to the mapping module for demapping, and then to the ATM service processing module for establishing or disconnecting connection as well as configuring parameters. The uplink service is sent to the mapping module after being processed by the ATM service processing module, and then sent to the cross-connect unit. The downlink service is directly sent to the physical layer processing module for service rate matching, insertion of idle cell, and cell descrambling, and then for SDH mapping, overhead insertion, multiplexing and scrambling. Finally, the signal is sent out after E/O conversion.
7-36
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Auxiliary Units
7.4.3 Front Panel

Figure 7-11 shows the front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
ADL4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
ADQ1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT1
OUT1 IN1
ADL4
ADQ1
IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
ADL4
ADQ1
Figure 7-11 Front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1
Indicators
There are four indicators on the ADL4 and ADQ1.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-37
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A.
Interfaces
Number of optical interfaces: The ADL4 has one pair and the ADQ1 has four pairs of optical interfaces. Optical interface type: LC Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The ADL4 and ADQ1 use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.

The parameters required by the ADL4 and ADQ1 are as follows: J1 It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-3 path will generate the LP_TIM alarm. Value of J1 is "0" by default.
" by default.
C2 It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-3 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-3 path will generate the LP_SLM alarm. ATM interface setting Table 7-23 lists the major parameters to be set for the ADL4/ADQ1.
Table 7-23 Parameters for the ADL4/ADQ1
Port type
NNI and UNI. UNI is the default value.
7-38
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Traffic type Service type Peak cell rate (PCR) Sustainable cell rate (SCR) Maximum cell burst size Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT)
Set according to the port. CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR Set the parameter for all types of services. Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR. Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR. Set the parameter when the service type is CBR, rt-VBR or UBR.

The ADL4 and ADQ1 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).

Table 7-24 shows the technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1.
Table 7-24 Technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1
Parameter Description ADL4 ADQ1
Bit rate Access capacity ATM processing capacity Line code pattern Connector Optical module Dimensions (nm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Optical interface type Long-term operating condition
622080 kbit/s 1 x STM-4 1.2 Gbit/s NRZ LC SFP
155520 kbit/s 4 x STM-1
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.9 35 S-4.1 L4.2 L-4.1 Ve-4.2 0.95 37 I-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 Ve-1.2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-39
7 Data Processing Boards Parameter Description ADL4 ADQ1
Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
Temperature: 5C to 55C Humidity: 5%95% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100%
Table 7-25 shows the parameters of the ATM optical interface types.
Table 7-25 Parameters of the ATM optical interface types
Optical interface type S-4.1 L-4.1 I-1 S-1.1 Ve-4.2 L-1.2 Ve-1.2 L-1.1
Wavelength (nm) Transmission distance(km) Launched power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Receiver overload (dBm)
1274~1 356 2~15 -15~-8 -23 -8
1280~1 335 15~40 -3~2 -28 -8
1260~ 1360 2~15 -15~8 -23 -8
1261~1 360 2~15 -15~-8 -28 -8
1480~1 580 80~100 -2~2 -33 -8
1480~ 1580 40~80 -3~2 -28 -8
1480~1 580 80~100 -4~0 -34 -10
1280~ 1335 15~40 -4~0 -34 -10
7.5 IDL4/IDQ1
The IDL4 is a 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board with IMA. The IDQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 ATM service processing board with IMA. The IDL4 and IDQ1 can access and process 63E1 inverse multiplexing ATM (IMA) services if used with the E1 service processing board. Table 7-26 shows the slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1.
Table 7-26 Slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1
Product IDL4 IDQ1
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 18, 1117
Slots 18, 1117
7-40
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Product IDL4
7 Data Processing Boards IDQ1
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 18, 1116 Slots 58, 1113 Not supported Slots 1213 Slots 1113
Slots 18, 1116 Slots 58, 1113 Not supported Slots 1213 Slots 1113
7.5.1 Functionality
Board Function IDL4 IDQ1
Basic function Optical interface specifications Connector Optical module E3 ATM interface Maximum uplink bandwidth ATM switching capacity Mapping granule IMA feature
Access and process 1 STM-4 ATM signal. Support S-4.1,L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 LC SFP Not supported 8 VC4, or 63 VC12 + 7 VC4 1.2 Gbit/s
Access and process 4 STM-1 ATM signal. Support I-1, S-1.1,L-1.1,L-1.2 and Ve-1.2
VC12, VC4, VC4-Xv (X=14) or VC-12-XV (X = 1 ~ 32) Access and process IMA service when used with the E1 service processing board. Process 63 x E1 IMA services. Support up to 32 IMA groups, 132 E1 for each group. The maximum multipath delay is 226ms.
Service type ATM connection Statistics multiplexing Traffic type and QoS
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or UBR 2048 Supported IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM4.0
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-41
7 Data Processing Boards Board Function IDL4 IDQ1
ATM multicast connection ATM protection (ITU-T I.630) Board protection OAM function (ITU-T I.610) Maintenance Alarm and performance event
Special multicast, logic multicast Unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1 and 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring Support 1+1 backup AIS, RDI, loopback (LB), continuity check (CC) Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level and ATM layer level for maintenance and fault localization Provide abundant alarms and performance events for maintenance and fault location.
7.5.2 Principle
The working principle of the IDL4 and IDQ1 is similar to that of the ADL4 and ADQ1, except that IMA processing is added to the ATM processing module. For the workings of the IDL4 and IDQ1, refer to Figure 7-10.
7.5.3 Front Panel

Figure 7-11 shows the front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
7-42
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
IDL4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
IDQ1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT1
OUT1 IN1
IDL4
IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 IDQ1
IDL4
IDQ1
Figure 7-12 Front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1
Indicators
There are four indicators on the IDL4 and IDQ1. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A.
Interfaces
Number of optical interfaces: The IDL4 has one pair and the IDQ1 has four pairs of optical interfaces. Optical interface type: LC Security: The optical interfaces incline down.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-43
The IDL4 and IDQ1 use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.

The IDL4 and IDQ1 support 1+1 board level protection. The working and protection IDL4/IDQ1 boards should seat in paired slots. Table 7-27 lists the paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1.
Table 7-27 Paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1
Product Paired slots
OptiX OSN 3500 (80Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 3500 (40Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
(8&11), (7&12), (6&13), (5&14), (4&15), (3&16), (2&17) (8&11), (7&12), (6&13), (5&14), (4&15), (3&16) (8&11), (7&12) (13&12) (13&12)

The parameters required by the IDL4 and IDQ1 are as follows: J1 It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-3 path will generate the LP_TIM alarm. Value of J1 is "0" by default.
" by default.
C2 It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-3 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-3 path will generate the LP_SLM alarm. ATM interface setting Table 7-28 lists the major parameters to be set for the IDL4/IDQ1
7-44
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Table 7-28 Parameters for the IDL4/IDQ1

Port type Traffic type Service type Peak cell rate (PCR) Sustainable cell rate (SCR) Maximum cell burst size Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT)
NNI and UNI. UNI is the default value. Set according to the port. CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR Set the parameter for all types of services. Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR. Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR. Set the parameter when the service type is CBR, rt-VBR or UBR.

The IDL4 and IDQ1 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).

Table 7-29 shows the technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1.
Table 7-29 Technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1
Parameter Description IDL4 IDQ1
Bit rate Access capacity ATM processing capacity IMA processing capacity
622080 kbit/s 1 x STM-4 1.25 Gbit/s
155520 kbit/s 4 x STM-1
Process 63 E1s, and support 32 IMA groups. Number of E1s within an IMA group is configurable, which can be 132. Support configurable IMA frame length. Support IMA1.1 protocol. The maximum multipath delay is 226ms.
Line code pattern Connector Optical module
NRZ LC SFP
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-45
7 Data Processing Boards Parameter Description IDL4 IDQ1
Dimensions (nm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Optical interface type Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 1.02 35 S4.1 L-4 .2 L-4. 1 Ve-4. 2 1.02 37 Ve1.2 I-1 S-1.1 L-1.2 L-1.1
Table 7-25 shows the parameters of the ATM optical interface types.
7-46
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7.6 MST4
The MST4 is a 4 x multi-service transparent transmission processing board, responsible for accessing and transmitting transparently fiber channel (FC), fiber connection (FICON), enterprise systems connection (ESCON), and digital video broadcast - asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) services. Table 7-30 shows the slots for the MST4.
Table 7-30 Slots for the MST4
Product MST4
7.6.1 Functionality
Board Function MST4
Basic function
Provide four independent multi-service access interfaces and support transparent transmission of 4 storage area network (SAN)/video signals. Support FC50, FC100/FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI signal. The service types and rates are shown in Table 7-31. Support four-port FC service (FC50, FC100/FICON and FC200), with the total bandwidth not exceeding 2.5 Gbit/s. Support transmission of FC service at full rate, that is, transmission of one FC200 or two FC100, or four FC50 services. Support four-port ESCON or DVB-ASI service.
Service type
Connector Optical module Distance extension function
LC SFP The first and second interfaces support SDH side distance extension function: FC100 supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-47
7 Data Processing Boards Board Function MST4
Maximum uplink bandwidth Encapsulation format Mapping granule ESCON DVB-ASI Maintenance Alarm and performance event
The backplane supports the connection of four 622 Mbit/s buses to the cross-connect unit. The total uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s. Support GFP-T encapsulation format in compliance with ITU-T G.7041. VC-4-Xc(X=4, 8, 16) Support 4 x ESCON services. Support 4 x DVB-ASI services. Support port level inloop and outloop at client side for maintenance and fault localization Provide abundant alarms and performance events for maintenance and fault location.
Table 7-31 The service types and rates provided by the MST4
Service type Bit rate Remarks
FC50 FC100/FICON FC200 ESCON DVB-ASI
531.25 Mbit/s 1062.5 Mbit/s 2125 Mbit/s 200 Mbit/s 270 Mbit/s
Storage area network (SAN) SAN service SAN service SAN service Video service
7.6.2 Principle
Figure 7-13 shows the working principle of the MST4.
7-48
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34

Backplane
FC ESCON DVB-ASI Interface module
Encapsul ation module
Mapping module
Cross-connect unit
FC protocol procession g module
SCC
Power module
-48 V
+3.3v
+3.3v backup power
Figure 7-13 The functional block diagram of the MST4
The interface processing module accesses the optical signal from external equipment (such as FC Switch), decodes the signal after O/E conversion and sends the signal to the encapsulation module for GFP-T encapsulation. The encapsulated signal is sent to the mapping module for mapping to VC-4-Xc. And finally sent to the SDH cross-connect unit. If port 1 and port 2 need to implement distance extension function for FC100 and FC200 services, the first and second signal from the interface processing module is sent to the FC protocol processing module, then sent to the encapsulation module and mapping module, and finally sent to the cross-connect unit.
The VC-4-Xc signal from the cross-connect unit is demapped and then sent to the encapsulation module for de-encapsulation. The FC service needing distance extension is sent to the FC protocol processing module. Other services are sent to the interface processing module and then sent out after E/O conversion.
Auxiliary Units
Control and communication module It achieves control, communication and service configuration for the board. Power module Provide various voltages required by the boards.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-49
7.6.3 Front Panel

Figure 7-14 shows the front panel of the MST4. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
M ST 4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
M ST 4
Figure 7-14 The front panel of the MST4
Indicators
There are four indicators on the MST4. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A.
Interface
Number of optical interfaces: The MST4 has four pairs of optical interfaces. Optical interface type: LC Security: The optical interfaces incline down.
7-50
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
The MST4 uses swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.

Parameters to be configured for the MST4: J1 J1 is the path trace byte. The transmit end sends the byte (higher order access point identifier) successively to inform the receive end that the connection between the two ends is normal. Once the receive end detects J1 mismatch, the involved VC-3 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. J1 byte is set as " HuaWei SBS " by default. C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-3 frame and the payload property. The C2 bytes transmitted should match with those received, once mismatch is detected, the involved VC-3 path will generate the LP_SLM alarm.

The MST4 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
7-51

Table 7-32 shows the technical parameters of the MST4.
Table 7-32 Technical parameters of the MST4
Line code pattern Connector Optical module Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for
NRZ LC SFP 262.05 x 220 x 25.4 0.9 40 Temperature: 0C to 45C Humidity: 10%90% Temperature: 5C to 55C Humidity: 5%95% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100%
7-52
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Cross-Connect and System Control Boards

This chapter introduces cross-connect and system control boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,OptiX OSN 2500REG and OptiX OSN 1500. The technical details cover: Functionality Principle Front panel Protection configuration Parameter configuration Version description Technical parameters Refer to Table 4-4 for the name and descriptions of the cross-connect and system control boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500, the OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500REG or the OptiX OSN 1500.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8-1
8.1 GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA/UXCSB/XCE
The GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA/UXCSB is the cross-connect and synchronous timing board of the OptiX OSN 3500. The XCE is a lower-order cross-connect and synchronous timing board used for extended subracks. The GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCSA, UXCSB and XCE implement the functions of cross-connection and system timing. GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCSA,UXCSB are seated in slots 9 and 10. XCE's logical slots are slots 59 and 60, physical slots are slots 9 and 10. The GXCSA is a general cross-connect and synchronous timing board, but the EXCSA is an enhanced one, and the UXCS is a super one. The UXCS can also be classified into UXCSA and UXCSB. Table 8-1 shows their differences.
Table 8-1 Comparison among GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCSA, UXCSB and XCE.
Cross-connect and timing board Higher order cross-connect capability Lower order cross-connect capacity Usage
GXCSA EXCSA UXCSA UXCSB XCE
40 Gbit/s 80 Gbit/s 80 Gbit/s 80 Gbit/s 0 Gbit/s
5 Gbit/s 5 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s
Used for the main subrack, not supporting the extended subrack. Used for the main subrack, not supporting the extended subrack. Used for the main subrack, not supporting the extended subrack. Used for the main subrack, supporting the 1.25 Gbit/s extended subrack. Used for the extended subrack.
8.1.1 Functionality
Support VC-4 unblocked higher order full cross-connect and VC-3 or VC-12 unblocked lower order full cross-connect. For the cross-connect capacity of different boards, see Table 8-1. Provide flexible service grooming capability, and support cross-connect and broadcast services. Support SNCP protection at VC-3 or VC-12. The XCE provides 1.25 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect capability and is capable of adding/dropping up to 504 E1s/T1s. Support such concatenation services as VC-4-4C, VC-4-8C, VC-4-16C, and VC-4-64C. Support 1+1 hot backup, with the protection mode being non-revertive switching by default.
8-2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Support smooth upgrade from GXCSA to EXCSA or UXCS, with signal failure time less than 50ms. Support smooth upgrade from EXCSA to UXCS, with signal failure time less than 50ms. Process S1 byte to realize clock protection switching. Input and output two channels of external synchronization clock, with clock signal set to 2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s. Communicate with other boards.
8.1.1 Principle
Here takes the GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA/UXCSB board as an example to introduce their working principle, as shown in Figure 8-1. The working principle of the XCE board is little different from that of the GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA/UXCSB board, only supporting lower order cross-connect.
Low er order crossconnect matrix 5 Gbit/s or 20 Gbit/s Higher order crossconnect matrix VC-4 40 Gbit/s or 80 Gbit/s Timing unit
Board and system Clock source
-48 V
Pow er module
Communication and control unit
Figure 8-1 Functional block diagram of the GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA/UXCSB
Higher Order Cross-Connect Matrix

The GXCSA performs 40 Gbit/s higher order cross-connect, and the EXCSA or UXCS performs 80 Gbit/s higher order cross-connect.
Lower Order Cross-Connect Matrix

GXCSA or EXCSA implement 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect and realize unblocked full cross-connect. UXCS implement 20 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect and realize unblocked full cross-connect. They are providing the system with powerful service grooming capability.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8-3
Timing Unit
Trace the external clock source, line clock source or tributary clock source, providing itself and the system with the synchronization clock source. At the same time, it provides various nodes in the data flow of the system with clock signals appropriate to the frequency and phase, so that the devices at each node can meet the requirements for data setup time and hold time, and provide the system with framing signals for identifying the position of the frame head in the data.
Control and Communication Unit

Communicate with the GSCC and other boards, and ensure communication with other boards when the GSCC is not in position. It also generates various other control signals for the GXCSA/EXCSA and system.
Power Module
Provide power supply of various voltages for the board.
8.1.2 Front Panel

Figure 8-2 shows the front panel of the GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCSA, UXCSB and XCE. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
GXCSA
STAT ACT PROG SRV SYNC
EXCSA
UXCSA
UXCSB
XCE
EXA
EXA
EXB
EXB
GXCSA
EXCSA
UXCSA
UXCSB
XCE
GXCSA
EXCSA
UXCSA
UXCSB
XCE
Figure 8-2 Front panel of the GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCSA, UXCSB and XCE
8-4
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Indicators
There are indicators on the front panel of the GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCS and XCE to indicate their working status. The description of the indicators is shown in Table 8-2
Table 8-2 Indicators of the GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCS and XCE
Indicator Color and status Description
STAT (red or green)
On, green On, red Off
The board works normally. The board hardware fails. The board is not powered on. The cross-connect unit is in active status. The cross-connect unit is in standby status. The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully. The board software or software for FPGA is being uploaded. The board software is being initialized, and is in BIOS boot stage. The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in initializing. No power supply. Service is normal, and no service alarm occurs. A critical or major alarm occurs to service. A minor or remote alarm occurs to service. No service is configured and no service alarm occurs, or no power supply. The clock works in free-run mode and system clock priority table has not set. (The clock priority table is internal clock source by default). The clock works in trace mode, tracing the other clock source in the clock priority table except internal source.
ACT (green)
On Off
PROG (red or green)
On, green
On for 100ms and off for 100ms alternatively, green On for 300ms and off for 300ms alternatively, green On, red Off SRV (red, yellow or green) On, green On, red On, yellow Off SYNC (red or green) On, green
On, red
The clock works in hold-over or free-run mode. The system priority clock table has set, but the other clock sources have lost except internal source.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8-5
Interfaces
There are interfaces on the front panel of UXCSB/XCE for connecting extended subrack cables. "EXA" and "EXB" backup each other. Through these two interfaces, the main subrack and the extended subrack can be connected, as shown in Figure 8-3.
6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S 7 7 7 8 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S FAN S S S S S S S S 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PQ1/PQM PQ1/PQM PQ1/PQM PQ1/PQM (W) (W) (W) (W) S 6 0
EXB EXA
FAN S S S S S S S S S 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PQ1/PQM (P) PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W)
FAN
XCE
(1)(2)(3) (4)
Figure 8-3 Configuration of extended subracks

(1) The "EXB" interface of the XCE (in slot 59) is connected to the "EXB" of the UXCSB (in slot 9) on the main subrack. (2) The "EXA" interface of the XCE (in slot 59) is connected to the "EXA" of the UXCSB (in slot 9) on the main subrack. (3) The "EXB" interface of the XCE (in slot 60) is connected to the "EXB" of the UXCSB (in slot 10) on the main subrack. (4) The "EXA" interface of the XCE (in slot 60) is connected to the "EXA" of the UXCSB (in slot 10) on the main subrack.
The input/output interface for external clock of the cross-connect and synchronous timing board is on the AUX board. Here only the interface names are given, as shown in Table 8-3. For a detailed description of relevant interfaces, refer to the interface description of the AUX board.
8-6
EXB
EXA
XCE
AUX
PIU
PIU
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Table 8-3 External clock interface of the GXCSA, EXCSA and UXCS
Interface name Description Interface type
CLKO1 CLKO2 CLKI1 CLKI2 CLK1 CLK2
75-ohm clock output interface 1 75-ohm clock output interface 2 75-ohm clock input interface 1 75-ohm clock input interface 2 120-ohm clock interface 1 120-ohm clock interface 2
SMB SMB SMB SMB RJ-45 RJ-45

The GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCS/UXCSB/XCE supports 1+1 protection.

The parameters of the GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCS and XCE to be set through NM are as follows.
When There is No External Clock and Synchronization Status Message (SSM) is not Started
Primary reference clock Trace level of clock source
When External Clock is Configured and SSM is Started

Primary reference clock Trace level of clock source Type of external building integrated timing supply (BITS) S1 byte Threshold for clock switching protection

The GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCSA and UXCSB are only applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack. The XCE is applicable to extended subrack. They have only one version: N1.

Table 8-4 shows the technical parameters of the GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCSA, UXCSB and XCE.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8-7
Table 8-4 Technical parameters of the GXCSA, EXCSA, UXCSA, UXCSB and XCE
Parameter Description GXCSA EXCSA UXCSA UXCSB XCE
Higher order cross-connect capability Lower order cross-connect capacity External clock Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Long-term working condition Short-term working condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
40 Gbit/s
80 Gbit/s
80 Gbit/s
80 Gbit/s
0 Gbit/s
5 Gbit/s
5 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s -
2 channels, 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 40 (W) 1.81 27 2.00 62 2.00 65 2.00 65
1.50 25
8-8
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16
The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are boards integrating the functions of the SDH processing unit, system control & communication unit, cross-connect unit and timing unit. They are only applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500. The logical boards of Q1CXL are Q1SL16, CXL and SCC. The logical boards of Q2CXL are Q1SL16, ECXL and GSCC. The CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 is seated in slots 910 in the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. The CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 is seated in slots 45 in the OptiX OSN 1500 subrack. Table 8-5 shows a comparison among them.
Table 8-5 Comparison among CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
Board name CXL1 CXL4 CXL16
Line processing capacity Cross-connect capacity (higher order) Cross-connect capacity (lower order) Clock function System control function
1 x STM-1 20 Gbit/s 5 Gbit/s/20 Gbit/s Same Same
1 x STM-4 20 Gbit/s 5 Gbit/s/20 Gbit/s
1 x STM-16 20 Gbit/s 5 Gbit/s/20 Gbit/s
8.2.1 Functionality
SDH Processing Unit
The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 boards are responsible for receiving and transmitting one optical signal at STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 level respectively. Their optical interfaces are compliant with ITU-T Recommendation G.957, frame structures compliant with ITU-T Recommendation G.707, and the jitter specifications compliant with ITU-T G.825 and ITU-T G.958. The CXL1 supports S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2 optical modules for different transmission distances. The CXL4 supports S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 optical modules for different transmission distances. The CXL16 supports I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1 and L-16.2 optical modules for different transmission distances. The CXL16 supports VC-4-4C, VC-4-8C and VC-4-16C concatenated services.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8-9
Support various protection schemes such as two-fiber and four-fiber bidirectional MS ring protection, linear MSP and SNCP. Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment management and maintenance. Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces for fast fault location. Support ALS function, avoiding laser injury to human body during maintenance. Support on-line query of the board information and the optical power. Support smooth software upgrade and capacity expansion.
System Control & Communication Unit

Configure and groom service, monitor service performance, and collect performance events and alarm information. Provide 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for NM connection. Provide F&f interface through the SEI board for COA management. Provide one 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between various boards. Provide one 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between the active and standby CXL. Provide the OAM interface through SEI, supporting remote maintenance of the Modem of RS232 DCE. Process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management. Support management of fan, such as fan alarm and speed control. Provide PIU with lightening protection and in-position detection function.
Cross-Connect Unit
Implement 20 Gbit/s VC-4 full cross-connection and 5 Gbit/s20/Gbit/s VC-12/VC-3 full cross-connection respectively. Provide two 4 Mbit/s HDLC emergency paths for MSP and SNCP. Support flexible service grooming, including cross-connection and broadcasting. Provisioning/removing service does not affect other services. Support SNCP at VC-3 and VC-12 levels. Support VC-4-4C, VC-4-8C and VC-4-16C concatenated services. Support 1+1 hot backup protection, with the default protection mode being non-revertive.
Timing Unit
Provide standard system synchronization clock.
8-10
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Input two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals, and is capable of selecting the external timing source. Output two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals. Provide SSM, extract, insert and process clock ID.
8.2.2 Principle
The CXL16 is taken as an example in the following description. Figure 8-4 shows the functional block diagram of the CXL16. The CXL16 integrates the STM-16 SDH processing unit, cross-connect unit, system control & communication unit and timing unit.
Front panel STM-16 SDH processing unit Backplane
Cross connect unit
System control and communication unit
Timing unit
Figure 8-4 Functional block diagram of the CXL16
8.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 is shown in Figure 8-5. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8-11
CXL1
STAT ACTX ACTC PROG SRVX SRVL SYNC ALMC
C XL 4
CXL16
OUT IN
OUT IN
OUT IN
RESET ALM CUT
RESET
RESET ALM CUT
ALM CUT
CXL1
C XL 4
CXL16
CXL1
CXL4
CXL16
Figure 8-5 Front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
Indicators
The indicator description of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 is shown in Table 8-6.
Table 8-6 Indicators of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
STAT
The board works normally. The board hardware fails. The board is not powered on. The cross-connect unit is in active status. The cross-connect unit is in standby status. The system control & communication unit is in active status. The system control & communication unit is in standby status. The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.
ACTX
On, green Off
ACTC
On, green Off
PROG
On, green
8-12
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Indicator Color and status Description
On for 100ms and off for 100ms alternatively, green On for 300ms and off for 300ms alternatively, green On, red Off SRVX On, green On, red On, yellow SRVL On, green On, red On, yellow Off ALMC On, yellow Off SYNC (red or green) On, green
The board software or software for FPGA is being uploaded. The board software is being initialized, and is in BIOS boot stage. The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in initializing. No power supply. Service operates normally on the cross-connect unit. Cross-connect unit check the fault of service bus. Active/standby switchover is forbidden, which will influence normal service. Service operates normally on the line unit, and no service alarm occurs. A critical or major alarm occurs to the line service. A minor or remote alarm occurs to the line service. No service is configured and no service alarm occurs, or no power supply. Alarm is cut off permanently. Alarm is normally provided. The clock works in free-run mode and system clock priority table has not set. (The clock priority table is internal clock source by default). The clock works in trace mode, tracing the other clock source in the clock priority table except internal source.
On, red
The clock works in hold-over or free-run mode. The system priority clock table has set, but the other clock sources have lost except internal source.
Interfaces
The interfaces on the front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 boards are shown in Table 8-7.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8-13
Table 8-7 Interfaces of CXL

Name Description Function
Line optical interface
LC
Receive and transmit optical signal. Use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.
RESET ALM CUT
Reset button Alarm cut switch
Press the button to warm reset the SCC unit. Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once. Press and hold the ALM CUT for three seconds to cut off audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT again to enable audible alarms.

The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 support 1+1 protection.

The parameters required by the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are as follows. J1 J1 is the path trace byte. It is used to transmit repetitively a higher order access point identifier so that the receive end can verify its continued connection to the intended transmit end. When J1 mismatch is detected at receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate an HP_TIM alarm. Value of J1 is "0" by default.
" by default.
C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate an HP_SLM alarm. Table 8-8 associates C2 byte setting to service type.
8-14
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Table 8-8 Correspondence between C2 byte setting and service type

service type C2 byte setting (in Hex)
02 04 12 00
When There is No External Clock and Synchronization Status Message (SSM) is not Started
Primary reference clock Trace level of clock source
When External Clock is Configured and SSM is Started

Primary reference clock Trace level of clock source Type of external building integrated timing supply (BITS) S1 byte Threshold for clock switching protection

The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 have one version: Q1 and Q2. The Q1 version is not produced now. Q2CXL1/Q2CXL4/Q2CXL16: Higher order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s, lower order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s, Q2 serial boards support intelligent features. On the T2000, the Q2CXL is displayed as three logic boards: ECXL, GSCC and Q1SL1/4/16.

The technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are shown in Table 8-9.
Table 8-9 Technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
Parameter Description CXL1 CXL4 CXL16
Bit rate Connector Dimensions (mm)
155520 kbit/s LC
622080 kbit/s
2488320 kbit/s
262.05 (H) x 25.4 (W) x 220 (D)
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8-15
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards Parameter Description CXL1 CXL4
CXL16
Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Long-term working condition
1.12 40 Temperature: 0C to 45C Humidity: 10%90%
Short-term working condition
Table 8-10 Optical module types supported by CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
CXL1
Optical module type Wavelength (nm) Launched power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Receiver overload (dBm)
CXL4
S-1.1 1261~ 1360 15 to 8 28 8
L-1.1 1280~ 1335 5 to 0 34 10
L-1.2 1480~ 1580 5 to 0 34 10
Ve-1.2 1480~ 1580 3 to 2 34 10
Optical module type Wavelength (nm) Launched power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Receiver overload (dBm)
CXL16
S-4.1 1274~1356 15 to 8 28 8
L-4.1 1280~1335 3 to 2 28 8
L-4.2 1480~1580 3 to 2 28 8
Ve-4.2 1480~1580 2 to 2 33 13
Optical module type Wavelength (nm) Launched power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
I-16 1266~ 1360 10 to 3 18
S-16.1 1260~ 1360 5 to 0 18
L-16.1 1280~ 1335 2 to 3 27
L-16.2 1500~ 1580 2 to 3 28
8-16
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Receiver overload (dBm)
8.3 GSCC/SCC
The GSCC/SCC is the system control and communication board, seated in slot 17 or 18. It functions main control, orderwire, communication and system power monitoring. The GSCC that supports intelligent features and extended subrack and the SCC does not.
8.3.1 Functionality
Support 1+1 hot backup protection. When the active board fails, the service will switch to the standby board automatically. Monitor service performance, and collect performance events and alarm information. Provide the F&f interface through the AUX board for management of case-shape optical amplifier (COA). Provide one 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface (the port is on the AUX board) for communication with the NM. Provide one 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between the active and standby SCCs. Process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management information. Process such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and Serial 14. Provide one 64 k codirectional data interface F1 through AUX. Provide the OAM interface through AUX, supporting remote maintenance of the Modem of RS232 data connected equipment (DCE). Monitor 48 V power supply of the system. Support control of four cabinet indicators. Process 16 housekeeping alarm inputs and four housekeeping alarm outputs. Support management of intelligent fan, such as fan alarm and speed control. Provide PIU with lightening protection and in-position detection function.
8.3.2 Principle
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8-17
Caution There are four important databases on the GSCC: mdb, drdb, fdb0 and fdb1. The mdb is in the dynamic random-access memory (RAM), saving the current databases. The drdb is saved in flash RAM and D RAM. When power failure occurs to NE, the databases will be recovered in the order of drdbfdb0fdb1. The drdb will be checked first for configuration data. If the configuration data are safe in drdb, they will be recovered to mdb from drdb; if they are damaged, data will be recovered from fdb0 or fdb1, depending on which saves the latest data. If data in fdb0 are also damaged, fdb1 is used for data recovery. Therefore, it is important to back up data to fdb0 and fdb1 and compare the data in them.
Figure 8-6 shows the functional block diagram of the GSCC.

F1 1 orderwire phone 2 SDH NNI phones Serial 1-4 40 DCCs (D1-D3) 16 alarm inputs and 4 alarm outputs interface 4 cabinet alarm indicator interface AUX backup power alarm detection Fan alarm detection and management PIU alarm detection and management
Overhead processing module
Power monitoring module
Control module
Communication module
NM interface F&f OAM
-48 V
Power module
Figure 8-6 Functional block diagram of the GSCC
Control Module
The control module configures and manages boards and NEs, collect alarms and performance events, and backs up important data. The control module processes 40 DCC (D1D3) bytes.
Communication Module
The communication module provides 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for NM connection, F&f interface for managing external devices such as COA, and the OAM interface. The communication module also process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management.
8-18
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Overhead Processing Module

The overhead processing module receives overhead signals from the line slot and processes such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and serials 14. The overhead processing module also sends overhead signals to the line board, and externally provides one orderwire interface, two SDH NNI audio interfaces, interface F1, and the broadcast data interfaces serials 14. The position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame is shown in Figure 8-7.
A1 B1 D1 A1 A1 A2 E1 D2 AU_PTR B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 B2 Serial 4 B2 K1 D5 D8 D11 M1 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 Serial3 A2 A2 J0 F1 D3 Serial 1 Serial2
Figure 8-7 Position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame
Power Monitoring Module

The power monitoring module comprises 48 V power monitoring and working power. The working power provides the GSCC with working voltage and detects and switches the active and standby 3.3 V power supply (which is provided through AUX). The 48 V power monitoring module monitors the +3.3 V power alarm of AUX, monitors fan alarms, monitors and manages the PIU, and processes sixteen housekeeping alarm inputs and four housekeeping alarm outputs as well as the cabinet alarm indicator signal, monitors the over-voltage of -48v and produces corresponding power alarm.
8.3.3 Front Panel

The GSCC/SCC front panel is shown in Figure 8-8. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8-19
GSCC
SCC
STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC
STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC
RESET
RESET
ALM CUT
ALM CUT
GSCC
SCC
GSCC
SCC
Figure 8-8 The front panel of the GSCC and the SCC
Button
The Button description of the GSCC is shown in Table 8-11.
Table 8-11 Button description of the GSCC
Name Function
RESET ALM CUT
Warm reset Alarm cut button Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once. Press and hold the ALM CUT for three seconds to cut off audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT again to enable audible alarms.
Indicators
8-20
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
The indicator description of the GSCC is shown in Table 8-12.

Table 8-12 Indicator description of the GSCC
STAT (red or green)
The board works normally. The board hardware fails. The board is not powered on. The board is in active status. The board is in standby status. The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully. The board software or software for FPGA is being uploaded. The board software is being initialized, and is in BIOS boot stage. The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in initializing. No power supply. Service is normal, no service alarm occurs. A critical or major alarm occurs to service. A minor or remote alarm occurs to service. No service is configured and no service alarm occurs, or no power supply. The 48 V power supply A is normal. The 48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or failed). The 48 V power supply B is normal. The 48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or failed). The 3.3 V protection power is normal. The 3.3 V protection power is faulty. Permanent alarm cut-off. Give audible warning upon alarm.
ACT (green)
On Off
PROG (red or green)
On, green
On for 100ms and off for 100ms alternatively, green On for 300ms and off for 300ms alternatively, green On, red Off SRV (red, yellow or green) On, green On, red On, yellow Off PWRA (red or green) On, green On, red On, green On, red On, green On, red On, yellow Off
Note: Power supply A indicates the first power input. Power supply B indicates the second power input.
PWRB (red or green)
PWRC (red or green) ALMC (yellow)
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8-21
Interfaces
The interfaces provided by the GSCC are led out through the AUX. For details, refer to the interface description of the AUX.

The SCC has one version N1. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500. It does not support intelligent features or extended subracks. N1SCC is not supported in the version later than V100R003. The GSCC has only one version: N1. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and supports intelligent features or extended subracks.

Table 8-13 shows the technical parameters of the GSCC.
Table 8-13 Technical parameters of the GSCC
Processing capability Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Long-term operating condition
System control, inter-board communication, orderwire, and power detection 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.88 10 Temperature: 0C to 45C Humidity: 10%90%
Short-term operating condition
8-22
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8.4 CRG
The CRG is the system control and clock unit of the OptiX OSN 2500 REG, seated in slots 910. It implements control, orderwire, communication, and clock assignment and tracing functions.
8.4.1 Functionality
System Control and Communication Unit
Implement service configuration and grooming, monitor service performance, and collect performance events and alarm information. Provide the F&f interface through the SEI board for management of case-shape optical amplifier (COA). Provide a 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface through the SEI board for communication with the T2000. Provide the RS232 DCE remote maintenance interface (X.25) through SEI, supporting the access of Modem Process 40 data communication channels (DCCs) to provide the transmit link for network management Process regeneration section bytes, such as E1, Serial 12, F1, D1D3. Provide transparent transmission of D1D12 bytes of other manufacturers. Provide two 485 bus lines for communication between boards. The two lines backup each other. Provide a 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for communication between boards, and report of board alarm information and performance information. Provide a 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between active and standby SCC boards. Monitor 48 V power supply of the system. Support management of fan, such as fan alarm and speed control. Support control of four cabinet indicators. Support non-revertive switching between active and standby boards without impact on services. Support warm reset, cold reset and reset by pressing button. The warm reset does not affect services. Support querying board information, which includes board software version, FPGA version, BIOS version, and board manufacturing information.
Clock Unit
Implement system timing function, which complies with the timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks under REG mode specified in ITU-T G.813.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8-23
When REG works normally, the clock at the transmit end is synchronized with that at the receive end. The clock works in pass-through mode. If the clock at the receive end is lost, the clock at the transmit end traces the free-run clock in the equipment. The accuracy is greater than 20 ppm. Support trace and free-run working modes and switching between the three modes. The current working mode can be queried. Support setting and querying the clock trace source priority table. The reference clock source of the system clock is the line clock or clock within the system.
8.4.2 Principle
Figure 8-9 shows the functional block diagram of the CRG.
System control module Communication module NM interface F&f OAM
FPGA
Line clock from line units
Timing module
2K 38M
Boards in other slots
-48 V
Pow er module
Detecting module
Figure 8-9 Functional block diagram of the CRG
System Control Module

Configure and manage the board and NEs, collect alarms and performance events, and backup important data.
It provides: 10 Mbit/s/100Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interfaces for connection with NM and communication between boards. F&f interface to manage external equipment such as COA as well as OAM interface to support maintenance and management. Communication processing function through ECC channel.
FPGA
It is a software processing module.
8-24
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Clock Module
When the REG works normally, the clock module extracts and traces the line clock received by the source end, and provides system clock signals (2 kbit/s or 38 Mbit/s signals, for example) required by the system.
Detection Module
It detects board temperature, power supply (over-voltage and under-voltage), clock frequency deviation and failure. The power monitoring module comprises 48 V power monitoring and working power. The working power provides the CRG board with working voltage and detects and switches the active and standby 3.3 V power supply (which is provided through AUX). The 48 V power monitoring monitors the +3.3 V power alarm of AUX, monitors and manages the fan, and processes housekeeping alarm inputs and outputs as well as the cabinet alarm indicator signal.
Power Module
Provide -48V power for working.
8.4.3 Front Panel

Figure 8-10 shows the front panel of the CRG. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8-25
CRG
STAT ACTC PROG SYNC ALMC
RESET
ALM CUT
CRG
CRG
Figure 8-10 Front panel of the CRG
Button
The button description of the CRG is shown in Table 8-14.
Table 8-14 Button description of the CRG
Name Function
RESET ALM CUT
Warm reset button Alarm cut button Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once. Press and hold the ALM CUT for three seconds to cut off audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT again to enable audible alarms.
Indicators
The indicator description of the CRG is shown in Table 8-15.
8-26
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Table 8-15 Indicator description of the CRG

STAT (red or green)
The board works normally. The board hardware fails. The board is not powered on. The CRG is in the active status. The CRG is in the standby status. The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully. The board software or software for FPGA is being uploaded. The board software is being initialized, and is in BIOS boot stage. The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in initializing. No power supply. The clock works in free-run mode and system clock priority table has not set. (The clock priority table is internal clock source by default). The clock works in trace mode, racing the other clock source in the clock priority table except internal source.
ACTC (green)
On Off
PROG (red or green)
On, green
On for 100ms and off for 100ms alternatively, green On for 300ms and off for 300ms alternatively, green On, red Off SYNC (red or green) On, green
On, red
The clock works in hold-over or free-run mode. The system priority clock table has set, but the other clock sources have lost except internal source. Permanent alarm cut-off Audible warning upon alarm.
ALMC (yellow)
On Off
Interfaces
The interfaces provided by the CRG are led out through the SEI. For details, refer to the interface description of the SEI.

The CRG has one version Q1. It is only applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 REG.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
8-27

Table 8-16 shows the technical parameters of the CRG.
Table 8-16 Technical parameters of the CRG
Processing capability Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Long-term operating condition
System control, inter-board communication, orderwire, and power detection 262.05 x 220 x 25.4 0.90 12 Temperature: 0C to 45C Humidity: 10%90%
Short-term operating condition
8-28
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
9
Functionality Principle Front panel Version description Technical parameters
Other Boards
This chapter introduces the optical amplifier board, built-in WDM unit, power board, orderwire board and auxiliary interface board of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500 REG and OptiX OSN 1500. The technical details cover:
9.1 LWX
The LWX is an arbitrary rate wavelength conversion board, converting signal of arbitrary rate (10 Mbit/s2.7 Gbit/s NRZ encoding) at the client side into standard wavelength optical signal in compliance with G.692. Table 9-1 shows the slots for the LWX in the OptiX OSN products.
Table 9-1 Slots for the LWX
Product LWX
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-1
9 Other Boards
9.1.1 Functionality
Convert client-side signals into ITU-T G.692 (DWDM) compliant standard wavelength signals and transmit the signals transparently. Provide 3R function for client-side signals (at the rate of 10 Mbit/s2.7 Gbit/s), perform clock recovery and monitor its rate. Provide two types of LWX board: one is single-fed single receiving, and the other is dual-fed signal selection. The dual-fed signal selection LWX supports intra-board protection, realizing optical channel protection with one board. The protection switching time is less than 50ms. The single-fed single receiving LWX supports inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection. The protection switching time is less than 50ms. Support sub-carrier modulation to realize ECC communication. The central wavelength complies with ITU-T, and channel spacing is 100 GHz. Support automatic laser shutdown function (ALS). When no light is received, the corresponding optical transmitting module will be automatically shut down. Support inloop and outloop function at optical interface level for fault location. Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient maintenance.
Note Sub-carrier modulation: Couple a weak 2.4 Gbit/s signal (after spreading) into the service signal and then modulate the laser. Obtain 2.4 Gbit/s signal through the bandpass filter after O/E conversion at the receiving end and then get the original signal through demodulation.
9.1.2 Principle
The functional block diagram of the LWX board is shown in Figure 9-1.
9-2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
Backplane ITU-T G.692 wavelength 10 Mbit/s 2.7 Gbit/s Client side 10 Mbit/s 2.7 Gbit/s
Optical transponder WDM side module
Sub-carrier modulation
SCC
SCC
Power module
-48 V
+3.3 V
+3.3 VBackup power
Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the LWX
The optical transponder module processes 10Mbit/s~2.7Gbit/s optical signal received from the client side. At the DWDM side, the LWX outputs ITU-T G.692-compliant standard wavelength signal. The optical transponder module has jitter suppression function which guarantees good jitter suppression performance.
The LWX receives ITU-T G.692-compliant standard wavelength signal from the DWDM side. The optical transponder module processes the optical signal and outputs the 10Mbit/s~2.7Gbit/s signal at the client side.
Auxiliary Units
Control and communication module Implement communication, control and service configuration functions. Power module Provide power supply of various voltages for the board.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-3
9 Other Boards
9.1.3 Front Panel

Figure 9-2 shows the front panel of the LWX board. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
LW X
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX RX OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 LW X
Figure 9-2 Front panel of the LWX
Indicators
There are four indicators on the LWX. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A.
Interfaces
The LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX are described in Table 9-2.
9-4
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
Table 9-2 Interfaces of the LWX

Interface Type Description
IN1/IN2 OUT1/OUT 2 TX RX
LC LC LC LC
Receive the signals from the optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2. Send signals to the optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2. Send service signal to client-side equipment. Receive the service signal from client-side equipment.
Note: IN1/OUT1 is a pair of receive/transmit optical interfaces, and IN2/OUT2 is another pair.

The LWX has only one version N1. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.

Table 9-3 and Table 9-4 show the optical interface parameters on client side and DWDM side of the LWX. Table 9-5 shows the technical parameters of the LWX.
Table 9-3 Client-side optical interface parameters of the LWX
Item Unit Description
Bit rate Source type Transmission distance
10 Mbit/s2.7 Gbit/s SLM 15 SLM 40 SLM 80
km
Characteristics of transmitter at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Min. mean launched power Min. extinction ratio Min. side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern nm dBm dBm dB dB
-
12601360 0 5 +8.2 30 G.957 compliant
12601360 +3 2 +8.2 30 G.957 compliant
15001580 +3 2 +8.2 30 G.957 compliant
Characteristics of receiver at point R
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-5
9 Other Boards Item Unit Description
Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Min. receiver overload Maximum reflectance
PIN 12001600 18 0 27
PIN 12001600 18 -9 27
APD 1200160 0 28 9 27
nm dBm dBm dB
Table 9-4 DWDM-side optical interface parameters of the LWX

Item Unit Description
Channel spacing
GHz
100
Characteristics of transmitter at point Sn Transmission distance Maximum mean launched power Min. mean launched power Min. extinction ratio Nominal central frequency Central frequency offset Maximum 20 dB spectrum width Min. side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance value Eye pattern km dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm
-
640 2 +3 +10 192.10 196.00 12.5 0.2 35 12800 G.957 complia nt
170(2Mw) 2 +3 +10 192.10 196.00 12.5 0.4 35 2400 G.957 compliant
170(10 mW) +7 +5 +10 192.10~ 196.00 12.5 0.4 35 3200 G.957 compliant
80 2 +3 +10 192.1019 6.00 12.5 0.4 35 1600 G.957 compliant
Characteristics of receiver at point Rn Receiver type Operating wavelength range

-
APD 12001600
PIN 12001600
nm
9-6
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Item Unit Description
9 Other Boards
Receiver sensitivity Min. receiver overload Maximum reflectance
dBm dBm dB
-28 9 27
-18 0 27
Table 9-5 Technical parameters of the LWX

Line code pattern Connector Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
NRZ encoding LC 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 1.10 30 Temperature: 0C to 45C Humidity: 10%90% Temperature: 5C to 55C Humidity: 5%95% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100%
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-7
9 Other Boards
9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
The MR2A, MR2B and MR2C are 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing boards, adding/dropping and multiplexing any adjacent two channels of signals. MR2A: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2B: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (half-height slot) MR2C: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (interface area) Table 9-6 shows the slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C in OptiX OSN products.
Table 9-6 Slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C
OptiX OSN product MR2A MR2B MR2C
Not supported Not supported Slots 57, 1921 Not supported Slots 2-3, 69, 1213 Slots 13, 69, 1113
9.2.1 Functionality
Add/drop two adjacent standard wavelengths in compliance with ITU-T G.692 (DWDM), with signals transmitted transparently and operating wavelength ranging from 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm. Serve as an OTM or OADM station adding/dropping two channels, as shown in Figure 9-3. Two MR2A/MR2B/MR2C boards connected in serial can form an OTM station adding/dropping four channels, as shown in Figure 9-4. Work with the LWX to form an OADM station to add/drop two channels of signals. The central wavelength complies with ITU-T, and the channel spacing is 100 GHz.
9-8
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
Drop1 Out
Drop2 MI
Drop1 Out
Drop2 MI
Drop1 Out
Drop2 MI
MR2A/ MR2B/ MR2C In Add1 MO Add2 In
MR2A/ MR2B/ MR2C MO Add2 In Add1 Add1
MR2A/ MR2B/ MR2C MO Add2
(1)
(2)
(1) MR2A/MR2B/MR2C can serve as an OTM station adding/dropping two channels. (2) Two MR2A/MR2C boards connected in serial can serve as an OTM station adding/dropping four channels.
Figure 9-3 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C serves as OTM station
In Drop1 LWX Add1 MI MR2A/ MR2B/ MR2C
Out Add2 LWX Drop2 MO
Figure 9-4 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C and LWX form OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals
9.2.2 Principle
The functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C board is shown in Figure 9-5.
Front panel Out Add1 Add2 MI MO Drop2 Drop1 In Backplane
OADM module
Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
The MR2A/MR2B/MR2C mainly includes the OADM module adding/dropping two channels of signals. The OADM adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-9
9 Other Boards
signals. It also provides concatenation interfaces to connect other add/drop multiplexing boards for more powerful add/drop capability. The MR2A/MR2B/MR2C is a passive board has no interface with the backplane.
9.2.3 Front Panel

Figure 9-6 shows the front panel of the MR2A board. The front panel of the MR2B and MR2C is the same as the MR2A board, except the panel dimensions. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
M R 2A
M R2A
Figure 9-6 Front panel of the MR2A
OUT AO1 AO2 M I M O DO2 DO1 IN
Indicators
None
Interfaces
There are four pairs of LC optical interfaces on the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C front panel, as described in Table 9-7.
9-10
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
Table 9-7 Interfaces of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

Interface Type Description
A01A02 D01D02 IN OUT MO/MI
LC LC LC LC LC
Access two channels of service signal added locally. Drop two channels of service signal locally. Receive two channels of multiplexed signal. Send two channels of multiplexed signal. Concatenation interface, through which multiple MR2A/MR2B/MR2C boards can be concatenated.

The MR2A, MR2B and MR2C have only one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.

Table 9-8 shows the technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C.
Table 9-8 Technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
Operating wavelength
Any two adjacent channels with G.692 (DWDM) compliant standard wavelength, with operating wavelength being 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm NRZ LC 100 <2 >25 >35 <0.11 MR2A: 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) MR2B: 111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) MR2C: 262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
Line code pattern Connector Channel spacing (GHz) Insertion loss (dB) Adjacent channel isolation (dB) Non-adjacent channel isolation (dB) 0.5 dB channel wavelength (nm) Dimensions (mm)
Weight (kg)
1.01
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-11
9 Other Boards Parameter Description
Power consumption (W) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
0 Temperature: 0C to 45C Humidity: 10%90% Temperature: 5C to 55C Humidity: 5%95% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100%
9.3 BA2/BPA
The BA2 is a 2-port booster amplifier board. The BPA is a booster amplifier & pre-amplifier board. Table 9-9 shows the slots for the BA2 and BPA in OptiX OSN products.
Table 9-9 Slots for the BA2 and BPA
Product BA2 BPA
Slots 18, 1117 Slots 18, 1116 Slots 58, 1113 Slots 58, 1113 Slots 1213 Slots 1113
Slots 18, 1117 Slots 18, 1116 Slots 58, 1113 Slots 58, 1113 Slots 1213 Slots 1113
9.3.1 Functionality
Increase the launched power of line board to +14 dBm or +17 dBm, thus to achieving a transmission distance of above 120 km or 130 km (in the case of G.652 optical fiber and 0.275 dB/km power loss on such fiber). The BPA uses the pre-amplifier (PA) module to pre-amplify the received optical signal and increase the power gain of weak signals to 22 dB, thus improving the receiver sensitivity to 37 dBm. Control automatically laser temperature and optical power of the EDFA module.
9-12
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
Support automatic monitoring of input and output optical power and querying of the optical power of the EDFA module. Support report of laser performance parameters. Support the protection function of EDFA module. When no light is input, the software will automatically shut down the laser; when light is input again, the software will automatically start the laser. Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient equipment management and maintenance. Support smooth software upgrade and expansion.
9.3.2 Application
In the long distance transmission, the attenuation of optical signal is great. To make the optical receiver receive normal optical signal, BA and PA are needed. The position of BA and PA in the optical transmission system is shown in Figure 9-7.
Transmit
BA
Receive
Transmit
PA
Receive
Figure 9-7 Position of BA and PA in the network
9.3.3 Principle
Figure 9-8 shows the functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-13
9 Other Boards
Optical input Optical output Optical input

Optical output
EDFA optical module 1
EDFA optical module 2
Optics part
Pump current check
Module Input/output Driv e temperature power module check control
Pump current check
Driv e module
Module temperature control
Input/output power check Fixed f ilter
Driv e and check part
A/D and D/A conv ersion
SCC
Control module
Data processing and communication part
Figure 9-8 Functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA
Optics Part
This part is composed of two EDFA optical modules for optical amplification.
Drive and Check Part

This part provides the EDFA optical modules with drive current, checks working status of each part of the EDFA optical modules, and forecasts and handles the possible faults. This drive and check part also checks the pump current, drives the optical module, controls the optical module and checks the input and output optical power. BPA works with the fixed filter, but BA2 does not.
Data Processing and Communication Part

This part comprises central processing unit (CPU) and peripheral chips. Analysis of the measuring result of the check circuit is conducted at this part. Then, the drive circuit will be adjusted within the rated range according to the analysis result, so that the gain of EDFA optical modules and the output optical power can be regulated above the rated value. Any abnormity indicated by the measured value will be arranged and reported to T2000.
9.3.4 Front Panel

The front panel of the BA2 and BPA is shown in Figure 9-9. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
9-14
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
BA2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
BPA
STAT ACT PROG SRV
BOUT BIN
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 BA2

BPA
P OUT P IN
BA2
BPA
Figure 9-9 Front panel of the BA2 and BPA
Indicators
There are four indicators on the BA2 and BPA. Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) green Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow) For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A.
Interfaces
There are two pairs of LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the BA2 and BPA for receiving and transmitting optical signal. Using swappable optical module is easy for maintenance.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-15
9 Other Boards

The BA2 and BPA have only one version N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500.

The technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA are shown in Table 9-10.
Table 9-10 Technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA
Parameter Description BA2 BPA
Processing capability
2-channel power amplification
1-channel power amplification and 1-channel pre-amplification
Line code pattern Connector Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Operating wavelength range (nm) Input power range (dBm) Output power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Noise figure (dB) Type of optical interface Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
NRZ LC 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 1.01 20 BA: 15301565 BA: 6 to +3 BA: +14 or +17 <6.5 V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-64.2, U-64.2 Temperature: 0C to 45C Humidity: 10%90% Temperature: 5C to 55C Humidity: 5%95% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100% 1.01 20 BA: 15301565 PA: 1550.12 BA: 6 to +3 PA: 10 to 37 BA: +14 or +17 PA: 38 BA: <6.5, PA: <6 V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-64.2, U-64.2
9-16
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
9.4 COA
The COA, a case-shape optical amplifier, integrates the EDFA module, drive circuit and communication circuit in an aluminum case. Three types of COA are available: 61COA, N1COA and 62COA.
Note The COA mentioned below includes 61COA, N1COA and 62COA.
The 61COA is used for 1550 nm window. N1COA is used for 1530nm-1560nm window, the N1COA works without filter and it is multi-wavelength optical amplifier. The appearances of 61COA and N1COA are shown in Figure 9-10. The 61COA and N1COA are equipped with only one EDFA optical module and can work as optical amplifier, pre-amplifier or line amplifier. The optical characteristics of the 61COA or N1COA are the same as those of the BPA and the BA2. The 61COA or N1COA is externally installed and does not occupy any slot in the subrack. It can be installed in the ETSI cabinet but needs separate power supply. Each OptiX OSN 3500 can work with up to two 61COAs or N1COAs.
Figure 9-10 Appearance of the 61COA or N1COA (PA)
The 62COA is a case-shape Raman amplifier used at the receiving end of the SDH equipment. It inputs counter-propagating pump light to fibers for distributed Raman amplification. The gain medium of Raman amplification is the line fiber that can realize better noise performance. Therefore, the 62COA can extend the transmission distance, lower the signal-to-noise ratio and realize ultra long hop transmission for a single span. Figure 9-11 shows the appearance of the 62COA.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-17
9 Other Boards
4
1 2 3
1. Captive screw 4. ESD jack
2. Ejector lever 5. Power access board
3. COA board
Figure 9-11 Appearance of the 62COA
9.4.1 Functionality
The 61COA or N1COA is an erbium doped fiber amplifier, mainly used as optical booster amplifier. It can raise the launched optical power of the line board up to +14 dBm or +17dBm, thus extending the transmission distance. The 61COA or N1COA can also work as the preamplifier with the receiver sensitivity of 38 dBm. The 62COA is configured at the receiving end of the SDH system as a Raman amplifier. It works with an EDFA of +17 dBm at the transmitting end to realize the transmission of more than 170 km. The 62COA provides the pre-amplification function with the receiver sensitivity of 39 dBm. The COA implements laser controlling function. Communicate with the SCC board through RS-232 serial port, report the alarms and performance events of the local board to the NM and receive configuration commands from the NM. The COA is externally installed and does not occupy any slot in the subrack. It can work separately.
9.4.2 Application
The 61COA or N1COA is applied in the optical transmission system in the same way as the BA2 and BPA. The 62COA is a Raman fiber amplifier, used at the receiving end of the optical transmission system. It amplifies optical signal by means of stimulated Raman
9-18
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
scattering (SRS) effect. The 62 COA needs to work with the EDFA to realize the transmission of more than170 km, as shown in Figure 9-12.
Raman Amplifier Signal light EDFA Fiber Transmitting end Pump light Coupler Pump light Laser Receiving end Optical receiver
Figure 9-12 Application of Raman amplifier (62COA)
The Raman amplifier inputs counter-propagating pump light to fibers for distributed Raman amplification. Counter pumping means the pump light is injected at the fiber end and the direction is opposite to the main signals. This kind of pumping results in a big phase difference between the main signals and the pump light. And the Raman pump power vibration is leveled in the reverse direction of signal transmission, thus effectively suppressing the noise created by pump.
9.4.3 Principle
The functional block diagram of the 61COA board is shown in Figure 9-13. N1COA works without fixed filter.
Optical input Optical output Fixed filter
EDFA optical module
Optics part
Pump current check
Drive module
Module Input/output temperature pow er control check
Drive and check part
A/D and D/A conversion
SCC
Control module
Data processing and communication part
Figure 9-13 Functional block diagram of 61COA and N1COA
Optics Part
It consists of EDFA to amplify the optical signal.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-19
9 Other Boards
Drive and Check Part

It provides the EDFA with driving current and detects the working status of the components of the EDFA. It predicts and processes the possible faults. It implements the functions such as detecting pump current, driving optical module controlling optical module temperature, and detecting input/output optical power.
Data Processing and Communication Part

It consists of the CPU and peripheral chips. It analyzes the measurement results of the detected circuit. Based on the analysis, it adjusts the driving circuit within the nominal range to keep the EDFA gain or power output at the nominal value level. It sorts out the abnormalities indicated by the measured value and reports to the NM. The 62COA works in the same way as the 61COA or N1COA, except that the 62COA uses Raman amplifier while the 61COA or N1COA uses EDFA amplifier.
9.4.4 Front Panel

The front panel of the 61COA or N1COA is shown in Figure 9-14.
8 9 10
11
1. ID DIP switch 5. RS232-2 9. OUT optical port
2. Running indicator 6. MONITOR-1 10. Power switch
3. Alarm indicator 4. RS232-1 7. MONITOR-2 8. IN optical port 11. 48 V power interface
Figure 9-14 Front panel of the COA or N1COA
The front panel of the 62COA is shown in Figure 9-15.
9-20
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
1. SC/PC optical interface 4. Fan board 7 RS232-2 10. Power input interface
2. E2000 optical interface 5. RJ-45 8. DIP switch (58 bits) 11. Power switch
3. Air filter 6 RS232-1 9. DIP switch (14 bits)
Figure 9-15 Front panel of the 62COA
Indicators
The indicators of the 61COA, N1COA or 62 COA are described in Table 9-11.
Table 9-11 Indicators of the 61COA, N1COA or 62COA
ALM (Red)
The ALM is constantly on and the RUN is off Flashing 3 times every other second Flashing twice every other second Flashing once every other second
Memory self-check error Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Normal (in service) Database protected mode; communication with the SCC interrupted Program startup/load
RUN (Green)
Flashing once every 2 seconds Flashing once every 4 seconds
Flashing 5 times every second
Interfaces
Optical interface There is one pair of SC/PC optical interface on the front panel of the 61COA or N1COA for inputting/outputting optical signals. The input optical interface of the 62COA is of E2000 type, and the output optical interface is of SC type. The following figure shows the flange and optical fiber connector used by the input port on the 62COA board.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-21
9 Other Boards
Figure 9-16 E2000 flange and fiber connector
Caution The E2000 fiber jumper integrates a specially designed optical cap. Do not remove this optical cap during fiber connection. Just insert the fiber connector (with the optical cap) into the E2000 flange.
RS-232-1/RS-232-2 serial port Control & communication interface. It communicates with the GSCC, reports alarms and performance events.
Note The RS-232-1 port on the COA is connected with the F&f port on the subrack through the serial control cable to realize communication with the GSCC.
When there are several COAs on the same station, the RS-232-2 port is employed. Use serial cable to connect the RS-232-2 of No. 1 COA with the RS-232-1 of No. 2 COA, and then the RS-232-2 of No. 2 COA with the RS-232-1 of No. 3 COA. The ports are all connected in this way. All the COAs communicate with the SCC unit on the subrack through the RS-232-1 port of No.1 COA.
Note To concatenate the COAs, the last four digits of the DIP switch on the panel should be switched to different IDs to identify the COAs. The maximum number of concatenated subracks of the OptiX OSN 3500 is 2.
9-22
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
MONITOR-1/MONITOR-2 interface MONITOR-1 and MONITOR-2 serve as the alarm output port when the 61COA or N1COA is used alone. The relation between the output alarm and the interface pin is illustrated in Table 9-12.
Table 9-12 Relation between output alarm and interface pin
MONITOR-1 pin number MONITOR-2 pin number Definition
1, 6 2, 7 3, 8 4, 9 5
1, 6 2, 7 3, 8 4, 9 5
EDFA's input optical power is too low Working temperature of the pump laser is over threshold Cool current of pump laser is over threshold Environment temperature is over threshold Digital ground
RJ-45 Ethernet interface Specially designed for the 62COA, the interface is used to connect a computer to load the board software. 48 V power interface It inputs the 48V power from PIU board or power box on the cabinet. The voltage range under normal working condition: 38.4 V to 57.6 V. DIP switch The DIP switch of the 61COA or N1COA is located on the lower left corner of the panel. It is used to set the ID of the 61COA or N1COA. When it is in the upper state, it is OFF. When it is in the lower state, it is ON. The SCC identifies and communicates with 61COAs or N1COAs with different IDs. The DIP switch of the 62COA is used for setting the ID of 62COA and the type of fiber. For each bit of the 8-bit DIP switch (bit 8 to bit 1 from left to right), up position means 0 and down position means 1. The bits 14 show the board ID, and indicate the ID number ranging from 20 to 35. Normally the ID number ranges from 20 to 27. The fifth bit indicates the type of fiber. "0" indicates G.652 fiber, and "1" indicates G.655 fiber.
9.4.5 Installation
The COA adopts case-shape design, not occupying any slot in the subrack. In the OptiX cabinet, a special bracket is designed to hold the 61COA or N1COA. The 62COA is installed directly in the cabinet with the mounting ears.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-23
9 Other Boards
Installation of the 61COA or N1COA

Take the 61COA for example to describe the installation. The installation of N1COA is the same as that of 61COA. The bracket is fixed on the crossbars on both sides of the cabinet. The 61COA is pushed into the brackets along the guide rail and fixed. One bracket can house two 61COAs side by side with the front panel of the 61COA facing the front side of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 9-17.
Figure 9-17 The position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet
Installation of the 62COA

The 62COA can be installed in the 300 mm or 600 mm cabinet with mounting ears and screws. If adopting upward-wiring, the 62COA is installed at the bottom of the ETSI cabinet (first and third floating nuts). If adopting downward-wiring mode, the 62COA is installed in any idle place of the 2.6 m high cabinet or in the ETSI cabinet not fully configured.
9.4.6 Version Description.

The 61COA, N1COA and 62COA are the externally installed case-shape optical amplifier. Their logic slots on the NM T2000 are slots 101~102. The 61COA, N1COA and 62COA are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The OptiX OSN 3500 and OptiX OSN 2500 can be equipped with up to two COAs, but the OptiX OSN 1500 can be equipped with only one COA.

Table 9-13 shows the technical parameters of the 61COA, N1COA and 62COA.
9-24
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
Table 9-13 Technical parameters of the 61COA, N1COA and 62COA

Parameter Description 61COA N1COA 62COA
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Processing capability Connector Operating wavelength (nm) Input optical power range (dBm) Output optical power (dBm) Pump wavelength (nm) Max, on/off gain (dB) Noise figure (dB)
240 (L) x 190 (W) x 50 (H) 3.5 10 One optical signal SC/PC 1550 NA +14/+17 NA NA NA
436 (L) x 294 (W) x 86 (H) 8 75 One optical signal SC/PC and E2000 1550.12 39 to 20 (2.5 Gbit/s signal without FEC) NA 1451.2 >15 (applied to G.652 fiber) <1.5
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-25
9 Other Boards
9.5 DCU
The DCU is the dispersion compensation board. It can compensate for the optical signal dispersion accumulated during transmission. In addition, it compresses the optical signal and works with the booster amplifier to achieve long distance optical transmission. The DCU can be seated in slots 18 and slots 1116 of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and it is only used for the 10 Gbit/s signal.
9.5.1 Functionality
Use chirp grating to compensate for the optical dispersion and compress the pulse signal for signal recovery. Make dispersion compensation to two channels of optical signals simultaneously, with the compensation being 1020 ps/nm (for dispersion generated on 60 km G.652 fiber) or 1360 ps/nm (for dispersion generated on 80 km G.652 fiber), or the free combination of the two. Work with BA and PA for long distance optical transmission.
9.5.2 Application
After long distance transmission over optical fiber, the pulse of the 10 Gbit/s signal becomes broadened due to dispersion. The signal is distorted seriously and cannot be received by the optical receiver normally. Thus, the DCU is needed for dispersion compensation. Its position in the optical transmission system is shown in Figure 9-18.
Pulse broading Long fiber Optical transmitter Pulse compressing Optical receiver
BA
PA
DCU 1550.12 nm
1550.12 nm
Figure 9-18 The position of DCU in the optical transmission system
Note The operating wavelength of the chirp grating of the DCU is 1550.12 nm, so it is required that the central wavelength of the optical signal sent from the remote optical interface board is also 1550.12 nm. Otherwise, it is impossible to make dispersion compensation to the optical signal. And insertion loss is very large and no optical signal is output.
9-26
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
9.5.3 Principle
Figure 9-19 shows the functional block diagram of the DCU.
Input IN Coupler OUT Output Long Short w avelength w avelength Chirp grating
Figure 9-19 Functional block diagram of the DCU
The 10 Gbit/s optical signal is sent into IN interface of the coupler, and then to the chirp grating through the single port of the coupler after an attenuation of 3 dB. For spectrum components with different wavelengths, the chirp grating has different reflection positions. The reflection position for short wavelength components is at the inner part of the grating, which means a longer transport distance. While that for long wavelength components is at the external part of the grating, which means a shorter transport distance. Additionally, the delay of signals with different frequencies is different. As a result, the signals reflected back by the grating is "compressed", thus achieving the compensation effect.
The signal after compensation will be returned to the coupler and then sent out from the OUT interface after an attenuation of 3 dB. These pulse-compressed optical signals can be received by receiver and transmitted for a long distance over optical fiber.
9.5.4 Front Panel

The front panel of the DCU is shown in Figure 9-20. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-27
9 Other Boards
DC U
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 DC U
Figure 9-20 Front panel of the DCU
Indicators
None
Interfaces
There are two pairs of LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the DCU for receiving and transmitting two 10 Gbit/s optical signals. Using pluggable optical module is easy for maintenance.
9-28
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards

The DCU board has two versions: N1 and N2. The N2 version DCU, as a low insertion loss DCU, brings the insertion loss 3-5 dB less than what the N1 version DCU brings.
Caution When replacing the N1 version DCU with an N2 version DCU, add an attenuator to avoid optical power overload.

The technical parameters of the DCU are shown in Table 9-14.
Table 9-14 Technical parameters of the DCU
Bit rate Processing capability Line code pattern Connector Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Central wavelength (nm) 0.5 dB bandwidth (nm) Dispersion compensation (ps/nm) Insertion loss (dB) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage
9953280 kbit/s Dispersion compensation for 2 x STM-64 optical signals NRZ LC 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.42 0 1550.12 0.05 >0.4 1020 (60 km) 1360 (80 km) N1DCU<8.3dB Humidity: 10%90% Temperature: 5C to 55C Humidity: 5%95% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100% N2DCU<3dB
Temperature: 0C to 45C
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-29
9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI
The AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI are the system auxiliary interface board, providing the system with various auxiliary interfaces, management interfaces, central backup of the +3.3 V board power supply, orderwire interface and broadcast data interface. The AUX has three versions: N1, R1 and R2. The SAP and SEI has one version Q1, the EOW has one version R1. Table 9-15 shows their slots in OptiX OSN products.
Table 9-15 Slots for the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI
Board Function Product Slot
N1AUX Q1SAP
System auxiliary interface board System auxiliary processing board The extended signal interface board, providing the system with various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces Orderwire board, providing orderwire interface and broadcast data interface
OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Slot 37 Slot 14
Q1SEI
Auxiliary interface area
R1EOW
OptiX OSN 1500
Slot 9
R1/R2AUX System auxiliary interface board
OptiX OSN 1500
Slot 10
9-30
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
9.6.1 Functionality
Board Function N1AUX R1/R2AUX R1EOW Q1SAP Q1SEI
Management interface
Provide an X.25-compliant OAM interface; Provide an F&f serial interface; Provide an ETH NM interface ; Provide an EXT interface to manage extended subracks.
Provide an X.25-compli antOAM/F& f interface; Provide an ETH NM interface.
Provide an ETH NM interface.
Provide an X.25-compliant OAM interface; Provide an F&f serial interface.
Auxiliary interface
Provide Serial 14 broadcast data interfaces; Provide F1 codirectional data interface (64 kbit/s).
Provide Serial 14 broadcast data interfaces.
Provide Serial 14 broadcast data interfaces; Provide F1 codirectional data interface (64 kbit/s). Provide two BITS clock input/output interfaces with impedance being 120 ohm. Provide two BITS clock input/output interfaces with impedance being 75 ohm.
Clock interface
Provide two BITS clock input/output interfaces with impedance being 120 ohm. Provide two BITS clock input/output interfaces with impedance being 75 ohm.
Provide two BITS clock input/output interfaces with impedance being 120 ohm.
Housekeeping alarm interface
Provide house-keeping alarm interface for 16 inputs and 4 outputs; Provide an output alarms concatenating interface for 4 output alarms.
Provide house-keepi ng alarm interface for three inputs and one output.
Support house-keeping alarm input, output, and output concatenation.
Provide house-keeping alarm interface for 8 inputs and 4 outputs; Provide an output alarms concatenating interface for 4 output alarms.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-31
9 Other Boards Board Function N1AUX R1/R2AUX R1EOW Q1SAP
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Q1SEI
Cabinet alarm indicator
Provide a four cabinet alarms output interface; Provide a four input cabinet alarms concatenating interface.
Drive and concatenate four cabinet indicator signals.
Provide a four cabinet alarms output interface; Provide a four input cabinet alarms concatenating interface. Provide one orderwire interface. Provide two off network signaling interface. Provide two off network audio interface.
Orderwire interface
Provide one orderwire interface. Provide two off network signaling interface. Provide two off network audio interface.
Provide one orderwire interface.
Commissioning interface
Provide one commissioning interface (COM). Support communication between boards on one subrack. -
Provide one commissioni ng interface (COM). Support communicati on between boards on one subrack. -
Provide one commissioning interface (COM). Support communication between boards on one subrack. Process E1, E2, F1, Serial 14 bytes.
Internal communication
Orderwire processing
Process E1, E2, Serial 14 bytes.
9-32
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Board Function N1AUX R1/R2AUX R1EOW Q1SAP
9 Other Boards Q1SEI
Power backup and detection
Provide centralized backup of +3.3 V board power (secondary power supply 1:N protection). Detect over-voltage (3.8 V) and under-voltage (3.1 V) for 3.3 V standby power supply. Detect over-voltage (3.8 V) and under-voltage (3.1 V) for 3.3 V standby power supply.
Monitor two 48 V subrack power, supply and detect over-voltage (72 V) and undervoltage. Provide centralized backup of +3.3 V board power (secondary power supply 1:N protection). Detect over-voltage (3.8 V) and under-voltage (3.1 V) for 3.3 V standby power supply.
Audio alarm
Support audio alarm and alarm cut-up.
9.6.2 Principle Of AUX

The AUX consists of communication module, interface module and power module. Figure 9-21 shows its functional block diagram.
NM interface
Auxiliary interface
Interface module
Inter-board communication interface
-48 V
Pow er module
Figure 9-21 Functional block diagram of the AUX
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-33
9 Other Boards
Provide the NM interface for active/standby SCCs, OAM interface for remote maintenance, and interfaces for inter-board communication.
Interface Module
Provide various auxiliary interfaces, such as F&f, OAM, F1 and clock input/output. The N1 AUX and R1/R2 AUX provide different auxiliary interfaces. For details, see section 9.6.1.
Power Module
Provide the AUX with working power, and other boards on the subrack with +3.3 V centralized backup power.
9.6.3 Principle of EOW

Figure 9-22 shows the functional block diagram of the EOW.
Overhead processing unit PHONE S1 S2 S3 S4 Front panel Broadcasting data interface and orderwire processing unit
SCC unit
Ringing current generating, resetting, timing unit Backplane
Figure 9-22 Functional block diagram of the EOW
The overhead processing module processes E1, E2, F1, and Serial 14 bytes. The position of each overhead byte in the SDH frame is shown in Figure 9-23.
9-34
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34

A1 B1 D1 A1 A1 A2 E1 D2 AU_PTR B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 B2 Serial 4 B2 K1 D5 D8 D11 M1 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 Serial3 A2 A2 J0 F1 D3 Serial 1 Serial2
9 Other Boards
Figure 9-23 Position of orderwire bytes in the SDH frame
9.6.4 Principle of SAP

Figure 9-24 shows the functional block diagram of the SAP.
1 orderwire phone
Overhead processing module
2 SDH NNI phones 1 F1 4 S1-S4 13 communications between boards
ETH COM
System communication module
2 NM itnerfaces 2 protocol bus 8 alarm inputs/4 alarm outputs and concatenation Cabinet indicator activating and concatenation 2 -48V power monitoring 3.3V backup power monitoring
Power monitoring module
Front panel
Backplane
Figure 9-24 Functional block diagram of the SAP
Overhead Processing Module

It processes E1, E2, F1, and Serial 14 bytes. Figure 9-23 shows the position of each orderwire byte in the SDH frame.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-35
9 Other Boards
System Communication Module

It implements communication between 13 boards and provides a bus for transmitting MSP, SNCP, TPS protection switching and clock protocol.
Power Monitoring Module

It detects two 48 V power supplies and 3.3 V backup power supply, and implements eight house-keeping alarm inputs and four house-keeping alarm outputs and their concatenation, and the drive and concatenation of four cabinet indicators.
9.6.5 Principle of SEI

Figure 9-25 shows the functional block diagram of the SEI.
Backplane Protection and filtering circuits Front panel F&f OAM F1 Series 4 Series 3 Series 2 Series 1 Clock output interface Clock input interface House-keeping alarm output Outgoing subnet voice Orderwire interface Indicator concatenation Indicator output House-keeping alarm concatenation House-keeping alarm output House-keeping alarm input
Figure 9-25 Functional block diagram of the SEI
The SEI provides a protecting and filtering circuit. The SEI accesses and sends various control and management signals to the CXL and SAP for processing.
9.6.6 Front Panel

N1AUX
There is an indicator on the N1AUX front panel to show its working status, as described in Table 9-16.
9-36
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
Table 9-16 Indicator of the AUX

STAT (red and green)
The board is in normal running status, and has no alarm. The board has hardware failure, or the orderwire phone is not hung on for a long time. The board is fed with no power.
The interfaces of the N1AUX are described in Table 9-17.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-37
9 Other Boards
Table 9-17 Interfaces of the N1AUX

Front panel Interfac e Description Interface type
CLKO1
NIAUX STAT CLKI1
75 ohm clock output interface 1 75 ohm clock output interface 2 120 ohm clock interface 1 Reserved F&f interface F1 interface Orderwire interface Off network audio interface 1 Off network audio interface 2 OAM interface Serial 1 Serial 2 Serial 3 Serial 4 75 ohm clock input interface 1 75 ohm clock input interface 2 120 ohm clock interface 2 NM interface COM commissioning interface Extended subrack interface Cabinet indicator output interface Input cabinet indicator concatenating inputting interface 14 house-keeping alarm output interface
SMB SMB RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 SMB SMB RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45
CLKO2 CLK1 REV F&f F1 PHONE V1 V2 OAM
CLKO1 CLKO2 CLK1 REV F&f F1 PHONE V1 V2 OAM S1 S2 S3 S4
CLKI2 CLK2 ETH COM EXT LAMP1 LAMP2 ALMO1 ALMO2 ALMI1 ALMI2 ALMI3 ALMI4 NIAUX
S1 S2 S3 S4 CLKI1 CLKI2 CLK2 ETH COM EXT LAMP1 LAMP2
ALMO1
RJ-45
9-38
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Front panel Interfac e Description
9 Other Boards Interface type
ALMO2 ALMI1 ALMI2 ALMI3 ALMI4
House-keeping alarm concatenating interface 14 house-keeping alarm input interface 58 house-keeping alarm input interface 912 house-keeping alarm input interface 1316 house-keeping alarm input interface
RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45
Table 9-18 Pin assignment of CLK1 and CLK2 interface

Front view Pin No. Description
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Negative receiving end Positive receiving end Ground Negative transmission end Positive data transmission end Ground Not defined.
5 6 7 and 8
Table 9-19 Pin assignment of ETH, COM, EXT and F1 interface

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Positive data transmission end Negative transmission end Positive receiving end Not defined. Not defined. Negative receiving end Not defined.
5 6 7 and 8
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-39
9 Other Boards
Table 9-20 Pin assignment of F&f interface

4 5 8 1, 2, 3, 6 and 7
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RS-232 receiving end Ground RS-232 transmission end Not defined.
Table 9-21 Pin assignment of PHONE, V1 and V2 interface

4 5 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 and 8
Signal 1 Signal 2 Not defined.
Table 9-22 Pin assignment of LAMP1 and LAMP2 interface

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
The positive of critical alarm signal The negative of critical alarm signal The positive of major alarm signal The positive of power indicator signal The negative of power indicator signal The negative of major alarm signal The positive of minor alarm signal The negative of minor alarm signal
5 6 7 8
9-40
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
Table 9-23 Pin assignment of ALMO1 and ALMO2 interface

1 2 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
The positive of critical and major alarm signal output signal The negative of critical and major alarm signal output signal The positive of minor or warning alarm signal output signal The positive of alarm 1 output signal The negative of alarm 1 output signal The negative of minor and warning alarm signal output signal The positive of alarm 2 output signal The negative of alarm 2 output signal
4 5 6 7 8
Table 9-24 Pin assignment of OAM interface

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Request to send Data terminal ready Transmit data GND GND Receive data Data set ready Ready to receive
5 6 7 8
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-41
9 Other Boards
Table 9-25 Pin assignment of S1, S2, S3 and S4 interface

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
The positive of RS-422 data transmission The negative of RS-422 data transmission The positive of RS-422 data receiving RS-232 data receiving Ground The negative of RS-422 data receiving Not defined. RS-232 data transmission
5 6 7 8
Table 9-26 Pin assignment of ALMI1 interface

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Alarm input 1 The ground of alarm input 1 Alarm input 2 Alarm input 3 The ground of alarm input 3 The ground of alarm input 2 Alarm input 4 The ground of alarm input 4
5 6 7 8
9-42
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 6 7 8
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-43
9 Other Boards

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 6 7 8
R1/R2AUX
There is no indicator on the R1/R2AUX front panel. The interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel are described in Table 9-30.
Table 9-30 Interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel
Interface Description Interface type
ETH COM CLK ALM OAM/F&f

AUX
NM interface Commissioning interface 120 ohm external clock input/output interface House-keeping alarm input/output interface(3 inputs/1 outputs) NM and management serial interface
AUX
RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45
ETH
COM
CLK
ALM
OAM/F&f
Note: For the pin assignment of CLK interface, see Table 9-31. The pin assignment of other interfaces is similar to that of the corresponding interfaces on the N1AUX.
9-44
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
Table 9-31 Pin assignment of CLK interface

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
120 ohm clock 1 negative receiving end 120 ohm clock 1 positive receiving end 120 ohm clock 2 negative receiving end 120 ohm clock 1 negative transmission end 120 ohm clock 1 positive transmission end 120 ohm clock 2 positive receiving end 120 ohm clock 2 negative transmission end 120 ohm clock 2 positive transmission end
5 6 7 8
EOW
There are two indicators on the EOW front panel as described in Table 9-32.
Table 9-32 Indicators of the EOW
STAT (red or green)
On, green On, green Off
The board works normally. The board hardware fails. The board is not powered on The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully. The board software or software for FPGA is being uploaded. The board software is being initialized, and is in BIOS boot stage. The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in initializing. No service is configured and no service alarm occurs, or no power supply.
PROG (red or green)
On, green
On for 100ms and off for 100ms alternatively, green On for 300ms and off for 300ms alternatively, green On, red
Off
The interfaces on the EOW front panel are described in Table 9-33.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-45
9 Other Boards
Table 9-33 Interfaces of the EOW

Interface Description Interface type
PHONE S1 S2 S3 S4
EOW
STAT PROG
Orderwire interface Broadcast data interface S1 Broadcast data interface S2 Broadcast data interface S3 Broadcast data interface S4
EOW
RJ-11 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45
PHONE
S1
S2
S3
S4
SAP
There are indicators on the SAP front panel. For their description, see Table 9-32. The interfaces on the SAP front panel are described in Table 9-34.
Table 9-34 Interfaces of the SAP
Interface Description
COM ETH
COM
Q1SAP
Commissioning interface NM interface

Q1SAP
STAT PROG
ETH
SEI
There is no indicator on the Q1SEI front panel. The interfaces on the SEI front panel are described in Table 9-35.
Table 9-35 Interfaces of the SEI
Interface Description Interface type Interface Description Interface type
ALMO1
4 house-keeping alarms output interface
RJ-45
ALMI1
1~4 house-keeping alarms input interface
RJ-45
9-46
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Interface Description Interface type Interface Description
9 Other Boards Interface type
ALMO2
4 house-keeping alarms concatenating input interface 4 cabinet alarm indicators output interface 4 cabinet alarm indicators concatenating input interface OAM interface F1 interface F&f interface Orderwire interface 120 ohm clock 1 120 ohm clock 2 75 ohm clock output 1 75 ohm clock input 1
RJ-45
ALMI2
5~8 house-keeping alarms input interface Serial 1
RJ-45
LAMP1
RJ-45
S1
RJ-45
LAMP2
RJ-45
S2
Serial 2
RJ-45
OAM F1 F&f PHONE CLK1 CLK2 CLKO1 CLKI1

ALMO1 ALMO2
RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 SMB SMB

CLK1 CLK2
S3 S4 V1 V2 18 20 CLKO2 CLKI2
Serial 3 Serial 4 Off network audio interface 1 Off network audio interface 2 Reserved Reserved 75 ohm clock output 2 75 ohm clock input 2
RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 SMB SMB
LAMP1
LAMP1 OAM
F1
F&f
PHONE
CLKO1 CLKO2 CLKI1 CLKI2
ALMI1
ALMI2
S1
S2
S3
S4
V1
V2
9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation

House-keeping alarm concatenation
Figure 9-26 shows the connection of alarm input and output of a single or multiple OptiX OSN 3500 subrack. Figure 9-27 shows the connection of alarm input and output of a single or multiple OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. Connect the alarm output interface to the alarm concatenation interface downstream. Make the connections one by one until the alarm output is connected to the centralized alarm system.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-47
9 Other Boards
Cabinet1 Subrack1 ALMO1 Centralized alarm system ALMO2 ALMI1 Subrack2 ALMO1 ALMO2 ALMI1 Cabinet2 Subrack3 ALMO1 ALMO2 ALMI1 Subrack4 ALMO1 ALMO2 ALMI1
Figure 9-26 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 3500)
To the centralized alarm system

ALMO1 ALMO2 ALMO1 ALMO2
Subrack 1
Subrack 3
ALMO1 ALMO2
ALMO1 ALMO2
Subrack 2
Subrack 4
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 2
Figure 9-27 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 2500)
Cabinet alarm indicator connection

The connection of the four OptiX OSN 3500 cabinet alarm indicators is shown in Figure 9-28. The connection of the four OptiX OSN 2500 cabinet alarm indicators is shown in Figure 9-29. Connect the cabinet alarm indicator signal output of subrack 2 to the concatenated cabinet alarm indicator input of subrack 1, and then connect the cabinet alarm indicator signal output of subrack 1 to the indicator interface on the top of the cabinet.
9-48
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34

4 cabinet alarm indicators
9 Other Boards
Cabinet indicator subrack 1
LAMP1 LAMP2
subrack 2 LAMP1 LAMP2
Figure 9-28 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 3500)
Cabinet indicators
LAMP1 LAMP2
Subrack 2
LAMP1 LAMP2
Subrack 1 Cabinet
Figure 9-29 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 2500)
9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper

The jumper J9 at the lower right part of the N1AUX board is used to set the OptiX OSN 3500 as the main subrack or extended subrack, as shown in Table 9-36.
Table 9-36 Jumper J9 setting
Jumper Setting Description
J9
shorted Not shorted
Set the OptiX OSN 3500 as the main subrack. Set the OptiX OSN 3500 as the extended subrack.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-49
9 Other Boards

The AUX has three versions: N1, R1 and R2. The SAP and SEI have one version Q1 and the EOW has one version R1. For the application of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI in OptiX OSN products, see Table 9-15.

Table 9-37 Technical parameters of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI
Parameter Description N1AUX R1/R2AUX EOW SAP SEI
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 44 (W) 0.96 19
111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.96 19
111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.40 10
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.71 20
290 (H) x 30 (D) x 25.4 (W) 0.91 10
9-50
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
9.7 PIU
The PIU is a power interface board. It functions power access, lightening protection and filtering. The PIU have four versions: N1, Q1, R1. The N1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and seated in slots 27 and 28. The Q1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 2500 REG and seated in slots 22 and 23. The R1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500B and seated in slots 18 and 19. The R1PIUA is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500A and seated in slots 1 and 11.
9.7.1 Functionality
Provide lightning protection function and report the lightning protection failure alarm. Enhance the electro magnetic compatibility (EMC) of the system by filtering and shielding the power supply. Report the board in position information. Support 1+1 hot backup protection. Any one PIU can provide power for the whole subrack independently. Supply the FAN board with 48 V20% power. The N1PIU provides two 50 W power interfaces for external devices such as COA and HUB. The Q1PIU and R1PIUA provide one 50 W power interface for external devices such as COA and HUB. The R1PIU does not provide external power interface. The R1PIU provides a 75 ohm clock input interface and a 75 ohm clock output interface, and protects the clock signal.
9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU

Figure 9-30 shows the functional block diagram of the N1PIU and Q1PIU.
BGND Pow er access unit Lightning protection unit and failure detection
-48V
Filter unit
Backplane
Lightning protection unit failure alarm
SCC
Figure 9-30 The principle block diagram of the PIU
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-51
9 Other Boards
Power Access Unit

The power access unit accesses the 48/60 V power for the system.
Lightning Protection Unit

The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection. The PIU will report the failure of lightning protection unit to the SCC.
Filter Unit
The filter unit uses the electromagnetic interference (EMI) filter to filter the EMI signal to guarantee the stable operation of the equipment.
9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU

Figure 9-31 shows the functional block diagram of the R1PIU.
NEG(-) NEG(-) Lightning protection unit Filter unit RTN(+)
RTN(+)
Power detection
Clock input LED indication
Clock protection
Clock output
Figure 9-31 Functional block diagram of the R1PIU
Power Access Unit

The power access unit accesses the 48/60 V power for the system.

The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection.
Filter Unit
9-52
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
Power Detection
Detect whether the input power fails and indicates the status of the input power through an indicator.
Clock Protection
Protect the input clock signal.
9.7.4 Principle of R1PIUA

Figure 9-32 shows the functional block diagram of the R1PIUA.
External power supply interface NEG(-) RTN(+) Lightning protection unit Power detectio n Filter unit NEG(-) RTN(+) Fan power unit
LED indication
Figure 9-32 Functional block diagram of the R1PIUA
Power Access Unit

The power access unit accesses the 48 V/60 V power for the system.

The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection.
Filter Unit
Power Detection
Detect whether the input power fails and indicates the status of the input power through an indicator.
Fan Power Unit

Provide the fan with regulated power supply.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-53
9 Other Boards
External power interface unit

Provide external equipment (COA) with 48 V power. The power interface is on the front panel.
9.7.5 Front Panel

N1PIU
The N1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-33.
NIPIU
PWR
PS1
PS2
NIPIU
Figure 9-33 Front panel of the N1PIU
There are power interfaces on the N1PIU front panel, as described in Table 9-38.
Table 9-38 Interfaces on the N1PIU front panel
PWR PS1/PS2
48 V power access interface 50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB
Q1PIU
The Q1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-34.
9-54
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
PIU PWS
RTN(+) PWR NEG(-)
Figure 9-34 Front panel of the Q1PIU
There are power interfaces on the Q1PIU front panel, as described in Table 9-39.
Table 9-39 Interfaces of the Q1PIU
PWR PWS
48 V power access interface 48 V (50 W) power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB
R1PIU
The R1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-35.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-55
9 Other Boards
PIU
Figure 9-35 Front panel of the R1PIU
There is an indicator on the R1PIU front panel as described in Table 9-40.

Table 9-40 Indicator of the R1PIU
Power indicator (POWER)
There are interfaces on the R1PIU front panel as described in Table 9-41.
Table 9-41 Interfaces of the R1PIU
PWR PWS CLK IN CLK OUT
O I POWER NEG (-) RT N(+ ) CL K O UT
PIU
PW R CL K IN
PW S
On, green Off
Power input is normal. No power input or power failure
48 V power input interface 48 V (50 W) power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB 75 ohm clock input interface (SMB) 75 ohm clock output interface (SMB)
R1PIUA
The R1PIUA front panel is shown in Figure 9-36. Please refer to the board in the work field.
9-56
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
P IUA
POWER
Figure 9-36 Front panel of the R1PIUA
The indicator on the R1PIUA front panel is the same as that on the R1PIU. Refer to Table 9-40. There are two interfaces and one switch on the R1PIUA front panel, as described in Table 9-42.
Table 9-42 Indicators and the switch on the R1PIUA front panel
PWR PWS Power switch

The NIPIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and seated in slots 27 and 28. The Q1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 2500 REG, and seated in slots 22 and 23. The R1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500B and seated in slots 18 and 19. The R1PIUA is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500A and seated in slots 1 and 11.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
PW S I O NEG (-) RT N(+ )
P IUA
48 V power input interface 50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB. Switch on the power by pushing the switch to the ON (1) position. Switch off the power by pushing the switch to the OFF (0) position.
9-57
9 Other Boards

Table 9-43 Technical parameters of the PIU
Parameter Description N1PIU Q1PIU R1PIU R1PIUA
Input voltage Protection tube F7
38.4 V to 72 V Main loop: 250 V-20 A-0.00355 ohm 262.05 x 110 x 44 1.15 8
38.4 V to 72 V Main loop: 250V-20A-0.00 355 ohm 220 x 74 x 44 1.25 8
38.4 V to 72 V Main loop: 250V-10A-0.006 ohm 108 x 110 x 41.5 1.25 1.5
38.4 V to 72 V Main loop: 250V-10A-0.00 6 ohm 111.8 x 220 x 25.4 1.5 3
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
9.8 UPM
The uninterruptible power module (UPM), numbered GIE4805S, is a special power supply system. It can convert 110 V/220 V AC power supply directly to 48 V DC needed by transmission equipment, such as OptiX OSN 2500/1500. It is suitable for telecom carriers who do not have 48 V DC power supply equipment or who require storage batteries. The UPM power supply system consists of a power box (from 110 V/220 V to 48 V) and storage batteries. The output power of each UPM is 2 x 270 W. The power box is 1U high and can be installed directly in the 19-inch or ETSI cabinet. The appearance of the power box is shown in Figure 9-37.
9-58
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
8 E4 GI
S 05
Figure 9-37 Appearance of the power box
Note The UPM is displayed as a CAU board on the T2000. You can operate the CAU to manage and maintain the UPM power system.
The UPM power supply system can be protected by the storage battery. When the mains 110V/220V AC supply is interrupted, the battery module can supply power for nearly 4 hours. Only one power box is needed to connect to storage batteries when used with OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN 1500. For more detailed information, refer to OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Manual.
9.8.1 Functionality
The OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN 1500 needs to be configured with two power boxes and four 12 V-40 Ah storage batteries. If the equipment does not need storage battery, one power box is all right. Each power box is configured with two rectifier modules and one monitoring module (standard configuration).
Hot Backup
The power conversion part of the UPM power supply system adopts two AC/DC rectifier modules for hot backup, and the rectifier module can balance load during working. If one rectifier module fails, the other will take over all load immediately, not affecting the service on the equipment and thus enhancing the stability of the system.
Hot-Swap
In the UPM power supply system, the AC/DC rectifier module is hot-swappable. When the faulty rectifier module is replaced, the other one is still working normally.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-59
9 Other Boards
Storage Battery Protection

The UPM power supply system can be protected by the storage battery. When the mains supply is interrupted, the UPM power system can switch automatically to the storage battery, ensuring normal operation of the equipment. The battery module can provide 40 Ah capacities.
Monitoring Function
The UPM power supply system integrates module monitoring and NM monitoring functions. The monitoring module can monitor and control the rectifier module, the parameters and status of AC/DC and the battery group in real time and report them to the transmission NM. The battery can achieve floating charge and current limitation management.
Loading Capacity
The load bearing capability of each rectifier module is designed to be 270 W.
9.8.2 Principle
The UPM power supply system is supplied by one 220 V AC mains power. The input AC power is rectified into 48 V DC voltages by the rectifier module to provide two DC branches and one battery branch to the users. Under normal conditions, the rectifier module, storage battery loop and load loop work according to pre-defined parameters or user settings and they are under control of the monitoring module. The monitoring module monitors various statuses and data. In case of mains supply failure, the equipment will be supplied by storage batteries connected to the UPM power supply system. The batteries must be connected to the UPM power supply system before mains supply failure happens. When batteries start to discharge due to mains supply failure, the monitoring unit will report the alarm of no mains supply. With the discharge of batteries, battery voltage starts to drop. When battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring unit will report the alarm of DC under-voltage. When battery voltage reaches 43 V termination voltages, batteries will initiate power disconnection protection to cut connection of batteries with equipment to achieve automatic protection of batteries. When mains supply is recovered, the UPM power supply system resumes normal operation.
9.8.3 Front Panel

The rear view of the power box is either of the two views shown in Figure 9-38 and Figure 9-39.
9-60
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34

4
BAT BATBAT+ 48V+ 48VLOAD1 LOAD2
9 Other Boards
! CAUTION
DO NOT INVERT POLARITY

5
AC100~240 ALM Vout ALM Vout RUN
6
ALM
RS232
1. AC input 5. Load
2. Rectifier module/air outlet 6. Load
3. Communication interface
4. Battery interface
Figure 9-38 Rear view of the power box
3
AC100~240 ALM Vout ALM Vout RS232 RUN ALM
1. AC input 5. Load
2. Rectifier module/air outlet 6. Load
3. Communication interface
4. Battery interface
Figure 9-39 Rear view of the power box
Indicators
There are two indicators (ALM and Vout) on the left side of the front panel of each rectifier module and two indicators (ALM and RUN) on the front panel of the monitoring module. When the power box works normally, the Vout indicators of the two rectifier modules are on (green) and the RUN indicator of the monitoring board is flashing (green).
Table 9-44 Indicators of the power box
Module Indicator Status Description
Rectifier module
ALM Vout
On (red) On (green)
The rectifier module is faulty. The output of the rectifier is normal.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-61
9 Other Boards
Monitoring module
RUN ALM
Flashing (green) On (red)
The power system is normal. The power system is faulty.
Interfaces
The interfaces of the power box are described in Table 9-45.
Table 9-45 Interfaces on the power box front panel
AC100240 Red on/off button
It is an AC mains input socket for accessing 110 V/220 V AC power. It is at the upper right corner of the front panel of the rectifier module. You can enable/disable the rectifier module by pressing the button. Through this interface the UPM power supply system can communication with the SCC board of OptiX OSN products to report alarms and realize remote control. (The RS-232 serial port of one power box is connected to the F&f interface of OptiX OSN products, the RS-232 serial port of the other power box is connected to the ALM1 interface of the OptiX OSN products.) There are three power output interfaces on the right of the power box. The one above is battery interface, through which the power box connects to the battery input socket at the back of the storage battery box with battery cable. The two interfaces below are load interface. They can supply power to OptiX OSN products through power cable.
RS-232 communication interface
Power output interface
The serial pins definition of RS2332 is: 2 pin is data receive pin, 3 pin is data transmit data pin, 5 pin is public ground pin. The definition of the other pins is shown in Table 9-46.
Table 9-46 Definition of the other pins Faulty alarm of rectifier module Normal of rectifier module Power-off alarm of AC input Normal of AC input Less voltage alarm of battery discharge 8 pin-9 pin 8 pin-9 pin 8 pin-7 pin 8 pin-7 pin 8 pin-6 pin Connection Cut down Connection Cut down Connection
9-62
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
No alarm of power discharge
8 pin-6 pin
Cut down
9.8.4 Precautions
The battery input interface and load input interface shall not be mixed. Otherwise the UPM power supply system cannot work normally. When load is added with power on, the strict tool and personal insulation measures must be taken to avoid accidents during operation.

Table 9-47 shows the technical parameters of the UPM.
Table 9-47 Technical parameters of the UPM
AC input voltage range AC input Rated input current Output nominal voltage Rated output current Number of backup battery groups Charging current of backup battery Backup battery fuse Storage battery: DC under-current point Storage battery: termination voltage point Storage battery: floating charge voltage Regulated voltage precision Non-balance of load sharing Rated efficiency of integrated equipment
90 V264 V AC One channel of monophase three-wire AC power: 47 Hz63 Hz 3.5 A 54.0 V0.5 V 8 A (two user load branches with each current not more than 5 A) 1 group (40 Ah) 3 A 10 A 460.5 V 43.50.5 V 54.00.5V 1% 5% (50%100% load) 80%
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-63
Peak stray noise voltage Voltage drop in the power panel (20) Network adjustment rate Dimensions of a power box Dimensions of a storage battery
200 mV 500 mV 0.1% 438 mm x 240 mm x 44 mm 197 mm x 165 mm x 170 mm
9.9 FAN/FANA
The OptiX OSN equipment uses the modularized fan, as shown in Figure 9-40. The FAN is a fan control board, responsible for fan speed adjustment, fan failure detection and failure report, as well as report of the fan not-in-position alarm. The fan has two versions N1 and R1. The N1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and OptiX OSN 2500, and the R1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500. The N1FANA is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500. The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack uses three fan boxes. The OptiX OSN 2500 subrack uses two fan tray assemblies. The OptiX OSN 1500 subrack uses one fan tray assembly.
Figure 9-40 Appearance of the FAN (OptiX OSN 3500)
9.9.1 Functionality
The fan boxes support hot swapping. Power supplies for N1 fan boxes are for mutual backup.
9-64
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
Provide intelligent fan speed adjustment, which is reflected in the following aspects: Adjust the fan speed automatically When one fan goes faulty, others operate at their full speeds When the speed-adjusting signal is not normal, control the fans to operate at their full speeds. Detect fan failure. Reports alarms and online information of fans. Provide an indicator on front panel to indicate the running status.
9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN and N1FANA

Figure 9-41 shows the functional block diagram of the N1FAN and N1FANA.
Status signal Speed adjusting signal Status ouput Alarm output External pow er ground 1 Pow er supply Pow er ground External pow er supply 1 External pow er ground 1 Fan pow er board External pow er supply 2 External pow er ground 2 FAN Pow er supply
Fan
Figure 9-41 Functional block diagram of the N1FAN and N1FANA
Fan Power Board

The FAN provides the fans with drive voltage.
Fan Control Board

The value of the drive voltage is controlled by the fan speed-adjusting signal for different rotating speeds. The fan control board also detects the failure of the fans, fan power board and itself. At fault occurrence, it will report alarm to the SCC for sending command to make the other two fans operate at their full speeds. The FAN also receives the turn-off command in case of low temperature and turn off the fans. The following items involves in the detection by the fan control board: failure of the fan power board, fault of the speed-adjusting signal, fan failure, and fan in-position.
9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN

Figure 9-42 shows the functional block diagram of the R1FAN.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-65
9 Other Boards
48 V 1 48 V 2 GND1 GND2 GND Power access unit Delay start unit GND Fan 48 V
48 V
48 V
Figure 9-42 Functional block diagram of the R1FAN
GND
Fan alarm signals Voltage drop unit Status detection unit
48 V
GND
Power Access Unit

Provide 48 V power for the FAN.
Status Detection Unit

Detect the status of the FAN. It reports the fan failure to the CXL and drive the corresponding alarm indicator when any of the six fans stops.
9.9.4 Front Panel

N1FAN/N1FANA
There is an indicator on the front panel of the FAN to show its working status, as described in Table 9-48. Please refer to the board in the fieldwork.
Table 9-48 Indicator of the N1FAN
Indicator Color Description
STATE (red, yellow and green)
On, green On, red On, yellow
The fan operates normally. The fan, fan power board or fan control board is abnormal. The fan is turned off due to low temperature.
R1FAN
The R1FAN front panel is shown in Figure 9-43.
9-66
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9 Other Boards
FAN
RUN ALM
Figure 9-43 Front panel of the R1FAN
The indicators on the R1FAN front panel are described in Table 9-49.
Table 9-49 Indicators of the R1FAN
Indicator Color Description
RUN
On, green Off, green
The board operates normally. The board is not powered. A fan stops. The fans operate normally.
ALM
On, red Off, red

The FAN has two versions: N1 and R1. The N1FANA is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500. The N1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and OptiX OSN 2500, and the R1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
9-67
9 Other Boards

Table 9-50 Technical parameters of the FAN
Parameter Description N1FAN R1FAN
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Power consumption (W) (Note) Working voltage Long-term operating condition Short-term operating condition Environment for storage Environment for transportation
50.8 x 120 x 120 1.50 16 (the input voltage is 48 V) 48 V20% DC Temperature: 0C to 45C Humidity: 10%90% Temperature: 5C to 55C Humidity: 5%95% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100% Temperature: 40C to 70C Humidity: 10%100%
120 x 25.4 x 220 1.01 20 (the input voltage is 48 V)
Note: The value is the power consumption for each fan frame.
9-68
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
10
Fiber jumper Power cable and grounding cable Alarm cable Management cable Clock cable Signal cable
Cables
This chapter describes the cables in the following aspects: cable classification, cable structure, connector, and pin assignment. Cables used by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500REG and OptiX OSN 1500 include:
10.1 Fiber Jumper

10.1.1 Classification
The fiber jumpers used by the OptiX OSN 3500 are classified as shown in Table 10-1.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-1
10 Cables
Table 10-1 Classification of fiber jumper

Usage Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable Length
Optical fiber connecting OSN equipment to the ODF or other equipment
LC/PC
FC/PC
2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi mode optical fiber
6 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m, 80 m 1.5 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m 6 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m
LC/PC
SC/PC
2 mm single-mode optical fiber 2 mm multi-mode optical fiber
SC/PC
SC/PC
3 mm single-mode optical fiber 2 mm single-mode optical fiber 2 mm multi-mode optical fiber
Optical fiber connecting OSN equipments
LC/PC
LC/PC
LC/PC LC/PC
FC/PC SC/PC
2 mm SLM optical fiber 2 mm single-mode optical fiber
Select fiber connector and fiber length according to the on-site survey. The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 uses LC/PC fiber connector (SC/PC for the N2OU08 board). The "IN" interface on the externally-installed 62COA uses E2000/APC connector. The "IN" interface on the externally-installed 61COA uses SC/PC connector.
Caution Multi-transverse mode optical transmitting module needs to be connected to multi-mode fiber; the single-longitudinal mode or multi-longitudinal mode optical transmitting module needs to be connected to single-mode fiber.
10-2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
10.1.2 Connector
Most optical interfaces on the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 board front panel are of LC/PC type, as shown in Figure 10-1. The N2OU08 board provides SC/PC optical interface. The "IN interface of the externally-installed 62COA uses E2000/APC connector, as shown in Figure 10-4. On the client-side ODF, the FC/PC or SC/PC optical interface is used. The matched FC/PC and SC/PC connectors are shown in Figure 10-3 and Figure 10-2 respectively. The four types of connector are described in Table 10-2.
Table 10-2 Classification of fiber connector
Internal fiber connector Description
LC/PC E2000/APC FC/PC SC/PC
Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished Connector with dust-proof cover/protruding polished (8) Round fiber connector/protruding polished Square fiber connector/protruding polished
LC/PC Optical Interface

The appearance of the LC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1 LC/PC optical interface
The plugging/unplugging of LC/PC optical interface only needs axial operation instead of rotation. When inserting the fiber jumper with LC/PC connector, be careful to align the head of the fiber jumper with the optical interface on the optical board and push in the fiber with proper strength. When pulling it out, press the clip first, then push fiber connector inward slightly, and then pull out the connector.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-3
10 Cables
SC/PC Optical Interface

The appearance of the SC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-2.
Figure 10-2 SC/PC Optical interface
FC/PC Optical Interface

The appearance of the FC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-3.
Figure 10-3 FC/PC optical interface
E2000/APC Optical Interface

The appearance of the E2000/APC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-4.
10-4
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Figure 10-4 E2000/APC optical interface
10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables are listed in Table 10-3.
Table 10-3 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables
Cabinet 48V/BGND/PGND power cable Cabinet door grounding cable Subrack power cable
Cabinet 48V/BGND/PGND power cable Cabinet door grounding cable Subrack power cable
Cabinet 48V/BGND/PGND power cable Equipment 48 V/-60 V power cable/PGND power cable UPM power cable
HUB/COA power cable -
HUB/COA power cable UPM power cable
10.2.1 Cabinet 48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable

48 V, BGND and PGND power cables are used for supplying power to the equipment in the cabinet. One end of the power cable connects to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the equipment room, and the other end connects to the power distribution unit at the cabinet top.
Structure
The structure of the 48 V cabinet power cable/BGND power cable is shown in Figure 10-5. The PGND power cable is shown in Figure 10-6 and Figure 10-7.The types of naked connector in Figure 10-6 and Figure 10-7 are different from each other.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-5
10 Cables
1 2
3
1. Cord end terminal 2. Naked connector-OT type 3. Cable tie
Figure 10-5 48 V cabinet power cable/cabinet BGND power cable
1. Naked connector-OT type 4. Heat-shrink tube 7. Heat-shrink tube
2. Cable tie 5. Main tag
3. Naked connector(JG2) 6. Wire
Figure 10-6 Cabinet PGND power cable
1. Naked connector-OT type 4. Heat-shrink tube 7. Heat-shrink tube
2. Cable tie 5. Main tag
3. Naked connector(OT type) 6. Wire
Figure 10-7 Cabinet PGND power cable
10-6
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Pin Assignment
None
Technical Parameters
Item Description
48 V cabinet power cable
Connector 2 Connector 1 Cable type
Naked crimping terminal-OT type-16 mm2-M8-tin plating-naked ring terminal Single cord end terminal-16 mm2-length 24 mm-inserted 12 mm deep-80A-green Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-round and bllue-85A Naked crimping terminal-OT type-16 mm2-M8-tin plating-naked ring terminal Single cord end terminal-16 mm2-24 mm-inserted 12 mm deep-80A-green Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-round and black-85A Naked crimping terminal-OT type-16 mm2-M8-tin plating-naked ring terminal Naked crimping connector-JG2-16 mm2-M6-95A-tin plating, or Naked crimping connector-JG2-16 mm2-M8-95A-tin plating, or Naked crimping terminal-OT type-16 mm2-M8-tin plating-naked ring terminal
Cabinet BGND grounding cable
Connector 2 Connector 1 Cable type
Cabinet PGND grounding cable
Connector 1 Connector 3
Cable type Fireproof level Length
Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-yellow and green-85A CM 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable

The cabinet door grounding cable grounds the front door, rear door and side panels. This cable is installed before delivery.
Structure
The structure of the cabinet door grounding cable is shown in Figure 10-8.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-7
10 Cables
1. Naked connector--OT type
2. Heat-shrink tube
3. Main tag
Figure 10-8 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable
Pin Assignment
None
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Cable Model Fireproof level Length
Naked crimping terminal-OT-6mm2-M6-tin plating-insulated ring terminal-12~10AWG Wire-600 V-UL1015-10AWG-50A-yellow and green CM 0.35 m
10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable

The subrack power cable connects the power distribution unit at the cabinet top and the PIU board on the subrack, leading the 48 V power supply from the top of the cabinet to subrack. This cable is installed before delivery.
Structure
The structure of the subrack power cable is shown in Figure 10-9.
1. Cable connector
2. Main tag
3. Cable tie
4. Tag
5. Cord end terminal
Figure 10-9 Structure of the subrack power cable
10-8
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the subrack power cable is shown in Table 10-4.
Table 10-4 Pin assignment of subrack power cable
Cable connector Naked connector Relation Core color
X1.A1 X1.A3
X2 X3
A1 connects to X2 A3 connects to X3
Blue (48 V power) Black (power ground)
Item Parameter
Cable connector X1 Naked connector X2/X3 Cable Model Number of cores Fireproof level Color Length
Cable connector-D type-3PIN-female Single cord end terminal-4 mm2-20A-insertion depth 10mm-gray Power cable-600 V-0 mm2-12AWG-balck (the core is blue and black)-41A 2 CM Blue or black 2.5 m, 3 m, 3.5 m
10.2.4 Equipment 48 V/60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable

The 48 V/60 V power cable and grounding cable connects 48 V/60 V power supply to the PIU board of the OptiX OSN 1500 to access 48 V/60 V power to the equipment.
Structure
The structure of the 48 V/60 V power cable is shown in Figure 10-10 and that of the PGND grounding cable is shown in Figure 10-11.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-9
10 Cables
A3 A A2 A1
Figure 10-10 Structure of the 48 V/60 V power cable
1. Naked connector-OT type 5. Main tag
2. Cable tie 6. Wire
3. Naked connector 7. Heat-shrink tube
4. Heat-shrink tube
Figure 10-11 Structure of the PGND power cable
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the 48 V/60 V power cable is shown in Table 10-5.
Table 10-5 Pin assignment of the 48 V/60 V power cable
Cable connector Cable Core color
A1 A3
W1 W2
Blue (48 V/60 power) Black (power ground)
10-10
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
48 V/60 V power cable PGND grounding cable
Cable connector
Cable connector-D type-3PIN-female
Naked connector-OT-6mm2-M4-tin plating-round insulated conennctor-12 to 10AWG Naked connector-OT-6mm2-M8-tin plating-round insulated conennctor-12 to 10AWG
Cable
Model Number of cores Fireproof level Color Length
Wire-300 V-16AWG-black(the core is blue and black)-13A 2 CM Blue and black 15 m, 30 m
Wire-600 V-10AWG-yellow/green-50A 1 CM Yellow and green 15 m, 30 m
10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500 PIU board can supply power to external equipment (such as COA or HUB). The HUB/COA power cable connects power port on the PIU and the power port of external equipment. Both ends of the HUB/COA power cable use 4PIN connector, with one end connected to the PIU board and the other end to the power port of external equipment (HUB or COA).
Structure
The structure of the HUB/COA power cable is shown in Figure 10-12.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-11
10 Cables
1 A-A
3 1

3 W1 X1 A 2 W2 X2 W1.1 W1 B W2 W2.2 W1.2 W2.1 X3 X3
4 2
1. Common connector-female A-A. Sectional view in A direction
2. Plug-4PIN
3. Main tag
Figure 10-12 Structure of the HUB/COA power cable
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the HUB/COA power cable is shown in Table 10-6.
Table 10-6 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable
Connector X1, X2 Cable W1, W2 Color Connector X3
X1.1 X2.1 X1.3 X2.3
W1.1 W2.1 W1.2 W2.2
Brown
X3.1
Black
X3.3
Item Description
Connector X3 Connector X1/X2 W1/W2 cable model Number of cores Fireproof level Color
Common plug-4 PIN-double rows/4.20 mm Common terminal-female-4PIN-18/26AWG-13.7 mm in length Twisted pair-UL2464-0.64mm-22AWG-1 pair-black 2 CM Black
10-12
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Length
1.8 m
10.2.6 UPM Power Cable

Structure
The structure of the power cable connecting UPM to the OptiX OSN 2500/1500 is shown in Figure 10-13.
A A1 A2 A3 B A B 1 2
X1
X2
Figure 10-13 Structure of the subrack power cable
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the UPM power cable is shown in Table 10-7.
Table 10-7 Pin assignment of the UPM power cable
Cable connector X1 Cable Cable connector X2 Core color
A1 A3
W1 W2
1 2
Blue (48 V/60 V power) Black (power ground)
Item Parameter
Cable connector X1 Common connector X2 Cable Model Number of cores Fireproof level
Cable connector-D-spin-female (2 female, 1 male) Common terminal-2PIN-single row Power cable-300 V-1.31 mm2-16AWG-black (the core is blue and black)-13A 2 CM
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-13
10 Cables Item Parameter
Color Length
The color of the core is blue or black 2.5 m
10.3 Alarm Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cables are listed in:
Table 10-8 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cable
Cabinet indicator cable Indicator/Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack Housekeeping alarm input/output cable
Cabinet indicator cable Indicator/Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack Housekeeping alarm input/output cable
Housekeeping alarm input/output cable
10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable

The cabinet indicator cable is used to connect the AUX board on the subrack to the cabinet indicator, leading out the indicator signal from the AUX to the cabinet indicator.
Structure
The structure of the cabinet indicator is shown in Figure 10-14.
X2
X3 X1 X4
X5
A-A. Sectional view in A direction
B-B. Sectional view in B direction
Figure 10-14 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable
10-14
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable is shown in Table 10-9.
Table 10-9 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable
Connector X1 Connector X2,/X3/ X4/ X5 Relationship Function Label print
X1.4 X1.5 X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8
X2.2 X2.1 X3.2 X3.1 X4.2 X4.1 X5.2 X5.1
Pair
Critical alarm Ground
Green
Pair
Major alarm ground
Red
Pair
Power indicator ground
Orange
Pair
Minor alarm Ground
Yellow
Item Description
Connector X1 Connector X2/X3/X4/X5 Cable model Number of cores Fireproof level Core diameter Length
Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector Common connector -2PIN-single row/2.5 mm Twisted pair cable-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U 8 CM 0.5 mm 2.5 m, 3 m, 3.5 m
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-15
10 Cables
10.3.2 Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks

The indicator/alarm concatenating cables between subracks respectively concatenates indicator and alarm signals of the OSN subracks in one cabinet or different cabinet. Both ends of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, with one end connected to LAMP1 or ALMO2 interface of one subrack and the other end to LAMP2 or ALMO1 interface of another subrack.
Structure
The structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks is shown in Figure 10-15. 2
1. Network port connector RJ-45
2. Main tag
Figure 10-15 Structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks is shown in Table 10-10.
Table 10-10 Pin assignment of indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship Alarm output Indicator function
X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8
X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8
Pair
EMERGENCY ALARM + EMERGENCY ALARM -
YALMP YALMN GRUNP GRUNN RALMP RALMN WALMP WALMN
Pair
MAIN ALARM + MAIN ALARM -
Pair
AUXILIARY ALARM 1+ AUXILIARY ALARM 1-
Pair
AUXILIARY ALARM 2+ AUXILIARY ALARM 2-
10-16
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Cable model Number of cores Fireproof level Core diameter Length
Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U 8 CM 0.5 mm 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m
10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack
The alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack is used to concatenate the signals output/input from/to the OptiX OSN equipment and non OSN series transmission equipment (such as OptiX 2500+, etc) of Huawei. One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to ALMO1 or ALMO2 interface of the subrack and the other end to the alarm concatenating interface of other equipment.
Structure
The structure of the alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack is shown in Figure 10-16.
1. Network port connector - RJ45 L: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m
2. Main tag
3. Tag 1
4. Cable connector-D type 9 PINs-female
Figure 10-16 Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-17
10 Cables
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack is shown in Table 10-11.
Table 10-11 Pin assignment of alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship Relationship
X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6
X2.7 X2.3 X2.6 X2.1
Pair
EMERGENCY ALARM + EMERGENCY ALARM -
Pair
MAIN ALARM + MAIN ALARM -
Item Description
Connector X1 ConnectorX2 Cable model Number of cores Fireproof level Core diameter Length
Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector Cable connector-D type-9PIN-female Twisted pair-100 ohm-SEYVP-0.48 mm-26AWG-4 cores-BLACK 4 CM 0.5 mm 5 m, 10 m, 20 m
10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output Cable

The housekeeping alarm input cable inputs the alarm signal of the external equipment into the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 and the output cable outputs the alarm signal of the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 to the centralized alarm monitoring equipment. One end of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable connects to the housekeeping alarm input/output interface through an RJ-45 connector and the other end connects to the external equipment or the centralized alarm monitoring equipment. Make the connector following the on-site requirements. Each cable can provide 4 channels transmission for housekeeping alarm.
10-18
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Structure
The structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable is shown in Figure 10-17.
2. Main tag
Figure 10-17 Structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable
Pin Assignment
OptiX OSN 3500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for 16 inputs and 4 outputs. OptiX OSN 2500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for 8 inputs and 4 outputs. OptiX OSN 1500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for three inputs and one output. So the pin assignment of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 3500/2500 is shown in Table 10-12 and that for OptiX OSN 1500 is shown in Table 10-13.
Table 10-12 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 3500/2500
Connector X1 Color Relationship Alarm output Alarm input
X1.1
Blue
Pair
CRITICAL AND MAJOR ALARM SIGNAL + CRITICAL AND MAJOR ALARM SIGNAL -
SW_INPUT 1+
X1.2
White
SW_INPUT 1-
X1.3
Orange
Pair
MINOR OR WARNING ALARM SIGNAL +
SW_INPUT 2+
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-19
10 Cables Connector X1 Color Relationship Alarm output
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Alarm input
X1.6
White
MINOR OR WARNING ALARM SIGNAL Pair AUXILIARY ALARM 1+ AUXILIARY ALARM 1Pair AUXILIARY ALARM 2+ AUXILIARY ALARM 2-
SW_INPUT 2-
X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8
Green White Brown White
SW_INPUT 3+ SW_INPUT 3SW_INPUT 4+ SW_INPUT 4-
Table 10-13 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 1500
Connector X1 Color Relationship Alarm output Alarm input
X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8
Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White
Pair
SW_INPUT 1+ SW_INPUT 1SW_INPUT 2+ SW_INPUT 2SW_INPUT 3+ SW_INPUT 3-
Pair
Pair
Pair
SW_OUT1+ SW_OUT1-
Item Description
ConnectorX1 Cable model
Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector OptiX OSN 3500/2500: Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U OptiX OSN 1500: Twisted pair-10015 ohm-shielded CAT5E SFTP-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE445U
10-20
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Number of cores Fireproof level Core diameter Length
8 CM OptiX OSN 3500/2500: 0.5 mm OptiX OSN 1500: 0mm 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
10.4 Management Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables are listed in Table 10-14.
Table 10-14 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables
OAM serial port cable Serial14/F&f serial port cable RS-232/422 serial port cable Ordinary telephone wire COA concatenating cable Straight through cable Crossover cable
10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable

The OAM serial port cable is used for management and remote maintenance of the OptiX OSN 3500. One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to the OAM interface. The other end uses DB25 connector, connected to the laptop computer, serial NM or modem.
Structure
The structure of the OAM serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-18
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-21
10 Cables
1. Network port connector RJ-45 A-A. Sectional view in A direction B-B. Sectional view in B direction
2. Main tag
3. Cable connector-DB25 male
Figure 10-18 Structure of the OAM serial port cable
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable is shown in Table 10-15.
Table 10-15 Pin assignment of OAM serial port cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship Function
X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.4 X1.5
X2.20 X2.2 X2.3 X2.7
Single Single Single Pair
DTR (Data Terminal Ready) TD (Transmit Data) RD (Receive Data) SG (Signaling Ground)
Item Description
Connector X1 ConnectorX2 Cable model Number of cores Fireproof level Length
Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector Cable connector-D type-25PIN-male Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U 8 CM 5m
10-22
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
10.4.2 Serial 14/F&f Cable

The serial 1~4/F&f cable is used for: transparent transmission of environment detection data signal management of external devices like COA management of the UPM One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to serial 14 interfaces or F&f serial interface, and the other end uses DB9 connector, connected to external detection equipment or external equipment.
Structure
The structure of the Serial 1S4/F&f cable is shown in Figure 10-19.
1. Network port connector RJ-45 A-A. Sectional view in A direction B-B. Sectional view in B direction
2. Main tag
Figure 10-19 Structure of the serial 14/F&f cable
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the Serial 14/F&f cable is shown in Table 10-16.
Table 10-16 Pin assignment of the serial 14/F&f cable
X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.4 X1.8
X2.8 X2.9 X2.6 X2.7 X2.3 X2.2
Pair
RS-422TX + RS-422TX -
Pair
RS-422RX + RS-422RX -
Pair
RS-232RX RS-232TX
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-23
10 Cables Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Function
X1.5
X2.5
Single
SG
Item Description
Connector X1 ConnectorX2 Cable model
Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector Cable connector-D type-9PIN-male (1) Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U (2) Twisted pair-100 ohm-SEYVP-0.48 mm-26AWG-8 cores-black 8 CM Cable (2) is 3 m and cable (1) is 15 m
Number of cores Fireproof level Length
10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable

The RS-232/422 serial port cable is used to transmission management signaling between different subnets. Both ends use RJ45 connector. One end is connected to the RS-232/422 serial port, and the other end to the RS-232/422 serial port of other NE.
Structure
The structure of the RS232/422 serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-20.
1. Network port connector RJ-45 A-A. Sectional view in A direction
2. Main tag
Figure 10-20 Structure of the RS-232/422 serial port cable
10-24
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the RS232/422 serial port cable is shown in Table 10-17.
Table 10-17 Pin assignment of the RS-232/422 serial port cable
X1.3 X1.6 X1.1 X1.2 X1.5 X1.4 X1.8
X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.5 X2.8 X2.4
Pair
RX + RX -
Pair
TX + TX -
Pair
SG 232RX
Single
232TX
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Model Number of cores Fireproof level Length
Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U 8 CM 15 m
10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire

The telephone wire is used to connect the orderwire phone. Both ends use RJ-11 connector. One end is connected to the PHONE interface and the other end to the interface of the orderwire phone.
Structure
The structure of the ordinary telephone wire is shown in Figure 10-21.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-25
10 Cables
1. Phone connector-RJ-11crystal plug
2. Main tag
Figure 10-21 Structure of ordinary telephone wire
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the ordinary telephone wire is shown in Table 10-18.
Table 10-18 Pin assignment of ordinary telephone wire
Connector X1 Connector X2 Function
X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.6
X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.6
No connected No connected TIP RING No connected No connected
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Cable model Number of cores Fireproof level Length
Network interface connector-6PIN-26 to 28AWG Power cable-150 V-UL20251-0.08 mm2-28AWG-black-1A-2-core telephone wire 2 CM 15 m
10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable

When multiple COAs are installed in the cabinet, the RS-232/422 serial port is required to concatenate them. Both ends of the cable use DB9 connector, connected to the RS232-1 serial port of one COA and the RS232-2 serial port of another COA.
10-26
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Structure
The structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-22.
2. Main tag
Figure 10-22 Structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable is shown in Table 10-19.
Table 10-19 pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Remark
3 2 5
2 3 5
A pair
Grounding
Item Description
Cable connector-D type-9PIN-male Twisted pair-100 ohm-UL2464-0.32 mm-28AWG-2P-grey 2 pairs CM 0.6 m, 2.5 m
10.4.6 Straight Through Cable

The straight through cable is used in many ways, including:
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-27
10 Cables
Connect the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 and HUB. Connect HUB and NM computer Connect the Ethernet interface board and Ethernet equipment Both ends of the straight through cable use RJ-45 connector which connects the equipment at two ends respectively.
Structure
The structure of the straight through cable is shown in Figure 10-23.
2. Tag 1
3. Main tag
4. Tag 2
Figure 10-23 Structure of straight through cable
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the straight through cable is shown in Table 10-20.
Table 10-20 Pin assignment of the straight through cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship
X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7
X2.2 X2.1 X2.6 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.8 X2.7
Pair
Pair
Pair
Pair
10-28
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Item Description
Connector X1/X2
Network interface connector-crystal model connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-24 to 26AWG-CAT 6/used with SFTP network cable Communication cable-10015 ohm-CAT5E-SFTP 24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 445U 8 CM 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
Cable model Number of cores Fireproof level Length
10.4.7 Crossover Cable

The crossover cable is used to connect the NM computer to the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500. Both ends of the cable use RJ-45 connector. One end is connected to the ETH interface, and the other end to the network port of the compute.
Structure
The structure of the crossover cable is shown in Figure 10-24.
2. Tag 1
3. Main tag
4. Network cable
5. Tag 2
Figure 10-24 Structure of the crossover cable
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the crossover cable is shown in Table 10-21.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-29
10 Cables
Table 10-21 Pin assignment of crossover cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship
X1.6 X1.3 X1.2 X1.1 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7
X2.2 X2.1 X2.6 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.8 X2.7
Pair
Pair
Pair
Pair
Item Description
Connector X1/X2
Network interface connector-crystal model connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-24 to 26AWG-CAT 6/used with SFTP network cable Communication cable-10015ohm-CAT5E-SFTP-24AWG-8 cores PANTONE 646U 8 CM 5 m, 30 m
Model Number of cores Fireproof level Length
10-30
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
10.5 Signal Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables are listed in Table 10-22.
Table 10-22 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables
75 ohm E1 cable 120 ohm E1 cable E3/T3/STM-1 cable Extended subrack service connection cable
75 ohm E1 cable 120 ohm E1 cable E3/T3/STM-1 cable -
75 ohm E1 cable 120 ohm E1 cable E3/T3/STM-1 cable -
10.5.1 75 ohm 8xE1 Cable

The 75 ohm 8xE1 cable, used to input/output E1 signal, connects to the interface on the D75S interface board. One end uses DB44 connector, connected to the 75 ohm E1 interface board. The other end is connected to DDF. The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can transmit eight E1 signals.
Structure
The structure of the 75 ohm 8xE1 cable is shown in Figure 10-25.
1. Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male 3. Tag 3, marked: W2 (E1:5 to 8)
2. Tag 1, marked: W1 (E1:1 to 4) 4. Main tag
Figure 10-25 Structure of the 75 ohm 8xE1 cable
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the 75 ohm 8xE1 cable is shown in Table 10-23.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-31
10 Cables
Table 10-23 Pin assignment of the 75 ohm 8xE1 cable

PIN of DB44 Cable W1 Core Series NO. Remark PIN of DB44 Cable W2 Core Series NO. Remark
38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 Shell
Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip
R1
34 19
Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip
R5
R2
33 18
R6
R3
32 17
R7
R4
31 16
R8
T1
11 26
T5
T2
10 25
T6
T3
9 24
T7
T4
8 7 Shell
T8
Out braid of whole cable & ring of each coax
Out braid of whole cable & ring of each coax
10-32
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Item Description
Connector X Cable model (W1/W2) Fireproof level Number of cores Diameter Length
Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male Coaxial cable-SYFVZP-75-1-1x8(A)-75 ohm-9.65 mm-1.2 mm-0.252 mm-white CM 8 x E1 cover diameter 9.65mm-insulation diameter 1.2mm-conductor diameter 0.252mm 3 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m
Caution The pin assignment table of the E1 cable is put in one packing case with the cable. Be sure not to discard it before installation

The 75 ohm 16xE1 cable, used to input/output E1 signal, connects to the interface on the L75S interface board. One end uses 2 mm HM connector, connected to the 75 ohm E1 interface board L75S. The other end is connected to DDF. The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can transmit 16 E1 signals.
Structure
Main tag
1. Cable connector
2. Terminal
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-33
10 Cables
Pin Assignment
Plug X Cable W Core Series No. Remark Plug X Cable W Core Series No. Remark
a1 a2 a3 a4 a6 a7 a8 a9 b1 b2 b3 b4 b6 b7 b8 b9 c1 c2 c3 c4 c6 c7 c8 a9 d1
Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip
R1
a10 a11
Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip
17
R9
T1
a12 a13
18
T9
R2
a15 a16
19
R10
T2
a17 a18
20
T10
R3
b10 b11
21
R11
T3
b12 b13
22
T11
R4
b15 b16
23
R12
T4
b17 b18
24
T12
R5
c10 c11
25
R13
10
T5
c12 c13
26
T13
11
R6
c15 c16
27
R14
12
T6
c17 c18
28
T14
13
R7
d10
29
R15
10-34
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Plug X Cable W Core Series No. Remark Plug X Cable W Core Series No.
10 Cables Remark
d2 d3 d4 d6 d7 d8 d9
Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring 16 T8 15 R8 14 T7
d11 d12 d13 d15 d16 d17 d18
Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring 32 T16 31 R16 30 T15
Item Description
Connector X Cable model (W1/W2) Fireproof level Number of cores Cover diameter-insulation diameter-conductor diameter Length
2 mm HM cable connector-4x18PIN-28-30AWG-press-fit Coaxial cable-SYFVZP-75-1-1x32(A)-75 ohm-18 mm-1.2 mm-0.254 mm-Huawei gray CM 16 x E1 18 mm-1.2 mm-0.254 mm
10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m
Caution The pin assignment table of the E1 cable is put in one packing case with the cable. Be sure not to discard it before installation

The 120 ohm 8 x E1 cable is used to input/output E1 signals. One end uses DB44 connector, connected to 120 ohm E1 electrical interface board D12S. The other end is connected to the DDF. The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can transmit eight E1 signals.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-35
10 Cables
Structure
1. Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male 3. Tag 3, marked"W2 (RX18)"
2. Tag 1, marked:"W1 (TX18)" 4. Main tag
Figure 10-27 Structure of the 120 ohm 8 x E1 cable
Pin Assignment
Table 10-25 Pin assignment of the 120 ohm 8 x E1 cable
PIN of DB44 Cable W1 Core Series NO. Remark PIN of DB44 Cable W2 Core Series NO. Remark
15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 25
Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White Grey White Blue Red
Pair
Tx1
38 23
Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White Grey White Blue Red
Pair
Rx1
Pair
Tx2
37 22
Pair
Rx2
Pair
Tx3
36 21
Pair
Rx3
Pair
Tx4
35 20
Pair
Rx4
Pair
Tx5
34 19
Pair
Rx5
Pair
Tx6
33 18
Pair
Rx6
10-36
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual PIN of DB44 Cable W1 Core Series NO. Remark PIN of DB44 Cable W2 Core Series NO.
10 Cables Remark
9 24 8 7 Shell
Orange Red Green Red
Pair
Tx7
32 17
Orange Red Green Red
Pair
Rx7
Pair
Tx8
31 16 Shell
Pair
Rx8
Out braid of whole cable
Out braid of whole cable
Item Description
Connector X Cable model Number of cores Inner conductor diameter Fireproof level Length
Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male Communication cable-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-16 cores-PANTONE 430U 16 0.5 mm CM 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m
10.5.4 120 ohm 16xE1 Cable

The 120 ohm 16 x E1 cable is used to input/output E1 signals. One end uses 2 mm HM connector, connected to the 120 ohm E1 electrical interface board L12S or PL1B. The other end is connected to the DDF. The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can transmit 16 E1 signals.
Structure
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-37
10 Cables
3 W2
X 2
W1
1. Cable connector
2. Terminal
3. Main tag
Pin Assignment
Plug X Cable W1 Core Series NO. Remark Plug X Cable W2 Core Series NO. Remark
a1 a2 a6 a7 b1 b2 b6 b7 c1 c2 c6 c7 d1 d2 d6 d7 a10
Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White Grey White Blue Red Orange Red Green Red Brown
Pair
R1
a3 a4
Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White Grey White Blue Red Orange Red Green Red Brown
Pair
T1
Pair
R2
a8 a9
Pair
T2
Pair
R3
b3 b4
Pair
T3
Pair
R4
b8 b9
Pair
T4
Pair
R5
c3 c4
Pair
T5
Pair
R6
c8 c9
Pair
T6
Pair
R7
d3 d4
Pair
T7
Pair
R8
d8 d9
Pair
T8
Pair
R9
a12
Pair
T9
10-38
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Plug X Cable W1 Core Series NO. Remark Plug X Cable W2 Core Series NO.
10 Cables Remark
a11 a15 a16 b10 b11 b15 b16 c10 c11 c15 c16 d10 d11 d15 d16 a5
Red Grey Red Blue Black Orange Black Green Black Brown Black Grey Black Blue Yellow shield PGND Pair R16 Pair R15 Pair R14 Pair R13 Pair R12 Pair R11 Pair R10
a13 a17 a18 b12 b13 b17 b18 c12 c13 c17 c18 d12 d13 d17 d18 a14
Red Grey Red Blue Black Orange Black Green Black Brown Black Grey Black Blue Yellow shield PGND Pair T16 Pair T15 Pair T14 Pair T13 Pair T12 Pair T11 Pair T10
Item Description
Connector X Cable model W1/W2 Number of cores Inner conductor diameter Fireproof level Length
2 mm HM cable connector-4x18PIN24-26AWG-press-fit Symmetrical twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-32 cores-PANTONE 430U 32 0.5 mm CM 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-39
10 Cables
10.5.5 E3/T3/STM-1 Cable

The E3/T3/STM-1 cable is used to input/output E3/T3/STM-1 signal. One end uses SMB connector, connected to the E3/T3/STM-1 interface board. The other end is connected to the DDF, and the connector needs to be made as required.
Structure
The structure of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable is shown in Figure 10-29.
1. Coaxial connector-SMB
2. Main tag
3. Coaxial cable
Figure 10-29 Structure of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable
Pin Assignment
None
Item Description
Connector Cable I Model Diameter Length Cable II Model Diameter Length Cable III Model Diameter Length
Coaxial connector-SMB-75 -straight and female Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1 mm-0.34 mm-shielded cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1 mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m Coaxial cable-75 ohm-4.4 mm-2.4 mm-0.4 mm-shielded-grey cover diameter 4.4 mm-insulation diameter 2.4 mm-conductor diameter 0.4 mm 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m Coaxial cable-75ohm-6.7mm-3.8mm-0.61mm-shielded-grey cover diameter 6.7 mm-insulation diameter 3.8 mm-conductor diameter 0.61 mm 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 130 m
10-40
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Cable IV
Model Diameter Length
Coaxial cable-75 ohm-5.80 mm-3.71 mm-0.643 mm-black cover diameter 5.80 mm-insulation diameter 3.71 mm-conductor diameter 0.643 mm 30 m CM
Fireproof level
10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports extended subrack, adding/dropping up to 504 x E1 services. The extended subrack service connection cable is used to connect the service between main subrack and extended subrack in one cabinet. One end of the cable is connected to the EXA/EXB interface of the UXCSB board of the main subrack and the other end to the EXA/EXB interface of the XCE board.
Structure
The structure of the extended subrack service connection cable is shown in Figure 10-30.
2 1
X1
X2
1. PIN#1
2. PIN#26
Figure 10-30 Structure of the extended subrack service connection cable
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable is shown in Table 10-27.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-41
10 Cables
Table 10-27 Pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable
Pin Core and serial number
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 9 21 8 23 10 22 12 24 11 26 13 25 7 20 X1/X2 enclosure
Core
Ground Core 2
Ground Core 3
Ground Core 4
Ground Core 5
Ground Core 6
Ground Core 7
Ground Core 8
Ground Core 9
Ground
10-42
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Item Description
Cable Connector-1.27mm mini D type-26PIN male-LVDS,28AWG or 30AWG Communication Cable-100-UL20379-30AWG-8P+1P-grey 8P+1P CM 5 m,1.9m
10.6 Clock Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables are listed in Table 10-28.
Table 10-28 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables
75 ohm clock cable 120 ohm clock cable 1/2-channel clock transfer cable
10.6.1 Clock Cable

The clock cable includes 75 ohm clock cable and 120 ohm clock cable, used for inputting/outputting external clock signal. For the 75 ohm clock cable, one end uses SMB connector, connected to the external clock interface of the AUX board. The other end is connected to external clock equipment and the connector needs to be made as required For the 120 ohm clock cable, one end uses RJ-45 connector, connected to the external clock interface of the AUX board. The other end is connected to external clock equipment and the connector needs to be made as required. The 120 ohm clock cable can input/output two clock signals.
Structure
The structure of the 75 ohm and 120 ohm clock cables is respectively shown in Figure 10-31 and Figure 10-32.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-43
10 Cables
1. Coaxial connector -SMB
2. Tag
Figure 10-31 Structure of the 75 ohm clock cable
1. Tag 1 (R) and Tag2 (T) 2. Communication cable 4. Network port connector-RJ-45
3. Main tag
Figure 10-32 Structure of the 120 ohm clock cable
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the 120 ohm clock cable is shown in Table 10-29.
Table 10-29 Pin assignment of the 120 ohm clock cable
X1 W Remark
X1.1 X1.2 X1.4 X1.5
Blue White Orange White
W1
W2
10-44
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
Item Description
75 ohm clock cable
Connector Cable Model Diameter Length
Coaxial connector-SMB-75 -straight and female Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1mm-0.34 mm-shielded cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1 mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m Network interface cable-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.4 mm-26AWG-2 pairs-Pantone 430U 0.4 mm/26AWG 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m, 50 m, 70 m, 100 m
120 ohm clock cable
Connector X1 Cable Model Conductor diameter Length
10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable

The clock transfer cable includes 1-channel and 2-channel 75 ohm/120 ohm clock cables.
Structure
The structure of 1-channel and 2-channel 75 ohm/120 ohm clock transfer cables is shown in Figure 10-33 and Figure 10-34 respectively.
1. Coaxial connector-SMB-75 ohm-straight/plug-female 3. 75 ohm/120 ohm transfer PCB
2. Main tag
Figure 10-33 Structure of the 1-channel 120 ohm/75 ohm clock transfer cable
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-45
10 Cables
1. Coaxial connector-SMB-75 ohm-straight/plug-female 5. 75 ohm/120 ohm transfer PCB
2. Tag 1:"1# 6. Tag 3:"1#"
3. Tag 2:2#" 7. Tag 4:"2#"
4. Main tag
Figure 10-34 Structure of the 2-channel 120 ohm/75 ohm clock transfer cable
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the 2-channel 120 ohm/75 ohm clock transfer cable is shown in Table 10-30.
Table 10-30 Pin assignment of the 75 ohm/120 ohm clock transfer cable
Connector 75 ohm cable Color 120 ohm cable
X1
Core Shielding layer
Blue White Blue White
W3
X2
Core Shielding layer
W4
Item Description
1-channel
Connector 75 cable Model Diameter 120 ohm cable Model Conductor diameter
Coaxial connector-SMB-75 -straight and female Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1 mm-0.34 mm-shielded Cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1 mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.4 mm-26AWG-2 pairs-Pantone 430U 0.4 mm/26AWG 30 m
Length
10-46
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10 Cables
2-channel
X1/X2 connector 75 cable Model Diameter 120 ohm cable Model Conductor diameter
Coaxial connector-SMB-75 -straight and female Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1 mm-0.34 mm-shielded Cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1 mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.4 mm-26AWG-2 pairs-Pantone 430U 0.4 mm/26AWG 30 m
Length
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
10-47
A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board
A
Indicator
Indicator Description for Equipment and Board
A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description

Status Description
Power indicator Green
On Off
The cabinet is powered on. The cabinet is not powered on. There is a critical alarm. There is no critical alarm. There is a major alarm. There is no major alarm. There is a minor alarm. There is no minor alarm.
Critical alarm indicator Red
On Off
Major alarm indicator Orange
On Off
Minor alarm indicator Yellow
On Off
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
A-1
A.2 Board Indicator Description

Board Hardware Indicator - STAT
Status Description
The board works normally. The board hardware fails. The board is not powered on.
Service Activation Indicator - ACT

Status Description
On, green Off
The service is activated, and the board is in service. The board is not in service.
Board Software Indicator - PROG

Status Description
On, green
The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully. The board software for FLASH is being uploaded or the FPGA software for FPGA is being uploaded. The board software is being initialized, and is in BIOS boot stage. The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in initializing. No power supply.
On for 100ms and off for 100ms alternatively, green On for 300ms and off for 300ms alternatively, green On, red Off
A-2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Service Alarm Indicator - SRV

Status Description
On, green On, red On, yellow Off
Service is normal, no service alarm occurs. Critical or major alarm occurs to service. Minor or remote alarm occurs to service. No service is configured and no service alarm occurs, or no power supply.
Power Monitoring Indicators and Alarm Cut Indicator

Indicator name Status Description
Indicator for 48 V power supply A (PWRA) Indicator for 48 V power supply B (PWRB) Indicator for +3.3 V power supply C (PWRC) Alarm cut indicator (ALMC)
On, green On, red On, green On, red On, green On, red On, yellow Off
The 48 V power supply A is normal. The 48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or failed). The 48 V power supply B is normal. The 48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or failed). The +3.3 V protection power is normal. The +3.3 V protection power is lost. Currently in permanent alarm cut-off status. Give sound warning upon alarm.
Ethernet Indicators of the AUX

Indicator name Status Description
LINK indicator (Green)
On Off
Link between network cable and equipment is established. Link between network cable and equipment is not established. There is data transmitting/receiving. There is no data transmitting/receiving.
ACT indicator (Orange)
Flash Off
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
A-3
Ethernet Port Indicator of Interface Board

Status Description Remark
The green and yellow indicator is off. The green indicator is on, and the yellow indicator does not flash. The green indicator is on, and the yellow indicator flashes.
The Ethernet cable is not connected. The Ethernet cable is connected, but no data is transmitted. The Ethernet cable is connected, and data is transmitted.
The flashing frequency of yellow indicator depends on the transmission of Ethernet data.
A-4
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
B Board Version Description
B
B.1 Board Version List
Equipment Board OSN3500 (40Gbit/s) OSN3500 (80Gbit/s)
Board Version Description
The board versions provided by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 are listed
OSN2500 REG OSN2500 OSN1500A OSN1500B
N2SL64 N1SL16(A) N2SL16(A) N1SF16 N1SLQ4 N2SLQ4 N1SLD4 N2SLD4 N1SL4 N2SL4 N1SLT1 N1SLQ1 N2SLQ1 N1SL1 N2SL1 R1SLD4 R1SL4
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
B-1
B Board Version Description Equipment Board OSN3500 (40Gbit/s) OSN3500 (80Gbit/s) OSN2500 REG OSN2500
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual OSN1500A OSN1500B
R1SLQ1 R1SL1 N1SEP1 N1SEP N1PQ1A/B R1PD1 A/B R1PL1 A/B R1L75S R1L12S N1PQM N1PD3 N1PL3 N1PL3A N1SPQ4 N2SPQ4 N1D75S N1D12S N1D12B N1D34S N1C34S N1MU04 N1EU04 N1EU08 N1OU08 N2OU08 N1TSB8 N1EFS4 N2EFS0 N2EGS2
B-2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Equipment Board OSN3500 (40Gbit/s) OSN3500 (80Gbit/s) OSN2500 REG OSN2500
B Board Version Description OSN1500A OSN1500B
N1EGT2 N1EFT8 R1EFT4 N1EMR0 N2EMR0 N2EGR2 N1EFF8 N1ETF8 N1ETS8 N1ADL4 N1ADQ1 N1IDL4 N1IDQ1 N1MST4 N1MR2A N1MR2B N1MR2C N1LWX N1BPA N1BA2 N1/N2DCU N1GXCSA N1EXCSA N1UXCSA N1UXCSB N1XCE Q1CXL1/4/16 Q2CXL1/4/16 N1SCC
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
B-3
B Board Version Description Equipment Board OSN3500 (40Gbit/s) OSN3500 (80Gbit/s) OSN2500 REG OSN2500
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual OSN1500A OSN1500B
N1GSCC Q1CRG N1PIU Q1PIU R1PIU R1PIUA N1FAN R1FAN N1FANA R1EOW Q1SAP Q1SEI N1AUX R1AUX R2AUX N1COA/61COA/ 62COA UPM
indicates that the product supports the board.
B-4
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
B.2 Version Description

B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board
The two versions of optical line interface boards as described in Table B-1
Table B-1 N1 and N2 optical line interface boards
Item Description
Similarity Difference
The boards of two versions implement the same functions. The N2 version supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM), but the N1 version does not. N1 version supports inloop and outloop at optical interface and inloop at VC-4 level. N2 version supports inloop and outloop at optical interface, but outloop at optical interface of N2 version is not recommended. The T2000 distinguishes N1 from N2 directly. Each product version (including V100R001, V100R002 and V100R003) supports N1 and N2 optical line interface boards. The optical interface board with single optical interface supports replacement between N1 and N2. After completion of hardware replacement, use the direct replacement command on the T2000 to effectuate the replacement. Note: If an N2 board starts the TCM function before replacement, its replacement by an N1 board will fail. Other optical interface boards do not support replacement between N1 and N2.
NM support OptiX OSN product Version replacement
Note: The optical interface boards with one optical interface refer to SL64, SL16, SF16, SL4 and SL1, which have one pair of optical interface.
B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board

The Ethernet processing boards of OptiX OSN products can support N1, N2 or R1 versions. For details, refer to Table B-2. The EGT2 and EFT8 are Ethernet transparent transmission boards, supporting only N1 version currently. The EFT4, an Ethernet transparent transmission board seated in half-height slot and used on the OptiX OSN 1500 subrack and OptiX OSN 2500 subrack, supports R1.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
B-5
Table B-2 Ethernet processing board version

Version Board N1 N2 R1
EGT2/EFT8 EFT4 EFS4 EFS0/EGS2 EMR0 EGR2
Supported Supported Supported Supported -
Supported Supported Supported
Supported -
N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards are described Table B-3.

Table B-3 N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards
Item Description
The working principle and functions of N1 and N2 boards are the same. For EFS0 and EGS2, The uplink bandwidth of the N1 at the SDH side is half that of the N2. The N1and N2 boards have the same hardware but different software. For EMR0 and EGS2, N1 version and N2 version have different hardware.N2 version software of EMR0 can be uploaded to the N1 version hardware of EMR0, then the N2EMR0 is created; N2 version software of EGS2 can not be uploaded to N1 version hardware of EGS2.
NM support Product support
The T2000 differentiates N1 from N2 directly. V100R001 products only support N1Ethernet processing boards. V100R002 products support N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards. V100R003 products support N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards. If N2 version software of EMR0 is uploaded to the N1 or N2 version hardware of EMR0, then the N2EMR0 is created. The N1EMR0 can not be created directly through this way because the N2EMR0 can not support double ID. N2EFS0 and N2EGS2 support double ID function. They can be created as not only N1 version board but also N2 version. The N2 version is defaulted.
Version replacement
For any product version, the board software can be upgraded from N1 to N2.
B-6
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
The N1 boards are only used as N1 boards. For V100R002 and V100R003 products, N2 boards can be used as either N1 boards (displayed as N1 boards on the T2000) or N2 boards (displayed as N2 boards on the T2000). When N2 boards are used as N1 boards, the boards can be upgraded to N2 boards by deleting the original board and adding an N2 board. During the upgrade, services will be interrupted. For EMR0, when the software of N2EMR0 board is uploaded to the hardware of N1EMR0 and N2EMR0. The N2EMR0 can be created as N2EMR0. But for N2EFS0 and N2EGS2, they can be created as N1 version or N2 version when the N2 software is uploaded to the N1 version or N2 version hardware.
B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards

GXCSA
The OptiX OSN 3500 GXCSA has only one version: N1.
SCC
The OptiX OSN 3500 SCC supports the following two versions: N1SCC, N1GSCC, as described in Table B-4.
Table B-4 N1SCC and N1GSCC
Item Description
Description Difference NM support
Implement system control and communication functions. N1SCC: does not support extended subracks or intelligent features N1GSCC: support extended subracks and intelligent On the T2000, N1SCC is displayed as SCC, N1GSCC as GSCC. Specific version number can be distinguished by bar code on the board front panel. V100R001 products support N1SCC only. V100R002 and V100R003 products support N1SCC and N1GSCC. The version later than V100R003 products support N1GSCC. Compatible with subsequent versions.
Product support
Version replacement
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
B-7
CXL1/4/16
The CXL1/4/16 has Q1 and Q2 versions, as described in Table B-5.
Table B-5 Q1 and Q2 CXL1/4/16 boards
Item Description
Implement cross-connect, clock, system control and optical line processing functions. Q1CXL1/4/16: support 20 Gbit/s higher order and 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect capacity. Q2CXL1/4/16: support 20 Gbit/s higher order and 20 Gbit/slower order cross-connect capacity, and support intelligent features.
NM support
CXL1/4/16 is displayed as three parts on the T2000: system control, cross-connect and optical line interface. Q1CXL1/4/16 is displayed as SCC, CXL and Q1SL1/4/16. Q2CXL1/4/16 is displayed as GSCC, ECXL and Q1SL1/4/16.
Product support
V100R001 products support Q1CXL1/4/16. V100R002 products support Q2CXL1/4/16. V100R003 products support Q1CXL1/4/16 and Q2CXL1/4/16. Compatible with subsequent versions.
Version replacement
B-8
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
B.2.4 Other Boards

The OptiX OSN PIU, AUX and FAN also have several versions, as described in Table B-6.
Table B-6 Version description of PIU, AUX and FAN
Item Description PIU AUX FAN
Access and distribute 48 V power N1PIU: applicable to 3500 Q1PIU: applicable to 2500 R1PIU: applicable to 1500B R1PIUA: applicable to 1500A
Provide auxiliary interfaces N1AUX: applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500
Dissipate heat
N1FAN: applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and the OptiX OSN R1AUX and R2AUX: applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 1500 R1FAN: applicable to OptiX OSN 1500 N1FANA: used in high power consumption occasions
NM support Version replacement
All displayed as PIU on the T2000. Irreplaceable
All displayed as AUX on the T2000. For V100R003 products, R1AUX and R2AUX can be replaced by each other.
All displayed as FAN or FANA on the T2000. Irreplaceable
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
B-9
C Power Consumption and Weight
C
Board
Power Consumption and Weight

Weight (kg) Board Power consumption (W) Weight (kg)
Power consumption (W)
N2SL64 N1/N2SL16 N1SF16 N1/N2SLQ4 N1/N2SLD4 N1/N2SL4 N1SLT1 N1/N2SLQ1 N1/N2SL1 R1SL4 R1SLD4 R1SLQ1 R1SL1 N1BA2 N1BPA N1DCU N1SEP1 N1EU08 N1/N2OU08 N1EU04 N1/N2SPQ4
32 20 26 16 15 15 15 15 14 10 11 12 10.3 20 20 0 17 11 6 6 24
1.12 1.10 1.09 1.04 1.01 1.00 1.22 1.04 1.00 0.34 0.36 0.40 0.34 1.01 1.01 0.42 0.95 0.41 0.41 0.40 0.91
N1EFS4 N2EFS0 N2EGS2 N1EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT4 N1/N2EMR0 N2EGR2 N1ETF8 N1EFF8 N1ETS8 N1ADL4 N1ADQ1 N1IDL4 N1IDQ1 N1MR2A N1MR2B N1MR2C N1LWX N1GXCSA N1EXCSA
30 35 40/43.2 23 26 14 50 54 2 6 2.5 35 37 35 37 0 0 0 30 27 62
0.98 0.98 1.04 0.90 1.01 0.53 1.20 1.10 0.37 0.44 0.37 0.90 0.95 1.02 1.02 1.01 1.01 1.01 1.10 1.81 2.00
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
C-1
C Power Consumption and Weight Board Power consumption (W) Weight (kg) Board
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Power consumption (W) Weight (kg)
N1MU04 N1PD3 N1PL3 N1D34S N1C34S N1PQM N1PQ1 N1D75S N1D12B N1D12S R1PD1 R1PL1 R1L75S R1L12S N1PL3A N1TSB8 61COA N1COA
2 19 15 2 2 22 19 5.5 1 9 15 7 5 3 15 5 10 10
0.41 1.12 1.00 0.38 0.31 1.01 1.01 0.35 0.31 0.35 0.5 0.45 0.27 0.24 1.00 0.28 3.50 3.50
N1UXCSA/B N1XCE Q1CXL1/4/16 Q2CXL1/4/16 N1SCC N1GSCC Q1CRG N1PIU Q1PIU R1PIU R1PIUA N1FAN (Note 1) R1FAN (Note 1) R1EOW N1AUX N2AUX 62COA N1MST4
65 25 40 40 10 10 12 8 8 1.5 3 16 20 10 19 19 75 26
2.00 1.50 1.12 1.12 0.88 0.88 0.90 1.15 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.50 1.01 0.40 0.96 0.96 8.00 0.9
Note: The value is the power consumption for each fan frame.
C-2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
D Glossary
D
This document defines the following terms:
Numerics 1+1 protection 1:N protection 100Base-TX
Glossary
A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. A 1: N protection architecture has N normal traffic signals, N working SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra traffic signal. Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mbit/s CSMA/CD local area network over two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair (STP) wire.
A ADM Add/Drop Multiplexing. Network elements that provide access to all, or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM. Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells containing information from an individual user is not necessarily periodic. It is a protocol within the OSI layer 1. An ATM cell consists of a 5 octet header followed by 48 octets of data. See also Recommendation I.361.
ATM
B BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing supply that minimizes the number of synchronization links entering an office. Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
D-1
E Acronyms and Abbreviations
C CAR CBR Committed Access Rate. The CAR limits the input or output transmission rate on an interface. Constant Bit Rate. The Constant Bit Rate service category is used by connections that request a static amount of bandwidth that is continuously available during the connection lifetime. This amount of bandwidth is characterized by a peak cell Rate (PCR) value. Cell Delay Variation Tolerance. Information sent in the forward and backward direction to determine the upper bound of the tolerance admitted for the time interval between cells pertaining to a given cell flow. The backward CDVT values included in the IAM and MOD shall be interpreted as maximum acceptable values for the cell flow in the backward direction.
CDVT
E ECC Embedded Control Channel. An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer. In 1000BASE-X, the process by which a MAC packet is enclosed within a PCS code-group stream Enterprise System Connection. A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in an storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s. A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers. It is a broadcast networking technology that can use several different physical media, including twisted pair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernet usually uses CSMA/CD. TCP/IP is commonly used with Ethernet networks.
Encapsulation ESCON
Ethernet
F FICON Fibre Connect. A new generation connection protocol which connects the host with various control units. It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fibre channel, and provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON.
L LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. A solution features flexible bandwidth and dynamic adjustment. In addition, it provides a failure tolerance mechanism, which enhances the viability of virtual concatenations and enables the dynamic adjustment to bandwidth (non-service affecting).
M MAC Multicast Media Access Control. The data link sublayer that is responsible for transferring data to and from the Physical Layer. Transmission of a frame to stations specified by a group address.
D-2
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
D Glossary
MPLS
Multiprotocol Label Switching. The data transmission over an MPLS network is independent of route calculating. MPLS, as a connection-oriented transmission technology, guarantees QoS effectively, supports various network level technologies, and is independent of the link layer.
O Orderwire P Paired Slots PCR R Receiver sensitivity Reference clock REG RPR S SAN Storage Area Network. A dedicated high-speed data storage network which interconnects multiple independent storage systems with multiple servers through fibre path switch or other switch equipment. Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transport structures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over physical transmission networks. SubNetwork Connection Protection. A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. Synchronization Status Message. ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit the network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Receiver overload is the maximum acceptable value of the received average power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER. A clock of very high stability and accuracy that may be completely autonomous and whose frequency serves as a basis of comparison for the frequency of other clocks. A device that performs regeneration. Resilient Packet Ring. A metropolitan area network (MAN) technology supporting data transfer among stations interconnected in a dual-ring configuration. When SDH boards are used to configure the MSP ring, the two boards forming a ring must be inserted in paired slots. Peak Cell Rate. An upper limit on the rate at which cells can be submitted on an ATM connection. It establishes the voice communication among the operators and maintenance engineers work in each working station.
SDH
SNCP
SSM
T TPS Tributary Protection Switching. A function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
V VPN Virtual Private Network. Enables IP service to be transmitted securely over a public TCP/IP network by encrypting all service from one network to another.
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
D-3
E
A ADM AMI APS ATM B BITS C CBR CC CMI COA CPU CRC D DC DCC DCE DCU DDF DTR DVB-ASI DWDM E ECC EDFA
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Add/Drop Multiplexer Alternate Mark Inversion Automatic Protection Switch Asynchronous Transfer Mode
Building Integrated Timing Supply
Constant Bit Rate Continuity Check Coded Mark Inversion Case-shaped Optical Amplifier Center Processing Unit Cyclic Redundancy Check
Direct Current Data Communication Channel Data Circuit-terminal Equipment Dispersion Compensation Unit Digital Distribution Frame Data Terminal Ready Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
Embedded Control Channel Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier
E-4
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
D Glossary
EMC EMI EPL EPLAN ESCON ETS ETSI EVPL EVPLAN F FC FE FICON FPGA G GE GFP H HDB3 HDLC I IEEE IS-IS ITU-T L LAPS LB LCAS LCT LPT M MPLS
Electromagnetic Compatibility Electromagnetic Interference Ethernet Private Line Ethernet Private LAN Enterprise Systems Connection European Telecommunication Standards European Telecommunications Standards Institute Ethernet Virtual Private Line Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
Fiber Channel Fast Ethernet Fiber Connection Field Programmable Gate Array
Gigabit Ethernet Generic Framing Procedure
High Density Bipolar of order 3 code High level Data Link Control
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Intermedia System-Intermedia System International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector
Link Access Procedure-SDH LoopBack Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme Local Craft Terminal Link State Pass Through
Multi-protocol Label Switch
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
E-5
MSP N NA NRZ O OAM OSPF P PA PDH R RD RIP RSTP S SG SNCP SSM T TD TPS U UBR V VBR VLAN VPN W WDM
Multiplex Section Protection
Not available Non Return to Zero
Operation Administration and Maintenance Open Shortest Path First
Power Amplifier Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
Receive Data Routing Information Protocol Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
Signaling Ground Sub-Network Connection Protection Synchronization Status Message
Transmit Data Tributary Protection Switching
Unspecified Bit Rate
Variable Bit Rate Virtual Local Area Network Virtual Private Network
Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E-6
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Index
Index
Numerics
1:1 TPS protection,for EFS0, 7-18 1:N TPS protection,for E1/T1, 6-28 1:N TPS protection,for E3/T3, 6-16 1:N TPS protection,for E4/STM-1, 6-5 1:N TPS protection,for STM-1, 5-42 120 ohm E1 cable, 10-35, 10-37 1-channel clock transfer cable, 10-45 2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-45 75 ohm E1 cable, 10-31, 10-33 alarm concatenanting cable between OSN subrack and other subrack, 10-17 alarm concatenation, 9-47 alarm cut indicator, A-3 architecture,equipment, 1-1 ATM service processing board ADL4, 7-34 ADQ1, 7-34 ATM service processing board with IMA function IDL4, 7-40 IDQ1, 7-40 AUX communication module, 9-34 interface, 9-37 interface module, 9-34 power module, 9-34 AUX board DIP switch and jumper, 9-49 front panel, 9-36 function, 9-31 principle, 9-33 slots, 9-30 technical parameter, 9-50 version description, 9-50
A
abbreviation, E-4 acronym, E-4 ACT. see service activation indicator ADL4 board front panel, 7-37 function, 7-34 indicator, 7-37, 7-43 interface, 7-38 principle, 7-35 protection configuration, 7-38 slots, 7-34 technical parameter, 7-39 version description, 7-39 ADQ1 board front panel, 7-37 function, 7-34 indicator, 7-37, 7-43 interface, 7-38 principle, 7-35 protection configuration, 7-38 slots, 7-34 technical parameter, 7-39 version description, 7-39
B
BA2 board application, 9-13 front panel, 9-14 function, 9-12 indicator, 9-15 interface, 9-15 principle, 9-13 slots, 9-12 technical parameter, 9-16 version description, 9-16
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Index
BGND power cable, 10-5 board appearance, 4-11 classification, 4-1 indicator (summary table), A-2 power consumption (summary table), C-1 weight (summary table), C-1 board classification cross-connect and SCC boards, 4-7 Data processong boards, 4-5 other boards, 4-9 PDH boards, 4-4 SDH boards, 4-1 board hardware indicator, A-2 board software indicator, A-2 BPA board application, 9-13 front panel, 9-14 function, 9-12 indicator, 9-15 interface, 9-15 principle, 9-13 slots, 9-12 technical parameter, 9-16 version description, 9-16
C
C2. see signal label byte C34S board front panel, 6-15 function, 6-13 slots, 6-12 cabinet configuration, 2-3 ETSI cabinet, 2-1 indicator, 2-3 indicator (summary table), A-1 power distribution unit, 2-4 size, 2-5 technical parameter, 2-5 type, 2-1 weight, 2-5 cabinet door grounding cable, 10-7 cabinet indicator cable, 10-14 cable technical parameter 1/2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-46 48 V cabinet power cable, 10-7 75 ohm E1 cable, 10-33, 10-35
alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack, 10-18 cabinet BGND power cable, 10-7 cabinet door grounding cable, 10-8 cabinet indicator cable, 10-15 cabinet PGND power cable, 10-7 clock cable, 10-45 COA concatenating cable, 10-27 crossover cable, 10-30 E3/T3/STM-1 cable, 10-40 extended subrack service connection cable, 10-43 housekeeping alarm input/output cable, 10-20 HUB/COA power cable, 10-12 indicator/alarm concatenation cable between OSN subracks, 10-17 OAM serial port cable, 10-22 RS-232/422 serial port cable, 10-25 serial 14/f&f cable, 10-24 straight through cable, 10-29 subrack power cable, 10-9, 10-11 telephone wire, 10-26 UPM power cable, 10-13 capacity cross-connect for OptiX OSN 2500/1500, 8-9 cross-connect for OptiX OSN 3500, 8-2 case-shape optical amplifier COA, 9-17 clock cable, 10-43 COA 62COA, 9-17 application, 9-18 front panel, 9-20 function, 9-18 indicator, 9-21 installation, 9-23 interface, 9-21 MONITOR-1/MONITOR-2 interface, 9-23 power interface, 9-23 principle, 9-19 RS-232-1/RS-232-2 serial port, 9-22 technical specification, 9-24 version description, 9-24 COA concatenating cable, 10-26 connector E2000/APC, 9-21
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Index
CRG board front panel, 8-25 function, 8-23 indicator, 8-26 interface, 8-27 principle, 8-24 slots, 8-23 switch, 8-26 techincal parameter, 8-28 version description, 8-27 cross-connect & synchronous timing board CXL1, 8-9 CXL16, 8-9 CXL4, 8-9 EXCSA, 8-2 GXCSA, 8-2 UXCS, 8-2 XCE, 8-2 crossover cable, 10-29 CXL1 board front panel, 8-11 function, 8-9 indicator, 8-12 interface, 8-13 parameter configuration, 8-14 principle, 8-11 technical parameter, 8-15 version description, 8-15 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 board protection configuration, 8-14 slots, 8-9 version description, 8-15 CXL16 board front panel, 8-11 function, 8-9 indicator, 8-12 interface, 8-13 parameter configuration, 8-14 principle, 8-11 technical parameter, 8-15 version description, 8-15 CXL4 board front panel, 8-11 function, 8-9 indicator, 8-12 interface, 8-13 parameter configuration, 8-14 principle, 8-11
technical parameter, 8-15 version description, 8-15
D
D12B. see also PQ1 D12S. see also PQ1 D34S. see also PD3 D34S board front panel, 6-15 function, 6-13 slots, 6-12 D75S. see also PQ1 D75S/D12S/D12B board front panel, 6-26 function, 6-24 slots, 6-24 version description, 6-31 DCU board application, 9-26 front panel, 9-27 function, 9-26 interface, 9-28 principle, 9-27 slots, 9-26 technical parameter, 9-29 version description, 9-29 dispersion compensation board DCU, 9-26
E
E1 interface board D75S, 6-23 E1 processing board PQ1, 6-23 E1 processing board (half-slot) PD1 board, 6-33 PL1 board, 6-33 E1/T1 interface board D12B, 6-23 D12S, 6-23 E1/T1 processing board PQM, 6-23 E2000/APC optical interface, 10-4 E3/T3 interface switching board D34S, 6-12 E3/T3 processing board PD3, 6-12
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Index
PL3, 6-12 PL3A, 6-12 E3/T3/STM-1 cable, 10-40 E4/STM-1 processing board SPQ4, 6-1 EFF8 board front panel, 7-6 interface, 7-7 EFF8/ETF8 board slots, 7-2 version description, 7-9 EFS0 board 1:1 TPS protection, 7-18 1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 7-20 1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 7-19 1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 7-18 front panel, 7-15 function, 7-12 indicator, 7-16 interface, 7-17 parameter configuration, 7-20 principle, 7-14 slots, 7-11 technical parameter, 7-22 EFS0/EFS4/EGS2 board version description, 7-22 EFS4 board front panel, 7-15 function, 7-12 indicator, 7-16 interface, 7-17 parameter configuration, 7-20 principle, 7-14 slots, 7-11 technical parameter, 7-22 EFT4 board front panel, 7-6 function, 7-3 indicator, 7-6 interface, 7-7 parameter configuration, 7-8 principle, 7-4 slots, 7-2 EFT8 board front panel, 7-6
function, 7-3 indicator, 7-6 interface, 7-7 parameter configuration, 7-8 principle, 7-4 slots, 7-2 EGR2 board front panel, 7-28 function, 7-24 indicator, 7-29 interface board, 7-29 principle, 7-27 protection configuration, 7-30 slots, 7-23 technical parameter, 7-33 version description, 7-32 EGS2 board front panel, 7-15 function, 7-12 indicator, 7-16 interface, 7-17 parameter configuration, 7-20 principle, 7-14 slots, 7-11 technical parameter, 7-22 EGT2 board front panel, 7-6 function, 7-3 indicator, 7-6 interface, 7-7 parameter configuration, 7-8 principle, 7-4 slots, 7-2 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4 board version description, 7-9 ejector lever, 4-11 EMR0 board front panel, 7-28 function, 7-24 indicator, 7-29 interface board, 7-29 principle, 7-27 protection configuration, 7-30 slots, 7-23 technical parameter, 7-33 version description, 7-32 EOW board front panel, 9-45
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Index
function, 9-31 principle, 9-34 slots, 9-30 version description, 9-50 Equipment 48 V/60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable, 10-9 equipment architecture, 1-1 OptiX OSN 1500A, 1-6 OptiX OSN 1500B, 1-6 OptiX OSN 2500, 1-4 OptiX OSN 3500, 1-1 ETF8 board front panel, 7-6 interface, 7-7 Ethernet board with RPR function EGR2, 7-23 EMR0, 7-23 Ethernet electrical interface board ETF8, 7-2 Ethernet indicator ACT indicator, A-3 LINK indicator, A-3 Ethernet interface switching board ETS8, 7-11 Ethernet optical interface board EFF8, 7-2 Ethernet port indicator, A-4 Ethernet switching processing board EFS0, 7-11 EFS4, 7-11 EGS2, 7-11 Ethernet transparent transmission board EFT4, 7-2 EFT8, 7-2 EGT2, 7-2 ETS8 board front panel, 7-15 indicator, 7-16 interface, 7-17 slots, 7-11 technical parameter, 7-22 ETSI cabinet appearance, 2-1 EU08. see also SEP1 EU08 board front panel, 5-40 interface, 5-42 slots, 5-36
technical parameter, 5-47 EU08/OU08 board function, 5-37 version description, 5-47 EXCSA board front panel, 8-4 EXCSA board function, 8-2 indicator, 8-5 interface, 8-6 parameter configuration, 8-7 principle, 8-3 technical parameter, 8-7 version description, 8-7 extended subrack service connection cable, 10-41
F
FAN function, 9-64 principle, 9-65 technical parameter, 9-68 version description, 9-67 FAN board indicator, 9-66 fan control board FAN, 9-64 fan tray assembly. see FAN FC/PC optical interface, 10-4 FE processing board RPR transmission, 7-23 switching, 7-11 transparent transmission, 7-2 fiber jumper. see tail fiber
G
GE processing board RPR transmission, 7-23 switching, 7-11 transparent transmission, 7-2 GSCC board front panel, 8-19 slots, 8-17 GXCSA board front panel, 8-4 function, 8-2 indicator, 8-5
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Index
interface, 8-6 parameter configuration, 8-7 principle, 8-3 technical parameter, 8-7 version description, 8-7 GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCS/XCE board protection configuration, 8-7 slots, 8-2
J
J1. see path trace byte
L
L12S board front panel, 6-34 L75S board front panel, 6-34 L75S/L12S board function, 6-34 slots, 6-33 version description, 6-39 LC/PC optical interface, 10-3 LWX board front panel, 9-4 function, 9-2 indicator, 9-4 interface, 9-4 principle, 9-2 slots, 9-1 technical parameter, 9-5 version description, 9-5
H
housekeeping alarm input/output cable, 10-18 HUB/COA power cable, 10-11
I
IDL4 board front panel, 7-42 function, 7-41 interface, 7-43 principle, 7-42 protection configuration, 7-44 slots, 7-40 technical parameter, 7-45 version description, 7-45 IDQ1 board front panel, 7-42 function, 7-41 interface, 7-43 principle, 7-42 protection configuration, 7-44 slots, 7-40 technical parameter, 7-45 version description, 7-45 indicator alarm cut indicator, A-3 board hardware indicator, A-2 board software indicator, A-2 cabinet, 2-3 cabinet (summary table), A-1 Ethernet indicator, A-3 Ethernet port indicator, A-4 power monitoring indicator, A-3 service activation indicator, A-2 service alarm indicator, A-3 indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks, 10-16 interface switching & bridging board TSB8, 5-36
M
mapping relation between terminals and PIUs, 2-4 MR2 board slots, 9-8 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C technical parameter, 9-11 version description, 9-11 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C board front panel, 9-10 function, 9-8 indicator, 9-10 interface, 9-10 principle, 9-9 MST4 board front panel, 7-50 function, 7-47 indicator, 7-50 interface, 7-50 parameter configuration, 7-51 principle, 7-48 slots, 7-47 technical parameter, 7-52 version description, 7-51
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Index
MU04. see also SPQ4 MU04 board front panel, 6-4, 6-5 function, 6-2 interface, 6-5 principle, 6-3 slots, 6-1 technical parameter, 6-11 version description, 6-10 Multi-service transparent transmission processing board MST4, 7-47
N
N1PIU board front panel, 9-54 principle, 9-51
O
OAM serial port cable, 10-21 optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2A/MR2B/MR2C, 9-8 optical booster & pre-amplifier BPA, 9-12 optical booster amplifier BA2, 9-12 orderwire processing board EOW, 9-30 OU08. see also SEP1 OU08 board front panel, 5-40 interface, 5-42 slots, 5-36 technical parameter, 5-47
P
path trace byte, 5-5 PD1 board 1:N TPS protection, 6-36 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500A, 6-38 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-38 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-37 front panel, 6-34 function, 6-34
indicator, 6-35 interface, 6-35 parameter configuration, 6-38 principle, 6-34 protection configuration, 6-36 slots, 6-33 technical parameter, 6-39 PD1/PL1 board version description, 6-39 PD3 board front panel, 6-15 function, 6-13 indicator, 6-16 interface, 6-16 parameter configuration, 6-22 principle, 6-13 slots, 6-12 technical parameter, 6-22 PD3/PL3 board 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-21 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-20 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 6-18 PGND power cable, 10-5 pin assignment 1/2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-46 120 ohm E1 cable, 10-36, 10-38 75 ohm E1 cable, 10-31, 10-34 alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack, 10-18 cabinet indicator cable, 10-15 clock cable, 10-44 COA concatenating cable, 10-27 crossover cable, 10-29 extended subrack service connection cable, 10-41 housekeeping alarm input/output cable, 10-19 HUB/COA power cable, 10-12 indicator/alarm concatenation cable between OSN subracks, 10-16 OAM serial port cable, 10-22 RS-232/422 serial port cable, 10-25 serial 14/F&f cable, 10-23 straight through cable, 10-28 subrack power cable, 10-9, 10-10
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Index
telephone wire, 10-26 UPM power cable, 10-13 PIU board function, 9-51 slots, 9-51 technical parameter, 9-57, 9-58 PL1 board front panel, 6-34 function, 6-34 indicator, 6-35 interface, 6-35 parameter configuration, 6-38 principle, 6-34 slots, 6-33 technical parameter, 6-39 PL3 board front panel, 6-15 function, 6-13 indicator, 6-16 interface, 6-16 parameter configuration, 6-22 principle, 6-13 slots, 6-12 technical parameter, 6-22 PL3/PD3 board 1:N TPS protection, 6-16 PL3A board front panel, 6-15 function, 6-13 indicator, 6-16 interface, 6-16 parameter configuration, 6-22 principle, 6-13 slots, 6-12 technical parameter, 6-22 power consumption board (summary table), C-1 power distribution unit appearance, 2-4 power interface COA, 9-23 power interface board PIU, 9-51 power monitoring indicator, A-3 PQ1 board 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-31
1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-30 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 6-29 front panel, 6-26 function, 6-24 indicator, 6-27 interface board, 6-27 parameter configuration, 6-31 principle, 6-25 protection configuration, 6-28 slots, 6-24 technical parameter, 6-31 PQ1/PQM board 1:N TPS protection, 6-28 version description, 6-31 PQM board front panel, 6-26 function, 6-24 indicator, 6-27 interface board, 6-27 parameter configuration, 6-31 principle, 6-25 protection configuration, 6-28 slots, 6-24 technical parameter, 6-31 PROG. see board software indicator PWRA/B/C. see power monitoring indicator
Q
Q1PIU board front panel, 9-54
R
R1PIU board front panel, 9-55 principle, 9-52, 9-53 R1PIUA board front panel, 9-56 R1SL1 board front panel, 5-33 function, 5-32 indicator, 5-34 interface, 5-34 parameter configuration, 5-34 principle, 5-32 slots, 5-31
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Index
technical parameter, 5-35 R1SL1/R1SLQ1 board version description, 5-35 R1SL4 board front panel, 5-33 function, 5-32 indicator, 5-34 interface, 5-34 parameter configuration, 5-34 principle, 5-32 slots, 5-31 technical parameter, 5-35 R1SL4/R1SLD4 board version description, 5-35 R1SLD1 board function, 5-32 R1SLD4 board front panel, 5-33 indicator, 5-34 interface, 5-34 parameter configuration, 5-34 principle, 5-32 slots, 5-31 technical parameter, 5-35 R1SLQ1 board front panel, 5-33 function, 5-32 indicator, 5-34 interface, 5-34 parameter configuration, 5-34 principle, 5-32 slots, 5-31 technical parameter, 5-35 RS-232/422 serial port cable, 10-24
S
SAP board front panel, 9-46 function, 9-31 principle, 9-35 slots, 9-30 version description, 9-50 SC/PC optical interface, 10-4 SCC power monitoring module, 8-19 SCC board communication module, 8-18 control module, 8-18
front panel, 8-19 function, 8-17 indicator, 8-20 interface, 8-22 principle, 8-17 slots, 8-17 switch, 8-20 technical parameter, 8-22 version description, 8-22 SEI board front panel, 9-46 function, 9-31 principle, 9-36 slots, 9-30 version description, 9-50 SEP1 board 1:N TPS protection, 5-42 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 5-45 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 5-45 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 5-44 front panel, 5-40 function, 5-37 indicator, 5-41 interface, 5-41 parameter configuration, 5-46 principle, 5-39 slots, 5-36 technical parameter, 5-47 version description, 5-47 serial 14/F&f cable, 10-23 service activation indicator, A-2 service alarm indicator, A-3 SF16 board front panel, 5-11 function, 5-8 indicator, 5-12 interface, 5-12 parameter configuration, 5-13 principle, 5-10 slots, 5-7 technical parameter, 5-14 version description, 5-14 signal label byte, 5-5 size cabinet, 2-5
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Index
OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, 3-24 OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-32 OptiX OSN 2500 subrack, 3-18 OptiX OSN 3500 subrack, 3-10 SL1 board front panel, 5-27 function, 5-25 indicator, 5-28 interface, 5-28 parameter configuration, 5-28 principle, 5-26 slots, 5-24 technical parameter, 5-29 version description, 5-29 SL16 board front panel, 5-11 function, 5-8 indicator, 5-12 interface, 5-12 parameter configuration, 5-13 principle, 5-10 slots, 5-7 technical parameter, 5-14 version description, 5-14 SL4 board front panel, 5-20 function, 5-17 indicator, 5-21 interface, 5-21 parameter configuration, 5-21 principle, 5-19 slots, 5-17 technical parameter, 5-22 version description, 5-22 SL64 board front panel, 5-4 function, 5-2 indicator, 5-5 interface, 5-5 parameter configuration, 5-5 principle, 5-3 slots, 5-1 technical parameters, 5-6 version description, 5-6 SLD4 board front panel, 5-20 function, 5-17 interface, 5-21
parameter configuration, 5-21 principle, 5-19 slots, 5-17 technical parameter, 5-22 version description, 5-22 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 1500A board, 3-22 for OptiX OSN 1500B board, 3-28 for OptiX OSN 2500 board, 3-14 for OptiX OSN 2500 REG board, 3-19 for OptiX OSN 3500 board, 3-4 OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-20 OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-26 OptiX OSN 2500, 3-11 OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3 slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-28 slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-13 slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3 SLQ1 board front panel, 5-27 function, 5-25 indicator, 5-28 interface, 5-28 parameter configuration, 5-28 principle, 5-26 slots, 5-24 technical parameter, 5-29 version description, 5-29 SLQ4 board front panel, 5-20 function, 5-17 interface, 5-21 parameter configuration, 5-21 principle, 5-19 slots, 5-17 technical parameter, 5-22 version description, 5-22 SLT1 board front panel, 5-27 function, 5-25 indicator, 5-28 interface, 5-28 parameter configuration, 5-28 principle, 5-26 slots, 5-24 technical parameter, 5-29
10
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
Index
version description, 5-29 SPQ4 board 1:N TPS protection, 6-5 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-9 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-8 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 6-7 front panel, 6-4 function, 6-2 indicator, 6-5 interface, 6-5 parameter configuration, 6-9 principle, 6-3 slots, 6-1 technical parameter, 6-11 version description, 6-10 SRV. see service alarm indicator STAT. see board hardware indicator STM-1 electrical processing board SEP1, 5-36 STM-1 interface board EU08, 5-36 MU04, 6-1 OU08, 5-36 STM-1 optical processing board SL1 board, 5-24 SLQ1 board, 5-24 SLT1 board, 5-24 STM-1 optical processing board (half-slot) R1SL1 board, 5-31 R1SLQ1 board, 5-31 STM-1/E4 processing board SPQ4, 6-1 STM-16 optical processing board SL16 board, 5-7 STM-4 optical processing board SL4 board, 5-17 SLD4 board, 5-17 SLQ4 board, 5-17 STM-4 optical processing board (half-slot) R1SL4 board, 5-31 R1SLD4 board, 5-31 STM-64 processing board SL64 board, 5-1 straight through cable, 10-27 subrack
size for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-24 size for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-32 size for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-18 size for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-10 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-20 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-26 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-11 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 2500 REG, 3-19 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3 technical parameter for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-24 technical parameter for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-32 technical parameter for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-18 technical parameter for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-10 weight for OptiX OSN 1500, 3-32 weight for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-24 weight for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-18 weight for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-10 subrack power cable, 10-8 subrack structure OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-20 OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-25 OptiX OSN 2500, 3-10 OptiX OSN 3500, 3-2 system auxiliary interface board AUX, 9-30 SAP, 9-30 SEI, 9-30 system control & communication board GSCC, 8-17 SCC, 8-17 system control and clock unit for REG CRG, 8-23
T
tail fiber, 10-1 technical parameter 120 ohm E1 cable, 10-37, 10-39 cabinet, 2-5 OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-24 OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-32 OptiX OSN 2500 subrack, 3-18 OptiX OSN 3500 subrack, 3-10
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34
11
Index
technical specification COA, 9-24 telephone wire, 10-25 TPS protection 1:1, 7-18 1:N, 6-5, 6-16 TSB8. see also SEP1 TSB8 board front panel, 5-40 function, 5-37, 6-13 slots, 5-36, 6-12 technical parameter, 5-47 version description, 5-47
indicator, 8-5 interface, 8-6 parameter configuration, 8-7 principle, 8-3 technical parameter, 8-7 UXCSA board version description, 8-7
W
wavelength conversion board LWX, 9-1 weight board (summary table), C-1 cabinet, 2-5 OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, 3-24 OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-32 OptiX OSN 2500subrack, 3-18 OptiX OSN 3500subrack, 3-10
U
uninterruptible power modules UPM, 9-58 UPM, 2-5 front panel, 9-60 function, 9-59 indicator, 9-61 interface, 9-62 precaution, 9-63 priciple, 9-60 technical parameter, 9-63 UPM power cable, 10-13 UXCS board front panel, 8-4 function, 8-2
X
XCE board front panel, 8-4 function, 8-2 indicator, 8-5 interface, 8-6 parameter configuration, 8-7 technical parameter, 8-7 version description, 8-7
12
T2-042590-20060520-C-1.34

Osn 1500 2500 3500

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Osn 1500 2500 3500

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 Equipment Architecture ............................................................................... 1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 ...................................................... 1.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Copyright 2006 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

4 Board Classification and List...................................................................................................4-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

7 Data Processing Boards.............................................................................................................7-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards ..........................................................................8-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

9 Other Boards ...............................................................................................................................9-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board.............................................................. A-1

B Board Version Description .....................................................................................................B-1

C Power Consumption and Weight..........................................................................................C-1 D Glossary .................................................................................................................................... D-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

E Acronyms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................ E-4 Index ................................................................................................................................................ i-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

About This Manual

About This Manual